MAXE TM

CENTRIFUGAL LIQUID CHILLERS

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS Supersedes: 160.54-M1 (402) Form 160.54-M1 (503)

OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER

371-02264-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - NEMA 1) 371-02778-103 (Variable Speed Drive - NEMA 1-4)
(P Compressors until 8/02)
371-02486-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - CE)
371-02780-103 (Variable Speed Drive - CE)
371-02448-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - NEMA 4/12) (P Compressors until 8/02)
371-02264-102 (Solid State Starter - NEMA 1) 371-02779-103 (Variable Speed Drive - NEMA 4/12)
371-02486-102 (Solid State Starter - CE) (P Compressors until 8/02)

371-02448-102 (Solid State Starter - NEMA 4/12) 371-04118-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter – NEMA 1)
(Style F Chillers)
371-02264-103 (Variable Speed Drive - NEMA 1)
371-04118-102 (Style B Solid State Starter – NEMA 1)
371-02486-103 (Variable Speed Drive - CE) (Style F Chillers)
371-02448-103 (Variable Speed Drive - NEMA 4/12) 371-04118-103 (Variable Speed Drive – NEMA 1)
371-02778-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - NEMA 1) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04119-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter – NEMA 4/12)
371-02780-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - CE) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04119-102 (Mod “B” Solid State Starter - NEMA 4/12)
371-02779-101 (Electro-Mechanical Starter - NEMA 4/12) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04119-103 (Variable Speed Drive – NEMA 4/12)
371-02778-102 (MOD “B” Solid State Starter - NEMA 1) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04120-101 (Electro-mechanical Starter – CE)
371-02780-102 (MOD “B” Solid State Starter - CE) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04120-102 (Mod “B” Solid State Starter – CE)
371-02779-102 (MOD “B” Solid State Starter - NEMA 4/12) (Style F Chillers)
(P Compressors until 8/02) 371-04120-103 (Variable Speed Drive – CE)
(Style F Chillers)

MODEL YK (THROUGH STYLE F)

m 00614VIP

Metric Conversions
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES

This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
During installation, operation, maintenance or service, death to themselves and people at the site.
individuals may be exposed to certain components or
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants, This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
oils, materials under pressure, rotating components, and operating/service personnel. It is expected that this in-
both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the dividual possesses independent training that will enable
potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause them to perform their assigned tasks properly and safely.
bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and respon- It is essential that, prior to performing any task on this
sibility of operating/service personnel to identify and equipment, this individual shall have read and under-
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, stood this document and any referenced materials. This
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure individual shall also be familiar with and comply with
to comply with any of these requirements could result all applicable governmental standards and regulations
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in pertaining to the task in question.

SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to areas of potential hazard:

DANGER indicates an imminently CAUTION identifies a hazard which

hazardous situation which, if not could lead to damage to the machine,
avoided, will result in death or serious damage to other equipment and/or
injury. environmental pollution. Usually an
instruction will be given, together with
a brief explanation.

WARNING indicates a potentially NOTE is used to highlight additional

haz ard ous sit u a tion which, if not information which may be helpful to
avoided, could result in death or se- you.
rious injury.

External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product

line, is NOT to be connected inside the micro panel cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches,
transducers and controls may NOT be installed inside the micro panel. NO external wir-
ing is allowed to be run through the micro panel. All wiring must be in accordance with
YORK’s published specifications and must be performed ONLY by qualified YORK personnel.
YORK will not be responsible for damages/problems resulting from improper connections
to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this will void the
manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or injury to persons.

2 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

In complying with YORK’s policy for continuous It is the responsibility of operating/service personnel
product improvement, the information contained in as to the applicability of these documents to the equip-
this document is subject to change without notice. ment in question. If there is any question in the mind
While YORK makes no commitment to update or of operating/service personnel as to the applicability of
pro vide current in for ma tion automatically to the these documents, then, prior to working on the equip-
manual owner, that information, if applicable, can ment, they should verify with the owner whether the
be obtained by contacting the nearest YORK Applied equipment has been modified and if current literature
Systems Service office. is available.
REFERENCE INSTRUCTIONS
DESCRIPTION FORM NO.
SOLID STATE STARTER (MOD “A”) – OPERATION & MAINTENANCE 160.46-OM3.1
SOLID STATE STARTER (MOD “B”) – OPERATION & MAINTENANCE 160.00-O2
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE – OPERATION 160.00-O1
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE – SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 160.00-M1
VARIABLE SPEED OIL PUMP DRIVE 160.52-M2
INSTALLATION 160.54-N1
OPERATION 160.54-O1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) WITH ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER 160.54-PW1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) WITH MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER 160.54-PW2
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) WITH MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER 160.54-PW2.1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) WITH VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE 160.54-PW3
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) (P COMPRESSORS) WITH ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER 160.54-PW8
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) (P COMPRESSORS) WITH MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER 160.54-PW9
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE E) (P COMPRESSORS) VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE 160.54-PW10
RENEWAL PARTS – UNIT 160.49-RP4
RENEWAL PARTS – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER 160.54-RP1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE F) (ALL COMPRESSORS) WITH ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER 160.73-PW1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE F) (ALL COMPRESSORS) WITH MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER 160.73-PW1
WIRING DIAGRAM – UNIT (STYLE F) (ALL COMPRESSORS) WITH VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE 160.73-PW3

NOMENCLATURE
YK CB CB G4 – CM F
STYLE (DESIGN LEVEL)

MOTOR CODE
60 Hz 50 Hz
POWER SUPPLY
CH CX 5CE 5CT
– for 60 Hz
CJ CY 5CF 5CU
5 for 50 Hz
CK CZ 5CG 5CV
CL CA 5CH 5CW
COMPRESSOR CODE
CM CB 5CI 5CX
G4, H0, H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6
CN DA 5CJ 5DA
H8, J1, J2, J3, J4, P1, P2, P3, P4
CP DB 5CK 5DB
CR DC 5CL 5DC
CONDENSER CODE
CS DD 5CM 5DD
CB, CC, CD, DB, DC, DD, EB, EC, ED
CT DE 5CN 5DE
FB, FC, FD, GB, GC, GD, HB, HC, HD, JB, JC,
CU DF 5CO 5DF
JD, TB, TC, TD, VB, VC, VD
CV DH 5CP 5DG
COOLER CODE
CW DJ 5CQ 5DH
CB, CC, CD, CE, DB, DC, DD, DE, FB, FC, FD
5CR 5OJ
GB, GC, GD, GF, GH, HB, HC, HF, HH, JF, JG
5CS
MODEL JH, TF, TG, TH, VF, VH, WF, WH
YORK INTERNATIONAL 3
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................... 8
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE....................................................................................... 10
SECTION 3 - MICROBOARD.......................................................................................................... 19
SECTION 4 - I/O BOARD................................................................................................................ 37
SECTION 5 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 45
SECTION 6 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD ................................................................................ 54
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD ............................................................. 56
SECTION 8 - KEYPAD .................................................................................................................... 59
SECTION 9 - POWER SUPPLY...................................................................................................... 62
SECTION 10 - CURRENT MODULE (CM-2) .................................................................................. 64
SECTION 11 - SOLID STATE STARTERS...................................................................................... 68
SECTION 12 - ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL BOARD............................................................ 75
SECTION 13 - PROXIMITY PROBE ............................................................................................... 84
SECTION 13A - HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH.............................................. 89
SECTION 14 - REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL ........................................................................ 91
SECTION 15 - OIL PUMP VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE.................................................................... 95
SECTION 16 - MICROGATEWAY ................................................................................................... 99
SECTION 17 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS .............................................................................. 100
SECTION 18 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS ........................................................................ 102
SECTION 19 - REMOTE SETPOINTS.......................................................................................... 120
SECTION 20 - HOT GAS BYPASS ............................................................................................... 125
SECTION 21 - SMART FREEZE PROTECTION .......................................................................... 129
SECTION 22 - SURGE PROTECTION ...................................................................................... 131
SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION....................................................................................... 133
Electro-Mechanical Starter Applications .................................................................................... 133
Solid State Starter Applications ................................................................................................. 134
Mod “B” Serial Data Interface Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter............................................... 134
Mod “A” Multiplexed Data Interface Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter...................................... 135
Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive .................................................................................. 136
Pre-Rotation Vanes Position Potentiometer: ............................................................................. 137
Proximity Probe ......................................................................................................................... 138
Safety Shutdown Reset/Inspection Procedure: ........................................................................ 139
High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch ................................................................................... 140
Refrigerant Level Control .......................................................................................................... 140
Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive ................................................................................................. 142
Standby Lubrication................................................................................................................... 142
High Condenser Pressure Warning Threshold .......................................................................... 143
Brine Low Evaporator Pressure Cutout ..................................................................................... 143
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Control Sensitivity ............................................................ 143
Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature............................................................................................ 144
Smart Freeze Protection ........................................................................................................... 144
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature ......................................................................................... 144
Hot Gas Bypass Control ............................................................................................................ 144
Chiller Starts and Operating Hours Reset ................................................................................. 145
Service Phone Numbers ........................................................................................................... 146
Surge Protection........................................................................................................................ 146

4 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Sales Order Data....................................................................................................................... 146

Custon User ID and Passwords ................................................................................................ 147
Record Setpoint Changes ......................................................................................................... 148
Chiller Style/Compressor .......................................................................................................... 149
Flow Switch ............................................................................................................................. 151
SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS & TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................ 152
Main Diagnostics Screen........................................................................................................... 153
Keypad Test............................................................................................................................... 154
Display Test ............................................................................................................................... 155
Serial Inputs / Outputs Test ....................................................................................................... 157
Digital Iinputs / Outputs Test...................................................................................................... 159
Anallog Inputs Test .................................................................................................................... 162
SECTION 25 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST ........................................................... 165
SECTION 26 - SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS / BULLETINS............................................ 168
SI0006 - Software Enhancements Effective May 2001 ............................................................. 168
SI0019 - Software Enhancements Effective March 2002 .......................................................... 170
SI0034 (203) - Software Enhancements Effective AUGUST 2002........................................... 174
SI0058 - Software Enhancements Effective February 2003...................................................... 178
SI0062 - Software Enhancements Effective March 2003 .......................................................... 180

YORK INTERNATIONAL 5
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LIST OF FIGURES

FIG. 1 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

STARTER APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................. 13
FIG. 2 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS . 14
FIG. 3 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS . 15
FIG. 4 – OptiView CONTROL CENTER - COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE... 16
FIG. 5 – OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM
(ELECTRO-MECHANICAL & SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS) ....................... 17
FIG. 6 – OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM
(COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE APPLICATIONS) ......................... 18
FIG. 7 – MICROBOARD.................................................................................................................. 28
FIG. 8 – FLASH MEMORY CARD................................................................................................... 29
FIG. 9 – MICROBOARD.................................................................................................................. 30
FIG. 10 – MICROBOARD LAMP DIMMER CIRCUIT...................................................................... 34
FIG. 11 – MICROBOARD SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS PORTS......................................... 35
FIG. 12 – CONFIGURABLE ANALOG & REMOTE SETPOINT INPUTS ....................................... 36
FIG. 13 – I/O BOARD ..................................................................................................................... 39
FIG. 14 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL INPUTS ......................................................................................... 40
FIG. 15 – I/O BOARD TYPICAL OPTO-COUPLER CIRCUIT......................................................... 41
FIG. 16 – I/O BOARD TYPICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS ............................................................... 41
FIG. 17 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS ..................................................................................... 42
FIG. 18 – DISPLAY, MOUNTING .................................................................................................... 48
FIG. 19 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ10D367 DISPLAY ..................... 49
FIG. 20 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ10D421 DISPLAY ..................... 49
FIG. 21 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – NEC NL6448AC33-24 DISPLAY ................ 50
FIG. 22 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY - LG SEMICON LP104V2-W ......................... 51
FIG. 23 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY TYPICAL CONTROL SIGNAL TIMING.............................. 51
FIG. 24 – DISPLAY (SHARP LQ10D367) LAMP REPLACEMENT................................................. 52
FIG. 25 – DISPLAY (SHARP LQ10D421) LAMP REPLACEMENT................................................. 52
FIG. 26 – DISPLAY (NEC NL6448AC33-24) LAMP REPLACEMENT ............................................ 53
FIG. 27 – DISPLAY (LG SEMICON LP104V2-W) LAMP REPLACEMENT..................................... 53
FIG. 28 – DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD....................................................................................... 55
FIG. 29 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD .................................................................. 57
FIG. 30 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD .................................................................. 58
FIG. 31 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD .................................................................. 58
FIG. 32 – KEYPAD .......................................................................................................................... 60
FIG. 33 – KEYPAD .......................................................................................................................... 61
FIG. 34 – POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................ 62
FIG. 35 – POWER SUPPLY – DC POWER DISTRIBUTION
(REFER TO OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER WIRING DIAGRAM
FOR WIRE CONNECTIONS).......................................................................................... 63
FIG. 36 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATION) ...... 66
FIG. 37 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS).... 66
FIG. 38 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE – INTERFACE, CURRENT TRANSFORMERS &
VARIABLE RESISTORS ................................................................................................. 67
FIG. 39 – MOD “B” LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE ............. 70
FIG. 40 – SOLID STATE STARTER LOGIC BOARD ...................................................................... 71
FIG. 41 – MOD “A” LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE ............. 74

6 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 42 – COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

(VSD) ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD .............................................. 81
FIG. 43 – ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD - INTERFACE ................................. 82
FIG. 44 – ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD ......................................................... 83
FIG. 45 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE ................................................................. 86
FIG. 46 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE .................................................................. 86
FIG. 47 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE .................................................................. 87
FIG. 48 – PROXIMITY PROBE ....................................................................................................... 88
FIG. 49 – HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH - INTERFACE ................................. 89
FIG. 50 – HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH ........................................................ 90
FIG. 51 – REFRIGERANT LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR ..................................................................... 93
FIG. 52 – REFRIGERANT LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL - INTERFACE ........................................... 94
FIG. 53 – OIL PUMP VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) ................................................................. 97
FIG. 54 – OIL PUMP VSD / OIL HEATER CONTROL – INTERFACE ............................................ 98
FIG. 55 – OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL SIGNAL ................................................................. 98
FIG. 56 – MICROGATEWAY INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM ....................................................... 99
FIG. 57 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS ...................................................................................... 101
FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE .............................................................. 103
FIG. 59 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE ............................................................. 108
FIG. 60 – RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER......................................................... 111
FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE......................................................................114
FIG. 62 – DROP LEG REFRIGERANT SENSOR ........................................................................119
FIG. 63 – EVAPORATOR REFRIGERANT SENSOR...................................................................119
FIG. 64 – INTERFACE, HOT GAS BYPASS ................................................................................. 128
FIG. 65 – MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN.................................................................................... 153
FIG. 66 – KEYPAD TEST SCREEN .............................................................................................. 154
FIG. 67 – DISPLAY TEST MAIN SCREEN.................................................................................... 155
FIG. 68 – BIT PATTERNS TEST SCREEN ................................................................................... 156
FIG. 69 – SERIAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TEST SCREEN ............................................................. 157
FIG. 70 – MICROBOARD - COM 5 SERIAL DATA PORT............................................................. 158
FIG. 71 – DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TEST SCREEN ............................................................ 159
FIG. 72 – ANALOG INPUTS TEST SCREEN ............................................................................... 162

YORK INTERNATIONAL 7
 Introduction
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This document explains the operation of the printed circuit In addition to this document, several levels of supporting
boards and major components of the OptiView Control documentation are required while servicing the system.
Center to a level that allows a Service Technician to trou- Field Control Modifications Diagram 160.54-PW7 pro-
bleshoot and locate the source of a problem. vides details of the interface to remote devices. Operations
Manual 160.54-O1 explains the operation of the OptiView
The overall system architecture is described and illus- Control Center Keypad, how to enter Setpoints and ex-
trated with block diagrams. This describes the general plains all the messages displayed on the OptiView Control
function of each component and provides the system in- Center display. The following wiring diagrams provide
terface and signal flow. The function of each component the connections between the printed circuit boards and
and signal flow between components must be understood components within the OptiView Control Center:
before effective troubleshooting can commence.
Chillers Through Style E
The operation of each printed circuit board is described (Except "P" Compressors):
and illustrated with a block diagram that is a simplified
• YORK Form 160.54-PW1 – Chillers equipped with
representation of board circuitry. The expected voltage Electro-Mechanical starter
level at all inputs and outputs of each board for any
• YORK Form 160.54-PW2 – Chillers equipped with
operating condition is provided. Mod “A” YORK Solid State Starter
• YORK Form 160.54-PW2.1 – Chillers equipped
Included in this document are procedures that have to
with Mod “B” YORK Solid State Starter
be performed at chiller commissioning or during ser-
• YORK Form 160.54-PW3 – Chillers equipped with
vice. They should not be performed by anyone other
YORK Variable Speed Drive
than a Service Technician. For example, calibration
procedures have to be performed or verified at system
Chillers Through Style E
commissioning or when a component is replaced. Cer-
("P" Compressors):
tain Safety shutdowns require special reset procedures
to be performed before the chiller can be restarted.
• YORK Form 160.54-PW8 – Chillers (“P” Compres-
Since the operating program supplied in each OptiView sors) equipped with Electro-Mechanical Starter
Control Center is universal to all applications, special
• YORK Form 160.54-PW9 – Chillers (“P” Compressors)
setpoints, program jumpers and program switches are
equipped with Mod “B” YORK Solid State Starter
required to configure the chiller for local operating
• YORK Form 160.54-PW10 – Chillers (“P” Com-
conditions.
pressors) equipped with YORK Variable Speed
Drive
A System Commissioning Checklist is provided as reference
of items to be performed during chiller commissioning.
Style F Chillers
(All Compressors):
Chillers that are equipped with “P” Compressors have
certain component variances. These variances are noted • YORK Form 160.73-PW1 – (Electro-Mechanical
in the appropriate sections of this book. Starter)
• YORK Form 160.73-PW2 – (Mod “B” YORK Solid
State Starter)
• YORK Form 160.73-PW3 – (Variable Speed
Drive)

8 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

1
When the chiller shuts down on a SAFETY or CY- Before beginning any troubleshooting, observe the shut-
CLING shutdown or is being prevented from starting, down message and retrieve the HISTORY data of that
a message is displayed providing the reason for the shut- event. Refer to the Operations Manual for an explanation
down. This message, along with all the chiller operating of the message. The conditions required to produce the
conditions at the instant of the event are stored in the message must be clearly understood before proceeding.
Microboard battery-backed memory. This history data (If this is not heeded, much time will be wasted). Armed
can be displayed or printed using an optional printer. with a knowledge of the overall system architecture and
The Operations Manual 160.54-O1 provides a detailed the function of each printed circuit board and signal flow
description of this message, including the conditions provided by this manual, proceed with the appropri-
required to produce the message and conditions required ate Wiring Diagram listed above to trace the problem
to restart the chiller. through the system. Use the Diagnostic Routines where
appropriate.
Diagnostic Routines allow service analysis of the fol-
lowing functions:

• Display
• Analog inputs
• Digital inputs
• Digital outputs
• Serial Data ports

YORK INTERNATIONAL 9
 System Architecture
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 2
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The OptiView Control Center performs the following Digital Inputs are on/off inputs to the OptiView Control
functions: Center in the form of switch and relay contacts. These
• Controls chiller capacity to chill liquid to the chilled inputs are 115VAC when the contacts are closed and
liquid temperature setpoint. 0VAC when open. These include flow switches, local
start/stop switch, remote cycling and high pressure
• Controls chiller solenoid valves, relays, actuators
safety device, etc.
and motor contactors per the operating program.
• Displays chiller operating conditions, alarms, shut- Digital Outputs are on/off outputs from the OptiView
down messages and history data. Control Center in the form of relay contacts and triacs.
• Accepts operator-programmed setpoints and con- The relay contacts typically switch 115VAC and the
trols the chiller accordingly. triacs typically switch a nominal 30VAC. Relay outputs
• Allows manual control of chiller motor contactors include status/alarm, chiller solenoid valves, oil heater,
and actuators. oil pump starter and chilled and condenser water pump
• Monitors chiller operating conditions and shuts starters, etc. Triac outputs include pre-rotation vane
down chiller when Safety or Cycling thresholds control and variable orifice control.
are exceeded.
Serial Data is transmitted to and received from devices
• Allows local manual start/stop and accepts start/ in RS-232, RS-485 and TX/RX (opto-couple) form.
stop commands from remote devices, via contact
closures or serial communications. The OptiView Control Center supports three types of
• Allows setpoints to be changed from a remote lo- starters; Electro-Mechanical Starter, Solid State Starter
cation via 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA, and Variable Speed Drive. However, all OptiView Con-
contact closures or serial communications. trol Centers contain the following standard components,
• Provides chiller operating data and status to remote regardless of the starter type applied:
devices via serial communications and contact • Microboard
closures. • I/O (input/output) Board
• Allows real-time data and history data to be printed • Keypad
on an optional printer.
• Display
• Controls the compressor motor starter and contains
a printed circuit board logic that supports Electro- • Power Supply
Mechanical Starters, Solid State Starters and YORK
Variable Speed Drive. In addition to the standard components, the OptiView
Control Center contains a printed circuit board that
The OptiView Control Center is a microprocessor provides certain control and interface functions for the
based control system that receives analog, digital and starter type applied. Each starter type requires a different
serial data inputs and controls analog, digital and serial board as follows:
data outputs per instructions in the operating program.
A panel mounted display and touch-sensitive keypad • Electro-Mechanical Starter - CM-2 Current Mod-
permit local operation. ule
• Solid State Starter (Mod “A” only) - Logic Board
System pressures are sensed by pressure transducers • Variable Speed Drive - Adaptive Capacity Control
The output of each transducer is a DC voltage that is Board
analogous to the pressure input. System temperatures are
sensed by thermistors. The output of each thermistor Figures 1 through 4 are OptiView Control Center block
is a DC voltage that is analogous to the temperature it diagrams of the three starter types. On each block di-
is sensing. Typical output voltage range of both is 0.5 agram, the standard components are shown, along with
to 4.5VDC. These are analog inputs to the OptiView the printed circuit board that supports the applied starter
Control Center. type. Figures 5 and 6 are Operation Sequence timing
diagrams of the different starter applications.

10 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The microprocessor and all supporting logic circuits, along on the condenser shell but has a different wiring in-
with the memory devices containing the operating program, terface to the I/O Board and Motor Controller circuit.
reside on the Microboard. All chiller operating decisions Refer to the I/O Board section of this book. Also, “P” 2
are made here. It receives analog and digital inputs from compressor applications and style “F” and later chillers
the chiller and remote devices. The analog inputs are with “G” and “H5-8” compressors are equipped with a
connected directly to the Microboard. The digital inputs High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch instead of the
are received via the I/O Board (see description below). Proximity Probe supplied on other compressors. This
Under Program control, the Microboard operates the device detects abnormal bearing position through probe
relays and triacs that are located on the I/O Board. contact instead of distance measurement as performed
with the Proximity Probe.
The I/O Board acts as an input/output device for the
Microboard. It conditions the digital input signals for Style C and earlier chillers are equipped with fixed speed
the Microboard and contains relays and triacs that are oil pumps. Style D and later chillers are equipped with
controlled by the Microboard to control solenoids, Variable Speed Oil Pumps.
motor contactors and actuators. The 115VAC digital
inputs from switch and relay contacts are converted to Style F (and later) chillers require Flash Memory card
logic level voltages by Opto-Couplers. The relays have version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later and are supplied
+12VDC coils that are energized and de-energized by with factory-mounted Flow Sensors on the evapora-
the Microboard. The contacts of these relays control the tor and condenser. These are electronic thermal-type
115VAC system solenoids, relays and motor contactors. sensors. The operating principle of the sensor is thermal
The triacs are turned on and off by the Microboard. The conductivity. It uses the cooling effect of a flowing liq-
outputs of these triacs control actuators. uid to sense flow. The temperature of the heated sensor
tip is sensed by a thermistor located in the tip. A second
A front panel-mounted Keypad allows Operator and thermistor, located higher in the tip in a non-heated area,
Service Technician user interface. Membrane keys are is only affected by changes in liquid temperature. The
used to display chiller and system parameters, enter temperatures sensed by the thermistors are compared.
setpoints and perform chiller and OptiView Control Flowing liquid carries heat away from the heated sensor
Center diagnostics. It also contains a START-RUN- tip, lowering its temperature. The lower temperature dif-
STOP/RESET Switch that is used to locally start and ferential between the two thermistors indicates the liquid
stop the chiller and perform manual reset functions. is flowing. A higher differential indicates no flow. These
sensors are interfaced to Microboard analog inputs. Re-
A front panel mounted liquid crystal Display allows fer to the SECTION 3 for a detailed explanation of this
graphic animated display of the chiller, chiller subsys- flow sensor and interface.
tems and system parameters. The chiller and working
components of the chiller are displayed, along with If equipped with Flash Memory Card version
chiller operating pressures and temperatures. The Key- C.MLM.01.07.xxx (and later), the chiller Style/Com-
pad is used to select displays showing increasing levels pressor combination must be entered using the Chiller
of detail of chiller working components. Style/Compressor Setpoint (refer to SECTION 23).
Once the applicable chiller style/compressor combina-
A self-contained Power Supply supplies the necessary tion is entered, the program automatically bundles the
DC voltages for all the components within the OptiView functionality and chiller control per the entered chiller
Control Center. style/compressor requirements. The various chiller
style/compressor combinations are equipped differently
Chillers equipped with “P” compressors and all style and have different control requirements. The variables
“F” and later chillers have a different Condenser High include:
Pressure Safety Cutout Switch (HPCO) than supplied on
other compressor applications. This switch is mounted • High Speed Thrust bearing proximity sensing
– Proximity Probe or Limit Switch

YORK INTERNATIONAL 11
 System Architecture
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

• Flow Sensor – Paddle type or Factory Mounted When the compressor motor is driven by the YORK
Thermal Type. The paddle type applies 115Vac to Variable Speed Drive (VSD), the OptiView Control
the I/O Board Digital inputs TB4-12 (evaporator) Center is equipped with an Adaptive Capacity Con-
and TB4-11 (condenser) (refer to fig 14). The fac- trol Board. This printed circuit board monitors system
tory mounted Thermal type (available with Style F parameters and controls the VSD to drive the compressor
and later chillers), applies +5Vdc to the microboard at the slowest speed it will operate without surging, while
Analog inputs at J7-14 (evaporator) and J7-16 maintaining required chiller capacity.
(condenser)(refer to fig 12). Flash Memory Card
version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and C.MLM.01.07A.xxx Serial data interface to the YORK ISN Building Auto-
automatically selects the Flow Sensor input, either mation System is through the optional MicroGateway.
digital or analog per the Chiller Style/Compressor This printed circuit board requests the required data
Setpoint selection. Flash Memory Card version from the Microboard and makes it available for the
C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later allows use of either ISN network.
the Thermal-type or the Paddle-type flow sensors
on style F and later chillers. With these versions,
the actual flow sensor type present must be entered
using the Flow Switch Setpoint (refer to SECTION
23).
• Oil Heater Outputs – Either TB1-34 or TB1-64 on
I/O Board
• Refrigerant Level Control Default Period – Either
3.5 seconds or 10.0 seconds
• “Oil – Variable Speed Pump-Pressure Setpoint Not
Achieved” safety shutdown threshold – Either 25
PSID or 35 PSID

When the compressor motor is driven by an Electro-

Mechanical Starter, the OptiView Control center is
equipped with a CM-2 Current Module. This printed
circuit board provides current overload and power fault
protection for the compressor motor. Current Trans-
formers, located in the compressor motor terminal box,
along with rectifying and calibration circuitry, provide
an analog voltage representing compressor motor current
to the CM-2 Module. This signal is further conditioned
and provided to the Microboard.

When the compressor motor is driven by a YORK Solid

State Starter, there could be either of two different Solid
Starters applied. Later production chillers are equipped
with the Mod “B” Solid State Starter. This starter con-
tains a combination Logic/Trigger Board that interfaces
the Microboard via a serial communications link. Earlier
vintage chillers are equipped with the Mod “A” Solid
State Starter. This starter contains a Trigger Board that
interfaces to a Logic Board that is installed inside the
OptiView Control Center. The Logic Board interfaces
the Microboard via a multiplexed data interface.

12 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 RS-232 / RS-485 SERIAL DATA
FACTORY-MOUNTED CHILLED AND CONDENSER LIQUID THERMAL-TYPE OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL
FLOW SENSORS (STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS)
CHILLER TEMPERATURES & PRESSURES
CONDENSER REFRIGERANT LEVEL +12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING POSITION (NOT APPLICABLE TO "P" COMPRESSORS SUPPLY
AND STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS)
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP &

YORK INTERNATIONAL
CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINTS (0-20mA, 4-20 mA / 0 - 10 VDC, 2-10VDC)
+ 24 VDC

BACKLIGHT
LAMP LAMP COMPRESSOR
INVERTER ADDRESS
CONTROL MOTOR
BOARD
CURRENT
LIQUID CM-2
CRYSTAL CURRENT
DISPLAY DISPLAY DATA
DISPLAY MODULE
INTERFACE MICROBOARD
BOARD MULTIPLEXED DATA

ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT

MOTOR CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWN TO I/O BOARD

I / O BOARD
TO STARTER
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START
VANE MOTOR SWITCH
REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY
CHILLER SOLENOID VALVES
LOCAL START / STOP SWITCH
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCHES (STYLE "E" AND OIL PUMP STARTER
EARLIER CHILLERS; OPTIONAL STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH
FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.08.XXX OR LATER VERSIONS) OIL HEATER ON/OFF
OIL PUMP VSD CYCLING STATUS
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER PUMP STARTERS
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT
LIMIT SETPOINTS (CONTACT CLOSURE) VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH ("P" COMPRESSORS AND
STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS) PRE-ROTATION VANE CONTROL

FIG. 1 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS LD09036

13
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2
 RS-232 / RS-485 SERIAL DATA

14
OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL

+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

CHILLER TEMPERATURES & PRESSURES
CONDENSER REFRIGERANT LEVEL
SUPPLY
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING POSITION
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & + 24 VDC
CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINTS (0-20mA, 4-20mA / 0 - 10VDC, 2-10VDC)

COMPRESSOR
MOTOR
System Architecture

BACKLIGHT CURRENT
LAMP LAMP
INVERTER ADDRESS
CONTROL
BOARD
TRIGGER
SOLID
LIQUID BOARD
STATE
CRYSTAL STATUS
DISPLAY DISPLAY DATA STARTER
DISPLAY INTERFACE LOGIC
MICROBOARD BOARD TRIGGER
BOARD MULTIPLEXED DATA BOARD
CONTROL
ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT

MOTOR CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWN TO I/O BOARD

I / O BOARD
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START
VANE MOTOR SWITCH
REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY
CHILLER SOLENOID VALVES
LOCAL START / STOP SWITCH
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCHES OIL PUMP STARTER
OIL PUMP VSD CYCLING STATUS
OIL HEATER ON/OFF
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER PUMP STARTERS
LIMIT SETPOINTS (CONTACT CLOSURE)

VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL

PRE-ROTATION VANE CONTROL

FIG. 2 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS LD09037
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 RS-232 / RS-485 SERIAL DATA
FACTORY-MOUNTED CHILLED AND CONDENSER LIQUID THERMAL-TYPE OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL
FLOW SENSORS (STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS)
CHILLER TEMPERATURES & PRESSURES
CONDENSER REFRIGERANT LEVEL +12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING POSITION (NOT APPLICABLE TO "P" COMPRESSORS SUPPLY
AND STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS)
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP &

YORK INTERNATIONAL
CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINTS (0-20mA, 4-20 mA / 0 - 10 VDC, 2-10VDC)
+ 24 VDC

COMPRESSOR
MOTOR
BACKLIGHT CURRENT &
LAMP LAMP LINE VOLTAGE
INVERTER
CONTROL
BOARD
SCR
SOLID
LIQUID CONTROL
STATE
CRYSTAL DISPLAY STARTER
DISPLAY DATA
DISPLAY INTERFACE LOGIC/TRIGGER
MICROBOARD BOARD
BOARD SERIAL DATA

ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT

MOTOR CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWN TO I/O BOARD

I / O BOARD
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START
VANE MOTOR SWITCH
REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM

HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY CHILLER SOLENOID VALVES

LOCAL START / STOP SWITCH
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCHES (STYLE "E" AND OIL PUMP STARTER
EARLIER CHILLERS; OPTIONAL STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH
FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.08.XXX OR LATER VERSIONS) OIL HEATER ON/OFF
OIL PUMP VSD CYCLING STATUS
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER PUMP STARTERS
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT
LIMIT SETPOINTS (CONTACT CLOSURE) VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL

HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH ("P" COMPRESSORS AND

STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS) PRE-ROTATION VANE CONTROL

FIG. 3 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS LD09038

15
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2
 RS-232 / RS-485 SERIAL DATA

16
FACTORY-MOUNTED CHILLED AND CONDENSER LIQUID THERMAL-TYPE OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL
FLOW SENSORS (STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS)
CHILLER TEMPERATURES & PRESSURES
CONDENSER REFRIGERANT LEVEL +12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING POSITION (NOT APPLICABLE TO "P" COMPRESSORS SUPPLY
AND STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS)
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP &
CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINTS (0-20mA, 4-20 mA / 0 - 10 VDC, 2-10VDC) + 24 VDC

VSD
System Architecture

BACKLIGHT TX/RX
LAMP LOGIC
LAMP INVERTER TX / RX SERIAL DATA BOARD
CONTROL SERIAL DATA
BOARD
COMPRESSOR
LIQUID VSD RX
VSD
ADAPTIVE SERIAL DATA
CRYSTAL DISPLAY FILTER
DISPLAY DATA CAPACITY
DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD
MICRO BOARD EVAP PRESSURE CONTROL
BOARD BOARD VANE
COND PRESSURE POSITION
ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT

I / O BOARD
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START
TO VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD)
VANE MOTOR SWITCH
REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY
CHILLER SOLENOID VALVES
LOCAL START / STOP SWITCH
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCHES (STYLE "E" AND OIL PUMP STARTER
EARLIER CHILLERS; OPTIONAL STYLE F AND LATER CHILLERS WITH
FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.08.XXX OR LATER VERSIONS) OIL HEATER ON/OFF
OIL PUMP VSD CYCLING STATUS
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER PUMP STARTERS
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT
LIMIT SETPOINTS (CONTACT CLOSURE)
VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH ("P" COMPRESSORS AND
STYLE "F" AND LATER CHILLERS WITH "G" AND "H5-8" COMPRESSORS)
PRE-ROTATION VANE CONTROL

FIG. 4 – OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER - COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE LD09039
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TIMING DIAGRAM – CHILLERS EQUIPPED WITH FIXED SPEED OIL PUMP (STYLE C)

DISPLAY AUTO ZEROING DIFFERENTIAL

MESSAGE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
"SYSTEM RUN"
ENERGIZE (OPEN) HIGH SPEED

2
THRUST SOLENOID
ENERGIZE (OPEN) LIQUID LINE, VENT LINE
"SYSTEM PRELUBE" MAN. OIL & OIL RETURN SOLENOIDS
PUMP
** "VANES CLOSING DISABLED ** VANES CLOSING - TIME
BEFORE
DEPENDENT ON INITIAL
SHUTDOWN"
VANE POSITION

OIL PRESSURE CHECK

"SYSTEM
COASTDOWN"

OIL PUMP ON

"SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN" FLOW
BYPASS 150 SEC.
SWITCH (2.5 MIN)
0 10 13 45 50 65 110 VANES VANES 1800
START (0.17) (0.22) (0.75) (0.83) (1.08) (1.83) START CLOSED (30) LD06501
TO RESTART
CLOSE
TIME IN SECONDS (MINUTES) **Only applicable to the following shutdowns. When any of these
shutdowns are performed, the vanes are driven fully closed before
the starter is de-energized. When the vane motor switch closes
(or 210 seconds from start of vane closure have elapsed), the
TIMING DIAGRAM – CHILLERS EQUIPPED WITH starter is de-energized. 1. Low Water Temperature; 2. Multi-Unit
VARIABLE SPEED OIL PUMP Sequence (TB4-9); 3. Remote/Local Cycling (TB4-13); 4. Internal
(STYLE D/E/F) Time Clock; 5. Remote Stop (TB4-8); 6. Remote Stop (ISN Serial
Port). Operator initiated Soft Shutdown (Flash Memory Card ver-
DISPLAY sion C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx)
AUTO ZEROING DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
"SYSTEM RUN"
ENERGIZE (OPEN)
OIL RETURN SOLENOID & LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID (J COMPRESSOR ONLY)
"SYSTEM PRELUBE" MAN. OIL
PUMP
** "VANES CLOSING DISABLED ** VANES CLOSING - TIME
BEFORE DEPENDENT ON INITIAL
SHUTDOWN" VANE POSITION

OIL PRESSURE CHECK

"SYSTEM
COASTDOWN"

OIL PUMP ON

"SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN" FLOW
BYPASS 150 SEC.
SWITCH (2.5 MIN)
0 10 13 45 50 110 VANES VANES 1800
START (0.17) (0.22) (0.75) (0.83) (1.83) START CLOSED (30)
TO RESTART
CLOSE
TIME IN SECONDS (MINUTES)
LD06502
FIG. 5 – OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM
(ELECTRO-MECHANICAL & SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS)
YORK INTERNATIONAL 17
 System Architecture
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TIMING DIAGRAM – CHILLERS EQUIPPED WITH FIXED SPEED OIL PUMP (STYLE C)

DISPLAY AUTO ZEROING DIFFERENTIAL

MESSAGE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
"SYSTEM RUN"
ENERGIZE (OPEN) HIGH SPEED
THRUST SOLENOID
ENERGIZE (OPEN) LIQUID LINE*, VENT LINE
"SYSTEM PRELUBE" MAN. OIL & OIL RETURN SOLENOIDS
PUMP
** "VANES CLOSING DISABLED ** VANES CLOSING - TIME
BEFORE DEPENDENT ON INITIAL
SHUTDOWN" VANE POSITION

OIL PRESSURE CHECK

"SYSTEM
COASTDOWN"

OIL PUMP ON

"SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN" FLOW
BYPASS 150 SEC.
SWITCH (2.5 MIN)
0 10 13 45 50 65 110 VANES VANES 600
START (0.17) (0.22) (0.75) (0.83) (1.08) (1.83) START CLOSED (10)
TO RESTART
RESTART
CLOSE (IF FIVE SUCCESSIVE
RESTARTS HAVE NOT
(ONLY AFTER FIFTH
TIME IN SECONDS (MINUTES) OCCURED) SUCCESSIVE RESTART)
LD06503
* The Liquid Line solenoid will only be energized during this period when the oil
temperature reaches > 140°F. It will then be de-energized when the temprature
is < 135°F.
TIMING DIAGRAM – CHILLERS EQUIPPED WITH **Only applicable to the following shutdowns. When any of these shutdowns
are performed, the vanes are driven fully closed before the starter is de-
VARIABLE SPEED OIL PUMP energized. When the vane motor switch closes (or 210 seconds from start
of vane closure have elapsed), the starter is de-energized. 1. Low Water
(STYLE D/E/F) Temperature; 2. Multi-Unit Sequence (TB4-9); 3. Remote/Local Cycling
(TB4-13); 4. Internal Time Clock; 5. Remote Stop (TB4-8); 6. Remote Stop
DISPLAY AUTO ZEROING DIFFERENTIAL (ISN Serial Port). Operator initiated Soft Shutdown (Flash Memory Card
MESSAGE OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx)

"SYSTEM RUN"
ENERGIZE (OPEN)
OIL RETURN SOLENOID & LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID (J COMPRESSORS ONLY)
"SYSTEM PRELUBE" MAN. OIL
PUMP
** "VANES CLOSING DISABLED ** VANES CLOSING - TIME
BEFORE
DEPENDENT ON INITIAL
SHUTDOWN"
VANE POSITION

OIL PRESSURE CHECK

"SYSTEM
COASTDOWN"

OIL PUMP ON

"SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN" FLOW
BYPASS 150 SEC.
SWITCH (2.5 MIN)
0 10 13 45 50 110 VANES VANES 600
START (0.17) (0.22) (0.75) (0.83) (1.83) START CLOSED (10)
TO RESTART
RESTART
CLOSE (IF FIVE SUCCESSIVE
RESTARTS HAVE NOT
(ONLY AFTER FIFTH
TIME IN SECONDS (MINUTES) OCCURED) SUCCESSIVE RESTART)
LD06504
FIG. 6 – OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM
(COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE APPLICATIONS)
18 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 3
MICROBOARD
(REFER TO FIG. 7 - 12)

The Microboard contains the operating software (Pro- C.MLM.nn.nn.nnn

gram), microprocessor (Micro), and supporting circuits Language Package Revision Level
for the Micro. (00, 01, etc.)
Language Package*
The Program is a set of instructions to control the (0=English only, 1=NEMA 1-4, 2=CE)
chill er, the display and peripheral devices. It also Controls Revision Level (00, 01, etc.)
contains the Safety and Cycling shutdown thresholds Chiller Type 3
(non changeable) and Display messages and screens. (01=YK (all compressors after 8/02),02=YT,
It is stored in a memory device called a flash memory 03=YS, 04=YK (“P” compressors before
card. This is a type of non-volatile memory that can be 8/02), 05=YR)
read from or written to, but requires the locations to be MaxE™ Chiller
erased before they are written to. With the exception of Commercial Chiller
a write/read sequence that occurs during the Boot-up
* Refer to YORK Renewal Parts List 160.54-RP1 for available
process explained below, this device is used primarily languages.
as read-only in this application. A write protect switch 1 = Supplied in new NEMA 1-4 OptiView Control Centers but
is located on the left edge of the card as shown in Fig. can be retrofit to any OptiView Control Center.
8. It must be placed in the “Write Enabled” position in 2 = Supplied in new CE (European Community) OptiView Con-
trol Centers but can be retrofit to any OptiView Con trol
order to allow successful Boot-up. The card is located Center.
in socket location U46 (Ref. Fig. 7). It connects to the
There are several Flash Memory Cards available. The
Board via an Elastomeric connector that is a silicon rub-
difference between them is the different languages that
ber strip embedded with silver conductors. The Card
can be displayed on the Display Screens. Language se-
can be removed from its socket by using the thumb to
lection is performed on the USER Screen following
press down on the socket’s plastic tension spring. The
instructions in Operations Manual 160.54-O1. Not all
card is installed by inserting it into the socket/holder and
languages are available. Refer to Renewal Parts List
pressing on the surface of the Card until it snaps into
160.54-RP1 for list of available Flash Memory Cards and
place. The Memory card is a replaceable component.
display languages. IMPORTANT! – Not all versions
Refer to YORK Renewal Parts List Form 160.54-RP1.
of Flash Memory Cards are compatible with revision
The version of the Memory card is an alpha-numeric
“E” (and later) Microboards or all BIOS Eproms. If an
code that represents the application and revision level.
incompatible version is used, the initialization (boot-up)
The version is printed on a label adhered to the memory
process will not complete and the chiller will not run!
card’s surface. The version code is as follows:
Refer to Renewal Parts List 160.54-RP1 and “Service
Replacement” paragraph in this section.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 19
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Flash Memory Cards are revised to add new features, for display. Similarly, when power is first applied after
enhancements and program corrections. Each time they a power failure, it maintains the Micro in a reset state
are revised, the revision level of the affected portion of until the +5VDC has returned to a sufficient level. The
the program (controls or language) increments. Each Watchdog circuit also assures that all the Program in-
time they are revised, a Service Information Bulletin is structions are being performed and that the Program has
issued that describes the new features. Those bulletins not latched-up, bypassing important safety thresholds. If
that have been issued to date, are located at the rear of this the Program has latched-up, The Micro initiates a Safety
manual. shutdown and displays WATCHDOG – SOFTWARE
REBOOT message.
The Micro controls the chiller by reading and executing
the Program instructions in a sequence determined by The Program Jumpers (Table 1) and Program Switch-
the Program. Under Program control, the Micro reads es (Table 2) are used to alter the Program operation
the Analog and Digital Inputs to determine the oper- or configure the Microboard hardware for specific
ating conditions and controls Digital Outputs based operation. This allows the Program and Microboard
upon these inputs. These inputs are compared to stored to be universal for all applications of the chiller. Refer
thresholds to determine if a Safety or Cycling shutdown to Table 1 and 2 for the function of each jumper and
is required. If a threshold has been exceeded, a shutdown switch. The position of some can be determined and set
is performed and the appropriate message is retrieved by the Service Technician to meet the desired operation
from the Program and displayed on the Liquid Crystal or chiller application. The position of others is dictated
Display. As operating conditions require, status mes- by the size, type or style of certain OptiView Control
sages are retrieved and displayed. The Keypad is read as Center components and thus the position is determined
Digital Inputs. When an operator presses a key to request by the YORK Factory. The required position of each
a display, the Micro interprets the request, retrieves the is listed in these tables. The Program Jumpers are wire
display from the Program and displays it. The Program bridges that are either left in place or cut. The Program
assembles data in the correct format for transmission Switches are miniature switches that are placed in either
through the Serial Data Ports to peripheral devices. The the ON or OFF position.
Program also instructs the Micro to respond to requests
from peripheral devices for serial data transmissions. The DRAM (dynamic random access memory) is a non
battery-backed memory device. The Micro stores data
The MUX (multiplexer) is a switching device that only here temporarily for further processing. Data in this de-
allows one analog input through at a time. The inputs vice is lost during power failures. DRAM differs from
are selected sequentially by the Micro per Program RAM in that DRAM must be periodically refreshed in
instructions. circuit.

The A/D Converter converts each analog input to a The BIOS EPROM (basic input/output system erasable
12-bit word. In this form, the values can be stored in programmable read only memory) is a memory device
memory devices, compared to values in the Program, that contains the bootstrap or power-up program. It is
transmitted through Serial Ports or sent to the Display located in socket location U45. This EPROM is replace-
Controller for display. Control signals to start conversion able. Refer to YORK Renewal Parts List Form 160.54-
process are from the Micro via the FPGA. RP1. The EPROM version is an alpha-numeric code
The Watchdog circuit monitors the +5VDC supply that represents the application and revision level. The
from the external Power Supply to determine when version is printed on a label adhered to the EPROM’s
a power failure is occurring. Just prior to the supply surface. The version code is as follows:
decreasing to a level where the Micro and supporting C. MLM. 00. XX.
circuits can no longer operate, it applies a reset signal
to the Micro. The Micro responds by de-energizing the
Revision level. Increments 01, 02 etc.
run digital output through the FPGA, shutting down the
chiller and retrieving the Power Failure message from YM Chiller BIOS EPROM
the Program and sending it to the Display Controller MAXE™ Chiller
Commercial Chiller
20 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Early vintage chillers were equipped with BIOS eprom Card at the time the Card was initially programmed at
031-01796-001. This eprom is no longer used. It has been the YORK factory. If both values are the same, it is
superceded by BIOS eprom 031-01796-002. IMPOR- considered pass. If the calculated value is different than
TANT! Eprom 031-01796-002 is not compatible with the stored value, it is considered fail.
all versions of Flash Memory Cards. Refer to Service
5. BRAM quick test.
Replacement paragraphs in this section.
Test data is written to and then read from several memory
When power is applied to the OptiView Control Cen-
locations to verify BRAM operation. 3
ter following a power failure, the Micro executes the
instructions in the BIOS EPROM program to initialize, LED INDICATORS
configure and start operation of certain Microboard
components before the main program (stored in the When power is applied to the OptiView Control Center,
Flash Memory Card) is started. Depending upon the both the red (CR18 - Fail) and green (CR17 - Pass) LEDs
application, the Microboard could be equipped with an simultaneously illuminate for 1 second, then the Boot-
EPROM that has either 128K, 256K or 512K capacity. up process begins in the following sequence. When all
Microboard Program Jumper JP38 must be positioned steps have been completed, both LED’s illuminate and
according to the actual EPROM installed. Refer to remain illuminated.
Table 1 (Program Jumpers). There are 5 steps to the
boot-up process. During the boot-up process, there is STEP PASS FAIL
a visual indication as each step is performed, followed 1 Green on, Red off
Watchdog will
by a Pass/Fail status of the step. On the Microboard, a initiate a re-boot.
green LED (CR17 - Pass) flashes to indicate the step was Boot-up process halts.
2 Green flash once
successful. If a step is unsuccessful, a red LED (CR18 One red flash repeating
- Fail) flashes and the Boot-up process terminates. The Boot-up process halts.
execution and Pass/Fail status of steps 3 through 5 are 3 Green flash once
Two red flashes repeating
displayed on a white Keypad Display Screen as they are
Boot-up process halts.
performed. This white display screen also lists the BIOS 4 Green flash once
Three red flashes repeating
EPROM Version. The steps of the Boot-up process are
as follows. Also, below is listed the LED activity as- Boot-up process halts.
5 Green flash once
sociated with each step. Four red flashes repeating

The BRAM (battery backed random access memory) is

BOOT-UP STEP AND DESCRIPTION
a memory device that contains a battery that preserves
1. First initiate table complete. the data during power failures. It is a replaceable part.
Registers in the Micro are configured to allow it to per- Refer to YORK Renewal Parts List Form 160.54-RP1.
form basic memory read/write functions. It is located in socket location U52. The Micro stores
2. FPGA configuration. the setpoints programmed by the Operator or Service
The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) is con- Technician, History Data and other data that requires
figured to process Digital Inputs and Outputs. preservation, in this device. Also, the day of week, time
of day and calendar date time-keeping are done here.
3. Mini-card signature test.
A location in the Flash Memory Card that contains a code The FPGA (field programmable gate array) is a single
identifying the Manufacturer is compared to other loca- chip consisting of generic circuits that can be configured
tions that contain the manufacturer’s name. If these values to perform a specific task. In this OptiView Control Cen-
are the same, it is pass. If they are different, it is fail. ter, it is used to control the Digital Outputs. As part of
4. Mini-card checksum. the power-up initialization sequence, each time control
The Flash Memory Card checksum is calculated and power is applied to the OptiView Control Center, the Mi-
compared to the checksum value that is stored in the

YORK INTERNATIONAL 21
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

cro configures the FPGA to control the Digital Outputs. A/D Converter will convert the analog value to a digital
During chiller operation, the Micro controls the Digital word when the Micro writes a “start conversion” pulse to
Outputs by writing the desired output state, logic low the FPGA. The FPGA passes this to the A/D Converter.
(<+1VDC) or logic high (+VDC) to the FPGA. Writ- The Micro retrieves certain operating parameters (via
ing a logic high actually turns off the output, allowing Microboard J10) from the compressor motor starter con-
it to be pulled up by the source voltage applied to the trol board (CM-2 Current Module or Mod “A” Solid
device connected to this output. These voltages could State Starter Logic Board) by writing addresses to it
be +5VDC, +12VDC or +24VDC. Therefore, when the via the FPGA. The addresses, 0 through 7 are written
Micro turns off the output, the actual voltage measured at sequentially. On the starter control board is an 8 channel
the output will vary according to the voltage connected MUX. As each address is received by the starter control
to this output. The FPGA latches and holds this state until board MUX, it causes the appropriate analog value to
changed by the Micro. The Micro controls the relays and be passed to the Microboard as an analog input and
triacs on the I/O Board (via Microboard J19) by writing processed as described above. The Micro determines
the desired state to the FPGA. To energize a relay or turn the type of starter applied by the voltage received from
on a triac, the FPGA output is a logic low voltage level channel 0. A voltage of <0.4VDC indicates the starter
(<+1VDC). To de-energize a relay or turn off a triac, is electro-mechanical type; > 0.4VDC indicates starter
the output is a logic high voltage level (+12VDC). The type is Mod “A” solid state. If it determines there is an
outputs that control the compressor motor start relay electro-mechanical starter present, it reads channel 7 and
(K13 on I/O Board) and the chilled water pump start/ processes the 0-4VDC output and displays it as %FLA.
stop relay (K0 on I/O Board) have anti-recycle timers If it determines there is a Mod “A” solid state starter
associated with them. The output that controls K13 will present, the channel 0 voltage indicates the starter size
not change at a rate greater than once every 20 seconds. (model) and voltmeter range (300V or 600V). Channel 1
The output that controls K0 will not change at a rate is a hardware generated current limit command that will
greater than once every 10 seconds. The FPGA is used force current limit control at 100%FLA (prevent vanes
to read the keypad (via Microboard J5) to determine if from opening) and 104%FLA (drive vanes closed until
any keys are being pressed. The keypad is a matrix of current <102%), regardless of the software current limit
conductors arranged in rows and columns (ref. Fig. 32 operation. Channels 2 through 4 are analog voltages that
& 33). There are 4 rows and 8 columns. When a key is represent phase A, B and C motor current. Channels 5
pressed, the conductors are pressed together at that point, through 7 are analog voltages that represent Phase A,
creating continuity between that row conductor and the B and C line voltage.
column conductor. The Keypad is read by applying a
logic low to a row while leaving +5VDC pullup on all The addresses and associated data are shown below.
the other rows. The Micro then reads the 8 columns. If Mod “A”
CM-2 Board Solid State Starter Logic Board
any column has a logic low on it, the key corresponding
Address Data Address Data
to that coordinate (row, column) is being pressed. The
starter model /
Micro reads the entire Keypad by repeating this routine 0 thru 6 Gnd 0
voltmeter range
beginning with row 1 and ending with row 4. The entire
1 current limit command
Keypad is read every Program cycle. The Micro selects
Peak phase C, B, A
the MUX inputs (Microboard J7, J8, J9) for input to the 2-4
7 Motor motor current
A/D Converter by writing sequential addresses to the
Current phase A, B, C
FPGA. The FPGA holds each address until a new one 5-7
line voltage
is received from the Micro. As each address is applied
to the MUX, the input corresponding to that address
is passed through the MUX to the A/D Converter. The

22 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The Input Buffers latch and hold the Digital Inputs MUX, A/D converter, CM-2 module, Mod “A” Solid
(Microboard J19) from the I/O Board and the column State Starter Logic Board, Transducers and Thermistors.
out puts from the keypad until read by the Mi cro. As depicted on the Microboard figure, these voltages can
115VAC digital inputs from relay contacts and external be monitored at Test Posts TP1 through TP6.
devices are converted to +5VDC logic levels by the I/O
Board prior to application to the Microboard. Similarly, The Microboard is equipped with 5 Serial Data Ports
the Keypad column outputs are held and read by the (ref. Fig. 11). Connector J2 is shared with both COM
Micro as described above. 1 and COM 4B. Each Port is dedicated for a specific
3
function as follows:
To provide flexibility for future Analog Inputs (to
Microboard J7), 2 analog inputs can be configured for a. COM 1 (J2) - RS-232. Printer.
either 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, or 4-20mA Trans- b. COM 2 (J13) - RS-232. Not Used.
ducer or Thermistor inputs using Program Jumpers JP21 c. COM 3 (J12) - RS-485. Optional I/O.
through JP24. The position of the jumper determines
d. COM 4 (4A-J11), (4B-J2) - This port is actually
which type of input can be connected. Refer to Fig. 12
two ports. However, they cannot be used simulta-
and Table 1, “Program Jumpers”.
neously; only one of these ports can be connected
to a device at a time. The position of Microboard
These inputs are for future YORK Fac- Program Jumper J27 determines which port can be
tory expansion use only. They are not used (refer to Table 1). COM 4A (J11) is an RS-485
general application spare inputs that port that is used for Multi-Unit Communications.
will support arbitrarily installed de- COM 4B (J2) is an RS-232 port that is used for
vices. Devices CANNOT be connected MicroGateway.
to these inputs until the program has e.) COM 5 (J15) – Opto-coupled TX/RX. VSD Adap-
been modified to read and process the tive Capacity Control board.
input. Unless YORK documentation COM 1 is connected directly to the Micro. COM 2
shows a device connected to the input through 5 are connected directly to the UART (Universal
with a defined function, the input can- Asynchronous Receive Transmit). The UART converts
not be used. the parallel data to serial form for transmission to the
Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and Cur- peripheral device and converts the incoming serial data
rent Limit Setpoints can be applied to the RS-232 serial to parallel form for use by the Micro. It also generates
port J2 via the Microgateway (ref. Fig. 11) or directly to and processes control signals for the Modem com-
the Microboard at J22 (ref. Fig. 12). The inputs at J22 munications (DTR, CTS, DSR, RTS). Under Program
can be configured with Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24 control, the Micro instructs the UART of the desired
to accept these inputs in either 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, data transmission Baud rate. A crystal oscillator provides
0-20mA or 4-20mA form. Refer to Table 1 for Program the frequency reference. Each port is equipped with two
Jumper configurations. LED’S; a red one indicates when data is being trans-
mitted to the remote device and a green one indicates
when data is being received from the remote device.
The Microboard receives 3 supply voltages (Microboard The RS-232 output voltages are industry standard +3
J1) from the Power Supply; +12VDC, -12VDC, +5VDC to +15VDC, with +9VDC typical. The RS-485 output
and Ground. The -12VDC and +12VDC are used directly voltages are industry standard +1.5 to +5VDC, with
by various circuits. The +12VDC and +5VDC are input +2.5VDC typical. The TX/RX signals of COM 5 are 0
to Voltage Regulators to derive other regulated volt- and +5VDC logic level signals. A loopback diagnostic
ages. The +5VDC (fused by 5 Amp fuse F1 on rev “E” test can be performed on each serial port. This test per-
and later boards) is input to a +3.3VDC regulator. The mits verification of the data transmitted from the serial
output is a 3.3VDC regulated voltage. The +12VDC port. Refer to the “Diagnostics” section of this book for
(fused by 5 Amp fuse F2 on rev “E” and later boards) details of these tests.
is input to a 5VDC regulator. The output of this regu-
lator powers only the Analog circuits. This includes the

YORK INTERNATIONAL 23
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The graphic screens that are displayed on the Liquid determine the manufacturer of the display (refer to
Crystal Display are created from pre-formed graphics description of Display Interface Board). Each display
and messages that are stored in the Program (FLASH manufacturer requires a slightly different control. The
Memory Card), and real-time system operating pa- program in the BIOS EPROM then configures the Dis-
rameters, such as system pressures and temperatures. play Controller for operation with the actual display
The graphics, message and number data are in the form that is present.
of digital words. The Display Controller converts this
data into display drive signals and sends them to the Revision “A” through “D” Microboards are equipped
Display from Microboard J5. The Display has 307,200 with Display Controller (U29) type 65548. Revision “E”
pixels arranged in a 640 columns x 480 rows matrix and later boards could be equipped with either a 65548
configuration. Each pixel consists of 3 windows; red, or 65550 Display Controller. To accommodate the use of
green and blue, through which a variable amount of light either device, BIOS Eprom part number 031-01796-002
from the Display backlight is permitted to pass through is required on revision “E” and later Microboards. Also,
the front of the display. Imbedded in each window of Program Jumpers JP43 and JP44 (refer to Table 1) must
the pixel is a transistor, the conduction of which deter- be configured according to the actual Display Controller
mines the amount of light that will pass. The drive signal installed on the board. These jumpers are positioned ap-
determines the amount of conduction of the transistor propriately at the time the board is manufactured and
and therefore the amount of light passed through the should not require field configuration.
window. The overall pixel color becomes a result of the
gradient of red, green and blue light allowed to pass. The Different Display manufacturers can require different
drive signal for each pixel is an 18 bit binary word; 6 supply and control voltages for their displays and back-
for each of the 3 colors, red, green and blue. The greater lights. Program Jumpers JP 2 through 4 and 5 through 8
the binary value, the greater the amount of light per- must be configured to provide the required supply and
mitted to pass. The pixels are driven sequentially from control voltages to the display and backlight control.
left to right, beginning with the top row. To coordinate Table 1 lists the required Program Jumper configuration
the drive signals and assure the pixels in each row are for each Display. Also, a label attached to the Display
driven sequentially from left to right and the columns mounting plate lists the required Program Jumper con-
are driven from top to bottom, each drive signal contains figuration for that particular Display.
a horizontal and vertical sync signal.
The Display DRAM is a memory device that supports The power supply voltage that operates the Display is
the operation of the display controller. This device provided by the Microboard J5. The position of Program
could be either of two types; FPM (fast page mode) or Jumper JP2 determines whether this supply voltage is
EDO (extended data out) type. Program Jumper JP6 +5VDC or +3.3VDC. The Display requires a specific
must be positioned according to the type of DRAM power-up and power-off sequencing to prevent damage.
device installed in the Microboard; JP6 in - EDO, During power-up, the supply voltage must be applied to
out - FPM. Refer to Table 1, “Program Jumpers”. De- the Display before the drive signals are applied. Simi-
pending upon the requirement, there could be one or larly, during power-off sequencing, the display drive
two DRAM devices installed in the Microboard. If the signals must be removed prior to removing the supply
design requires only one DRAM, it is installed in socket voltage. The Display Controller applies the supply volt-
U27. If an additional one is required, it is installed in age and data drive signals to the Display in the proper
socket U25. sequence. The Display Controller controls the Display
Backlight by applying control signals (from Microboard
During the power-up sequence, the program in the BIOS J6) to the Backlight Inverter Board. The Backlight
EPROM reads Program Jumper JP6 to determine the Inverter Board converts low voltage DC (+12VDC
type of Display DRAM installed (as explained above). or +5VDC, depending on position of Program Jumper
It also reads wire jumpers PID0 through PID3 (via JP5) to high voltage AC (500 to 1500VAC). This high
Microboard J5) on the Display Interface Board to voltage AC is applied to the lamp to cause it to illumi-

24 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

nate. The Backlight is turned on and off with the “En- cess to the Microboard’s address/data bus, and therefore
able Backlight” (J6-5) signal. The position of Program become an extension of the Microboard. This provides
Jumper JP4 determines whether this is a +12VDC or expansion of the Microboard’s capabilities without
+5VDC signal. In some displays, the Backlight turns re-designing or changing the size of the Microboard.
on when this signal transitions from low to high; others PC-104 Modules are not used in all OptiView Control
turn on when it transitions from high to low. The po- Center applications.
sition of Program Jumper JP3 determines the transition
that will occur when the Display Controller outputs the System pressures and temperatures, in the form of analog 3
“Enable Backlight” signal. Program Jumper JP3 must DC voltages from pressure transducers and temperature
be positioned according to the Display manufacturer’s thermistors, are input to the MUX (multiplexers). Under
requirement. Program control, the Micro selects these values, one
at a time, for input to the Analog to Digital (A/D) con-
Under Program control, the Display Controller controls verter. As each one is selected, it is passed to the A/D
the Backlight brightness via the Lamp Dimmer circuit. Converter for conversion to a 12-bit digital word that is
In order to extend the life of the backlight lamp, the lamp then input in parallel form to the Micro. The Micro stores
brightness is driven to 50% brightness after 10 minutes each value in the DRAM for display requests, further
of Keypad inactivity. At this brightness level, the Display processing or Serial Port transmission. Each value is
can still be read. Subsequently, when Keypad activity also stored in the BRAM for History data. The Micro
is detected (ie; a Keypad key is pressed), the lamp is compares each value to Safety and Cycling shutdown
driven back to full brightness (100% brightness). Some thresholds stored in the FLASH Memory Card. If any
display manufacturers require a variable voltage to vary thresholds are exceeded, the Micro initiates a shutdown
the brightness; others require a variable resistance. Pro- by removing the run signal to the compressor starter by
gram Jumpers JP7 and JP8 allow either method to be de-energizing the appropriate digital output through the
used. The Lamp Dimmer is an integrated circuit that FPGA. It retrieves the appropriate shutdown message
is the electrical equivalent of a 10K ohm potentiometer from the FLASH Memory Card and sends it to the Dis-
with 100 positions or steps (ref. Fig. 10). The Display play Controller for display. If any analog inputs require
Controller controls the position of the potentiometer. the state of any digital outputs to be changed, the Micro
The Lamp Dimmer varies the brightness of the Back- does this through the FPGA.
light by applying either a variable voltage (0-5.0VDC)
or a variable resistance (0-10K ohms), to the Backlight The system Pressure Transducers are described in Sec-
Inverter Board. If Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are in- tion 17 of this book. Formulas and graphs are included
stalled, the Lamp Dimmer output is a variable voltage; to calculate the expected Transducer output voltage for
if both are removed, the output is a variable resistance. a given input pressure.
The Lamp Dimmer outputs “Brightness Control Wiper”
(J6-7) and “Brightness Control -“ (J6-8) to the Back- The Temperature Thermistors are described in Section
light Inverter Board. If configured for variable voltage 18 of this book. Included are tables to convert the ex-
output, the voltage between J6-7 and J6-8 can be varied pected output voltage for any temperature applied to
from 0 (100% brightness) to 5.0VDC (0% brightness). If the Thermistor.
configured for variable resistance, the resistance between
J6-7 and J6-8 would vary from 0 ohms (0% brightness) Style F (and later) chillers are supplied with factory-
to 10K ohms (100% brightness). mounted Flow Sensors on the evaporator and condenser
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
The PC-104 Port (J16 & J17) is an industry standard ar- later is required for this feature). These are electronic
rangement of two connectors that allows the stacking of thermal-type sensors. The operating principle of the
3.6 x 3.8 inch printed circuit boards (PC-104 Modules) sensor is thermal conductivity. It uses the cooling effect
on the Microboard. The circuits on these boards have ac-

YORK INTERNATIONAL 25
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

of a flowing liquid to sense flow. The temperature of or J7-16 (condenser) to microboard TP1(ground). Flash
the heated sensor tip is sensed by a thermistor located in Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx (and Later)
the tip. A second thermistor, located higher in the tip in allows either the Thermal-Type sensors connected to
a non-heated area, is only affected by changes in liquid the Microboard analog inputs or the Paddle-Type sen-
temperature. The temperatures sensed by the thermis- sor connected to the I/O Board digital inputs (refer to
tors are compared. Flowing liquid carries heat away the Flow Switch Setpoint in SECTION 23). To assure
from the heated sensor tip, lowering its temperature. the program reads the correct input for the flow sensor
The higher the flow rate, the lower the tip temperature type present, the Chiller Style/Compressor Setpoint and
and therefore a lower differential between thermistors. Flow Switch Setpoint must be set appropriately (refer
Lower flow rates remove less heat from the tip allowing to SECTION 23).
a higher tip temperature. The lower the flow, the greater
the differential between thermistors. The sensor is ven- Service Replacement: All YK chillers use the same
dor-calibrated to “turn on” its output at a flow rate of Microboard. Refer to Renewal Parts List 160.54-RP1
20cm(0.6 Ft)/second. This is the calibration setpoint. for available Flash Memory Cards. Select the Flash
There are 11 LED’s on the sensor that reflect the Memory Card per the Display language requirements.
measured flow rate. The amber LED illuminates at
the setpoint flow rate (and above). The 4 LED’s to the Prior to August 2002, chillers equipped with “P”
left of the amber reflect flow rates below the setpoint. compressors required Flash Memory Card 031-
The 6 LED’s to the right of the amber reflect flow rates 02073-001 (NEMA) or 031-02073-002 (CE). Version
above he setpoint. As the flow rate decreases from the C.MLM.01.07.xxx (released August 2002) and later ver-
setpoint, the LED display moves to the left. As the sions of Flash Memory Card 031-01797-001 (NEMA)
flow rate increases above the setpoint, the LED display and 031-01797-002 (CE) are now applicable to all com-
moves to the right. The sensor operates from a 24Vac pressor applications. This version (and later versions)
power source and has a solid state relay output. On each supercedes and is supplied in place of cards 031-02073-
sensor, one side of the solid state relay output (pin 001 and 02073-002 for service replacement.
2) is connected to the microboard +5Vdc and the other
side (pin 4) is connected to a microboard analog input Service replacement Microboards are supplied under
(refer to fig 12). After power is applied, there is a ther- the following YORK part numbers:
mal warm-up period of up to 20 seconds. During this
time, the output could be unstable. When setpoint (or
• 331-01730-601 Includes Microboard 031-01730-000
greater) flow rate is sensed, the solid state relay output
and latest version of Flash Memory Card 031-01797-
is turned on causing it to conduct current through the
001.
7.5K ohm microboard load resistor to the +5vdc. This
applies >+4Vdc to the microboard input (evaporator J7-
14; condenser J7-16). When a flow rate less than the
setpoint is sensed, the solid state relay output is turned
off, resulting in no conduction through the load resis-
tor. This applies <1Vdc to the microboard input. To
determine the state of the solid state relay, first confirm
that +5vdc is present at pin 2 of the flow sensor. Then
connect a voltmeter from Microboard J7-14 (evaporator)

26 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Replacement Microboards are supplied without the

BRAM (U52). Remove this device from the defective
board and install in the replacement board.

If defective board is equipped with Flash Memory

Card 031-01797-002 (except “P” compressors) or 031-
02073-002 (“P” compressors), transfer this Card to the
replacement board. If defective board is equipped with
3
Card 031-01797-001 (except “P” compressors) or 031-
02073-001 (“P”compressors), use Card supplied with
replacement board.

If the Microboard is replaced within the Warranty Pe-

riod, return the defective board along with any unused
Flash Memory Cards to YORK per the Warranty Return
Procedure.

If Flash Memory Card 031-01797-

001 is used, it must be a ver sion
C.MLM.01.04 or later (ie, .05, .06,
etc) to be used with BIOS Eprom (U45)
031-01796-002. Earlier versions will
not complete the initialization (boot-
up) process and the chiller will not
run.

IMPORTANT! Since the BRAM

mem o ry device con tains all of the
programmed setpoints and Sales Order
data, using the existing BRAM in the
replacement Microboard eliminates
the need to re-program this extremely
large amount of data. The process to
manually program the Sales Order
Data is extremely time-consuming.
However, if the BRAM fails and
field replacement is necessary, follow
the procedure in the “Systems Cali-
bration, Service Setpoints and Reset
Procedures” section of this book.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 27
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LD07776

FIG. 7 – MICROBOARD

28 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

MEMORY CARD SOCKET

ELASTOMERIC MEMORY CARD -
CONNECTOR
TOP SURFACE

AUGAT R
AUGAT R

LD06855

TOP SURFACE

PRESS DOWN LD04047 MEMORY CARD

TO RELEASE CARD RETAINER CLIP

MEMORY CARD - BOTTOM SURFACE

WRITE PROTECT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)

(MUST BE IN "ENABLED POSITION")

PAD 60 PAD 31

PAD 30 PAD 1

VCC CINS GND

3V/5V ALIGNMENT
KEY NOTCH

LD04049

MEMORY CARD - SIDE VIEW

WRITE ENABLED

WRITE DISABLED
LD04050

FIG. 8 – FLASH MEMORY CARD

YORK INTERNATIONAL 29
 DISPLAY INTERFACE

30
SERIAL DATA
BOARD
PORT 1
BACKLIGHT INVERTER
BOARD

DISPLAY
Microboard

DRAM BACKLIGHT PROGRAM

CONTROLLER CONTROL JUMPERS
ANALOG
INPUTS MUX

FIG. 9 – MICROBOARD
A/D DATA
MICRO INPUT DIGITAL
CONVERTER BUS
BUFFER INPUTS
XCVR
R28

+5VDC REF MUX

LVG CHILLED
WATER TEMP DRAM FPGA DIGITAL
R25 OUTPUTS
WATCH-
DOG

FLASH
EPROM SERIAL
PROGRAM UART DATA PORTS
SWITCHES 2 THROUGH 5

BIOS
EPROM

PC-104
BRAM XCVR
TP4 PORT
Y + 12VDC
*F2
+ 12VDC VOLTAGE
5A + 5VDC (ANALOG)
FROM REG
POWER TP3 Y + 5VDC (DIGITAL) LD07777
SUPPLY *F1
+ 5VDC VOLTAGE TP2 Y
5A + 3.3VDC *REV "E" and later boards only.
REG

TP1
GND Y
12 VDC
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TABLE 1
MICROBOARD PROGRAM JUMPERS
MICROBOARD PROGRAM JUMPERS NEC NL6448AC33-24 and LG Semicon
LP104V2-W displays.
JP1 - Watchdog enable/disable. The position of this
jumper, in conjunction with Program switch SW JP5 - Display backlight power. Determines the power
1 position 12 enables or disables the program supply voltage applied to the Display Backlight
Watchdog protection. Inverter Board.
Pins 1-2: +12VDC. SHARP LQ10D367 and 3
Never disable the watchdog protection. LQ10D421, NEC NL6448AC33-24 and LG
Severe compressor or chiller damage Semicon LP104V2-W displays.
could result. The ability to disable the Pins 2-3: +5VDC. Not Used
watchdog protection is provided for
factory testing only!!! JP6 - Display memory type. Jumper must be po-
sitioned according to type of RAM used for
IN - Watchdog protection enabled. display memory devices (U25 & U27).
IN - EDO: (extended data out) type. Jumper
OUT - Permits Program switch SW1 position 12 to
should be IN.
enable or disable the program
OUT - FPM: (fast page mode) type. Not Used
Watchdog protection as follows:
Position 12 ON - Watchdog protection enabled JP7, JP8 - Display brightness control technique. Deter-
OFF - Watchdog protection disabled mines whether the display brightness is controlled
by a variable voltage or variable resistance.
JP2 - Display power and logic levels. Determines the IN: Variable voltage (0-5.0VDC). SHARP
power supply voltage applied to the display. LQ10D367, LQ10D421 and LG Semicon
LP104V2-W displays.
Pins 1-2: +5VDC SHARP LQ10D367 and
LQ10D421 displays. OUT:Variable resistance. NEC
NL6448AC33-24 display.
Pins 2-3: +3.3VDC NEC NL6448ACCC33-24
and LG Semicon LP104V2-W displays. JP9 - JP20 - Not Used

JP3 - Display backlight enable signal level polarity. JP21 - Factory mounted thermal-type flow sen-
Jumper must be positioned according to the sor – evaporator. Style F and later chillers
voltage level required to turn on the Display only (applies to Flash Memory Card version
Backlight. C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later).
Pins 1-2: 0VDC SHARP LQ10D421 Display. OUT: Not Used.
Pins 2-3: +12VDC or +5VDC as determined Pins 1-2: Not Used.
by position of JP4. SHARP LQ10D367, NEC Pins 2-3: Style F and later chillers with factory
NL6448AC33-24 and LG Semicon LP104V2-W mounted evaporator thermal-type flow sensor.
displays.
JP22 - Factory mounted thermal-type flow sensor – con-
JP4 - Display backlight enable signal logic levels. denser. Style F and later chillers only (Applies to
Determines the logic levels of the Backlight Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx
enable signal. and later).
Pins 1-2: +12VDC/0VDC SHARP LQ10D421 OUT: Not Used.
display. Pins 1-2: Not Used.
Pins 2-3: +5VDC/0VDC SHARP LQ10D367 Pins 2-3: Style F and later chillers with factory
mounted condenser thermal-type flow sensor.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 31
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

JP23 - Remote Current Limit Setpoint (J22) type. Con- cessor. DMA request selections are silk screened
figures analog input for 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, on the Microboard adjacent to the program
0-20mA or 4-20mA. jumper. Not used on YK Chiller applications.
OUT: Allows a 0-10VDC or 2-10VDC input on
J22-1 JP32 - PC-104 Port DMA acknowledge assignment.
Assigns selected PC-104 DMA acknowledge
Pins 1-2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4-20mA input on
to PDACK0 on the microprocessor. DMA ac-
J22-2
knowledge selections are silk screened on the
Pins 2-3: Not Used Microboard adjacent to the program jumper. Not
used on YK Chiller applications.
JP24 - Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Setpoint
(J22) type. Configures analog input for JP33 - PC-104 Port DMA acknowledge assignment.
0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4-20mA. Assigns selected PC-104 DMA acknowledge
OUT: Allows a 0-10VDC or 2-10VDC input on to PDACK1 on the microprocessor. DMA ac-
J22-3 knowledge selections are silk screened on the
Pins 1-2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4-20mA input on Microboard adjacent to the program jumper. Not
J22-4 used on YK Chiller applications.
Pins 2-3: Not Used
JP34 - Refrigerant type. Jumper must be positioned
JP25, JP26 - Not Used according to the refrigerant type installed in the
chiller.
JP27 - COM 4 serial communications port. Configures IN: R22
COM 4 port to be either RS-485 for Multi-Unit OUT: R134a
Communications (COM 4A) or RS-232 for
GPIC board (COM4B). JP35 - Water/Brine application. Jumper must be posi-
Pins 1-2: Enables port 4A. Allows an RS-485 tioned according to whether the chiller is cooling
connection to Microboard J11 for MultiUnit water or a brine solution.
Communications. IN: Water. Leaving chilled liquid temperature
Pins 2-3: Enables port 4B. Allows an RS-232 setpoint range 38ºF (36ºF if Smart Freeze is
connection to Microboard J2 for MicroGateway enabled) to 70ºF.
communications. OUT: Brine. Leaving chilled liquid temperature
setpoint range 10ºF to 70ºF.
JP28 - PC-104 Port interrupt assignment. Assigns se-
lected PC-104 interrupt request to PIRQ7 on the JP36 - Steam Turbine or Electric Motor drive - Deter-
microprocessor. Interrupt request selections are mines the “Coastdown” duration (Oil Pump run
silk screened on the Microboard adjacent to the duration after shutdown) and whether the “Motor
program jumper. Not used on YK chiller appli- Controller-Loss of Current” Program check is
cations. performed while the chiller is running.
IN: 150 seconds. Electric motor drive appli-
JP29 - PC-104 Port interrupt assignment. Assigns se- cations.
lected PC-104 interrupt request to PIRQ6 on the
OUT: 15 minutes. Steam Turbine applications.
microprocessor. Interrupt request selections are
“Motor controller-Loss of Current” check is not
silk screened on the Microboard adjacent to the
performed.
program jumper. Future modem application.
JP37 - Compressor Motor starter type.
JP30 - PC-104 Port DMA assignment. Assigns selected
PC-104 DMA request to PIRQ0 on the micropro- IN: Electro-Mechanical or Solid State Starter
cessor. DMA request selections are silk screened OUT: Variable Speed Drive Program Jumper
on the Microboard adjacent to the program jumper. JP39 must be IN for this application.
Not used on YK Chiller applications.
JP38 - BIOS EPROM U45 size. Jumper must be posi-
JP31 - PC-104 Port DMA assignment. Assigns selected tioned according to size of U45. Jumper is a 10
PC-104 DMA request to PIRQ1 on the micropro-
32 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Ohm resistor that is soldered to board. It is not Pins 1-2: Type 65548
a shunt jumper. Pins 2-3: Type 65550
IN: 256K
JP41, JP42 - High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity
OUT: 64K or 128K. Should be OUT for YK Probe type (Not applicable to “P” compres-
chiller applications. sors and style F and later chillers with “G” and
“H5-8” compressors). Refer to Section 13 to
JP39 - Solid State Starter style. determine which Probe is present.
Note: On Variable speed Drive applications, IN: Universal +12/24VDC Probe, part number
this jumper must be IN. 025-xxxxx-000.
IN: Mod “A” - Old style with Logic Board
mounted in OptiView Control Center.
OUT: +24VDC Probe, part number 3
025-30961-000 or 025-35900-000.
OUT: Mod “B” - New style with integrated
Logic/Trigger Board mounted Starter cabinet. JP43, JP44 - Display Controller (U29) type (rev “E”
and later boards only). Must be positioned ac-
JP40 - Not Used cording to the Display Controller type installed
on Microboard. Configured at the time the
JP43, JP44 – Display Controller (U29) type (rev “E” and board is manufactured and should not require
later boards only). Must be positioned according to field configuration.
the Display Controller type installed on Microboard. Pins 1-2: Type 65548
Configured at the time the board is manufactured and Pins 2-3: Type 65550
should not require field configuration.

TABLE 2 - MICROBOARD PROGRAM SWITCHES

SW1
4- Diagnostics - Enables or disables software diag-
1- Not Used
nostics.
2- Oil Pump style - Configures Program operation ON: Enables software diagnostics. Disables
for either Variable Speed Drive oil pump or fixed normal chiller operation.
speed oil pump. Chillers equipped with the vari-
OFF: Disables software diagnostics. Enables
able speed oil pump have a program controlled
normal chiller operation.
oil heater and a different complement of solenoid
valves than chillers equipped with a fixed speed 5- Auto-restart - Determines the course of action
oil pump. required to restart the chiller, if a power failure
ON: (Style D/E/F) Variable Speed Oil Pump occurs while the chiller is running.
- Configures the Program to operate the Oil ON: Chiller will automatically restart when
Pump Variable Speed Drive, the oil heater and power is restored.
the following Solenoid Valves: Oil Return and OFF: Requires a manual reset after power is
Liquid Line (J compressors only) connected in restored. The chiller will not start until the op-
parallel to TB 1-6 1. erator moves the keypad START-RUN-STOP/
OFF: (Style C) Fixed Speed Oil Pump - Configures RESET rocker switch to the STOP/RESET
the Program to operate the fixed speed Oil Pump position. If in LOCAL mode, the chiller can
and the following Solenoid Valves: TB1-34 Liquid then be restarted by initiating a local start. If in
Line, TB1-61 Oil Return and Vent Line connected REMOTE mode, the chiller will restart upon
in parallel, TB1-62 High Speed Thrust. receipt of a remote start signal .
3- Prerun - Determines the duration of the “System 6- Anti-recycle - Enables or disables the anti-recy-
Prelube” period. cle timer.
ON: Extended prerun. “System Prelube” period
is 180 seconds in duration. Oil Pump runs for The anti-recycle timer must NEVER be
167 seconds. disabled unless it is absolutely neces-
OFF: Standard prerun. “System Prelube” period sary to do so during troubleshooting.
is 50 seconds in duration. Oil Pump runs for 37
seconds.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 33
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

ON: Enables anti-recycle timer. Solid State OFF: Standard operation. Contacts open at
Starter and Electro-mechanical starter appli- completion of System Coastdown after all
cations - Chiller cannot be started at intervals shut downs ex cept when chiller shuts down
shorter than once every 30 minutes. VSD ap- on “LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID - LOW
plications (JP37 Out) – Chiller can be started at TEMPERATURE” . On Low Water temp shut-
the completion of SYSTEM COASTDOWN downs, they remain closed, causing the pump to
at intervals shorter than once every 10 minutes continue to run while the chiller is shutdown.
up to 5 times. On the 5th shutdown, a 10 minute
9- Not Used
timer is started and restart is inhibited until the
timer has elapsed.
10 - Not Used
OFF: Disables anti-recycle timer. Chiller can be
started at the completion of SYSTEM COAST- 11 - Not Used
DOWN, regardless of how long the chiller had
been running. 12 - Watchdog Protection -Used in conjunction with
Program Jumper JP1 (see above) to enable/dis-
7- Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive able the program watchdog protection. With JP1
- Motor/Power Line frequency application.
IN, this switch setting has no effect. With JP1
ON: 50 Hz OUT, this switch setting determines whether the
OFF: 60 Hz watchdog protection is enabled or disabled.

8- Chilled Water Pump operation - Determines NEVER disable the watchdog pro-
Chilled Water Pump control contacts (I/O Board tection! Severe compressor or chiller
TB2-44/45) operation when chiller shuts down damage could result. The ability to
on various CYCLING shutdowns. dis able the watch dog pro tec tion is
ON: Enhanced operation. Contacts open at provided for YORK factory testing
completion of System Coastdown after all only.
shut downs ex cept when it shuts down on
“LEAV ING CHILLED LIQUID - LOW ON: Watchdog protection enabled.
TEM PER A TURE”, “MULTIUNIT CY-
OFF: Watchdog protection disabled.
CLING - CONTACTS OPEN” AND “SYS-
TEM CYCLING - CONTACTS OPEN”.

5.0 VDC

J6
JP8

6 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (+) OR (N.C.)

TO
10 K 7 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (WIPER)
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD

8 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (-)

JP7

NOTES: LD04054

1. J6-6 not connected (N.C.) to Backlight Inverter Board when display is manufactured by Sharp or NEC.
2. The position of Program Jumpers JP7 & JP8 determine the output at J6-7; In = Variable Voltage; Out = Variable Resistance. Refer to Program
Jumper Listing in Table 1 for applications.
3. Potentiometer is actually an integrated circuit that is the electrical equivalent of a 10K potentiometer.

FIG. 10 – MICROBOARD LAMP DIMMER CIRCUIT

34 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TX RX
CR3 CR2

R G
RS-232 J2
TX 4
RX 3
PRINTER
MICRO COM 1 DTR 5
DSR 2

COM 4B GTX 7
(NOTE 1) GRX 6
MICRO-
8 GATEWAY
TX RX
9 3
CR12 CR13
RS-485
R G J11
+ 3
3
JP27 COM 4A MULTI-UNIT
-- 2
2 1 (NOTE 1)
+ 5VDC
GND
1 COMMS
4
SHIELD
5
TX RX
CR16 CR11

R G RS-232 J13
DCD 1
DSR 2
RX 3
RTS 4
NOT USED
COM 2 TX 5
CTS 6
DTR 7

GND 9
TX RX
UART CR15 CR14

R G
RS-485 J12
+ 3 OPTIONAL
-- 2
+ 5VDC
I/O
COM 3 1
GND 4
(HOT GAS
SHIELD 5 BYPASS)

TX RX
CR9 CR10

R G
OPTO-COUPLE
VARIABLE
J15 SPEED
TX
1
RX
2 DRIVE
COM 5 COMMON
3 ADAPTIVE
NOTE 2
4
NOTE 2
5
CAPACITY
6 CONTROL
BOARD
OR
MOD "B" SOLID
STATE STARTER
LD07778
NOTES:
1. Microboard Program Jumper JP27 determines whether COM 4A or 4B can be used. 1 & 2 - 4A, 2 & 3, 4B. Refer to Table 1.
2. J15-4 Loop-Around Test IN. J15-5 Loop-Around Test OUT. Refer to Fig. 70 for details.

FIG. 11 – MICROBOARD SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS PORTS

YORK INTERNATIONAL 35
 Microboard
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FACTORY MOUNTED EVAPORATOR J7

71.5 K
THERMAL-TYPE FLOW SENSOR 2
(style F and later chillers) (note 2)
4 14 2 1 47K

2 1 JP21
+5V 3

3 1 13
7.5 K 200
24 VAC

FACTORY MOUNTED CONDENSER

THERMAL-TYPE FLOW SENSOR 4
(style F and later chillers) (note 2)
4 16 2 1

2 15 JP22
+5V 3

3 1 3

24 VAC MUX
J22
REMOTE CURRENT 0-10 VDC / 1
LIMIT SETPOINT 2-10 VDC
2 2 1
0-20 mA /
4-20 mA
3 JP23

REMOTE LEAVING 0-10 VDC / 3

CHILLED LIQUID 2-10 VDC
TEMP SETPOINT
0-20 mA / 4 2 1
4-20 mA

3 JP24

REMOTE SETPOINT 5
GND CONNECTIONS

LD09040

NOTE:
1. Program Jumpers JP23 – JP24 must be positioned on pins 1-2 or 3-4 according to input signal type. Refer to Table 1.
2. Applies to Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later. Program Jumpers JP21 and JP22 must be on pins 2-3 on style F and
later chillers equipped with factory-mounted thermal-type flow sensors.

FIG. 12 – CONFIGURABLE ANALOG & REMOTE SETPOINT INPUTS

36 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 4
I/O BOARD
(REFER TO FIG. 13 - 17)
The I/O (input/output) Board conditions the Digital In- Relay K18 is different from all other relays on the I/O
puts for the Microboard and conditions the Microboard’s Board; it has a 115VAC coil. It provides the start/stop
Digital Outputs for application to other components and signal to the Compressor Motor Starter and provides
devices. The left side of the I/O Board performs the Digi- Compressor Run status to remote devices (ref.
tal Inputs function; the right side performs the Digital Fig.17). Relay K18 is controlled by DC relays K13
Outputs function. Refer to Fig. 13. (start) and K14 (stop). To start the compressor motor,
Digital Inputs are on/off inputs to the Microboard from the Microboard energizes K13 and K14 simultane-
relay and switch contacts, such as flow switches, start/ ously. The 115VAC at TB1-6 is applied to the coil of
stop switch, and remote cycling/safety devices (ref. Fig. K18 via K13 contacts, energizing K18. Approximately
14). The Micro reads the state of these contacts and re- 0.2 seconds later, K13 is de-energized. K18 remains
acts per the Program instructions. The contact voltage is energized through K14 contacts and holding contacts
115 VAC when closed and 0VAC when open. These volt- of K18. To stop the compressor motor, the Microboard
ages are not suitable for direct input to the Microboard. de-energizes K14. To prevent sags in Utility Power from 4
Therefore, the I/O Board converts the 115VAC/0VAC chattering K18, the holding contact of K18, along with
contact voltages to 0VDC/+5VDC logic level inputs for the contact of K13, creates an anti-chatter circuit for
the Microboard. Individual Opto-coupler circuits (ref. relay K18. Once energized, K18 cannot be re-energized
Fig. 15) perform the conversion for each Digital Input. until K13 is again energized; this will not occur until
When the input is 115VAC, the output will be 0VDC; after a controlled shutdown has occurred and another
when the input is 0VAC, the output will be +5VDC. start sequence has been initiated.

Field connected Digital Inputs, such as those from ex- There are conditions external to the I/O Board required
ternal devices that cycle the chiller, are connected to to energize relay K18. The 115VAC will be present at
terminal strip TB4 (ref. Fig.14). These inputs are in the TB1-16 only if the motor controller contacts “CM” are
form of dry contacts connected as shown in Fig. 16. The closed and the circuit between external Terminal Strip
115VAC power source that is switched by the remote TB6-1 and TB6-53 is closed. The “CM” are located on
contacts is supplied by the I/O Board TB4-1. There are the CM-2 Board (relay K1), Electro-Mechanical starter
multiple TB4-1 terminals located adjacent to the field applications, the Solid State Starter Logic Board (relay
input connections, as shown in Fig. 13 and 14. K1), Solid State Starter applications or a relay mounted
on the Variable Speed Drive Logic Board on Variable
Digital Outputs are on/off outputs from the Microboard Speed Drive applications. The High Pressure safety
that control solenoid valves, motor contactors, actuators, switch “HP”, must be closed and the RUN Switch
system relays and provide operating status to external “1SS” must be in the RUN position.
devices (ref. Fig. 17). Per Program instructions, the
Microboard energizes and de-energizes these devices. Triacs are used to control the Pre-Rotation Vanes
The coils of these devices operate on 115VAC and there- Actuator and the Refrigerant Level Variable Orifice
fore cannot be directly connected to the Microboard. Actuator (ref. Fig. 17 & 49). An actuator has an open
The Digital Outputs section of the I/O Board contains winding and a close winding. Current flowing through
+12VDC coil relays that are driven by the Microboard’s a winding will cause the actuator shaft to rotate in the
logic level outputs. The contacts of these +12VDC relays respective direction. Each winding is controlled by a
operate the external 115VAC coil devices. On the I/O Triac. When a Triac is turned on, it permits current to
Board, one side of the each of the relay coils is perma- flow through the actuator winding, causing the actuator
nently connected to +12VDC at J19-26/27. The other shaft to rotate. Under Program control, the Microboard
side of each relay coil is connected to the Microboard turns the Triacs on and off by applying control signals
via I/O Board connector J19. The Microboard energizes to the respective Triac Driver. The Triac Driver is an
each relay by driving the appropriate input at J19 to logic optocoupler device that isolates the Microboard low
low voltage level (ground potential). The DC voltage voltage circuits from the higher actuator voltages. To
at the appropriate input pin at J19 will be a logic high turn on the Triac, the Microboard drives the Triac Driver
(>+10VDC) when the Microboard is commanding a input to logic low (<+1VDC) level. The Triac driver
relay to de-energize; logic low (<+1VDC) when com- responds by shorting the Triac GATE to Triac terminal
manding a relay to energize. 2. To turn the Triac off, the Microboard opens its input
to the Triac Driver and allows the input to pull up to
+12VDC. The Triac Driver responds by opening the
YORK INTERNATIONAL 37
 I / O Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

short from triac Gate to Triac terminal 2. A voltmeter K1 - Anticipatory Alarm (TB2-55/56)
can be used to determine if a Triac is turned on or off. Dry closure contacts. Contacts close when one of the
Measure across the Triac; from Triac terminal 1 to Triac following Warning messages is Displayed. On most
terminal 2. When the Triac is turned off, the voltage will warnings, the contacts automatically open when the
be approximately 20 to 30VAC; when turned on, it will warning condition is no longer present. On those warn-
be <10VAC. ings marked with an asterisk, the contacts will open only
The Pre-rotation Vanes Actuator is manufactured by after the warning condition is no longer present and the
Barber-Coleman. This actuator has three windings; a WARNING RESET key is pressed when logged in at
Field winding and two direction windings. One direction OPERATOR access level or higher.
winding produces clockwise rotation, the other produces Real Time Clock Failure, Condenser or Evaporator Trans-
counterclockwise rotation. The 115VAC applied to the ducer Error*, Refrigerant Level Out of Range, Standby
Field Winding induces a 20 to 30VAC voltage into each Lube-Low Oil Pressure*, Setpoint Override*, Condens-
of the direction windings. The desired rotation is pro- er-High Pressure limit, Evaporator-Low Pressure Limit,
duced by shorting the Actuator common terminal to the Vanes Uncalibrated-Fixed Speed, Harmonic Filter-Op-
appropriate direction terminal, causing current to flow in eration Inhibited, Harmonic Filter-Data Loss, Harmonic
the direction winding. As described above, Triacs control Filter-Input Frequency Out Of Range. The following only
the current through the open and close windings. applies to Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx
The Refrigerant Level Variable Orifice Actuator on new and later – Excess Surge Detected*, Surge Detected – Excess
production chillers is manufactured by Belimo. This ac- Surge Limit.
tuator has two windings; open and close. One winding
produces clockwise rotation and one produces counter- K2 - Remote Mode Ready to Start (only oper-
clockwise rotation. This actuator operates from 24VAC. ational in Digital, Analog or ISN Remote mode)
As described above, Triacs are turned on to allow current to (TB2-26/27)
flow through the appropriate winding to produce the desired Dry closure status contacts that are closed to indicate to
rotation. If the OptiView Control Center is retrofit to an ex- a Remote device that the chiller will start upon receipt
isting chiller, it could be equipped with a Barber-Coleman of a remote start signal. The contacts open coincident
Level Actuator that operates as described above. with any Cycling or Safety shutdown or anytime the
Keypad COMPRESSOR switch is placed in the Stop-
RELAY TIMING Reset (O) position. On Cycling shutdowns, the contacts
will close when the cycling condition clears. On safety
Under Program control, the relays are energized and
shutdowns, the contacts will close only after the Safety
de-energized producing contact operation as follows.
condition clears, a manual reset is performed by placing
Unless otherwise noted, contact rating is 5 amps resistive
the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop-Reset (O) posi-
or 2 Amps inductive @ 250VAC.
tion and then back to the RUN (I) position.
K0 - Chilled Water Pump Starter (TB2-44/45)
Dry closure contacts. When the chiller is started, the Con- K3 - Safety Shutdown Status (TB2-42/43)
tacts close 13 seconds after the start of “System Prelube”. Dry closure status contacts. They close coincident with
Normally, they open coincident with the completion of a Safety shutdown. They remain closed until the safety
“System Coastdown” with the following exceptions: condition clears and a manual reset is performed by
placing the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop-Reset(O)
a. If a “Leaving Chilled Liquid - Low Temperature”
position, whereupon they open.
cycling shutdown occurs, they do not open at the
completion of “System Coastdown”. They remain K4 - Cycling Shutdown Status (TB2-40/41)
closed for the duration of the shutdown or until the Dry closure status contacts. They close coincident with a
Keypad COMPRESSOR switch is placed in the Cycling shutdown. They remain closed until the cycling
Stop-Reset (O) position, whereupon they open. condition clears, whereupon they open.
b. If Microboard Program Switch SW1-8 is in the ON
K5 - Condenser Motor Pump Starter (TB2-150/
position, they do not open at the completion of “Sys-
151) (applies to Flash Memory Card version
tem Coastdown” when the chiller shuts down on a
C.MLM.01.04.xxx and later)
“Multiunit Cycling - Contacts Open” or “System
Dry closure contacts. Contacts close coincident with be-
Cycling - Contacts Open” cycling shutdown. They
ginning of “SYSTEM RUN”. They open coincident with
remain closed for the duration of the shutdown or until
the beginning of “SYSTEM COASTDOWN” unless the
the Keypad COMPRESSOR switch is placed in the
chiller is equipped with the Mod “B” Solid State Starter.
Stop-Reset (O) position, whereupon they open.
38 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

On Mod “B” Solid State Starter applications, the contacts K14 - Compressor Motor Stop (stop) (TB 1-6/16)
remain closed at shutdown until all SCR Heatsink tem- Contacts close coincident with the beginning of “System
peratures are <105ºF or a maximum of 45 minutes. Run”. They remain closed for the duration of “System
Run”. They open coincident with the beginning of “Sys-
If it is desired to supply the dry contacts with 115VAC tem Coastdown”.
power from the OptiView Control Panel to control the
Condenser Pump Motor Starter, a field installed wire K15 - (TB1 -34/1)
must be connected from TB5-22 to I/O Board TB2-150. Oil Heater (Style D/E all compressor codes except
Then connect I/O Board TB2-151 to the Condenser “P”; Variable Speed Oil Pump)
Pump Motor Starter. Contacts are open whenever the Oil Pump is operating.
When the Oil Pump is not operating, the contacts are
K6-K 9 - Not Used
operated to maintain the Oil Temperature at a target
K10 - Oil Heater (“P” compressors and all style F and value of 50ºF above the Condenser Saturated Tem-
later chillers equipped with Flash Memory Card ver- perature from a minimum of 110ºF to a maximum of
sion C.MLM.01.07.xxx or later version) (TB1-64/17) 160ºF. The contacts close when the Oil Temperature
Contacts operate the same as K15. decreases to 4ºF below target value; open at 3ºF above
the target value.
4
K11 - Oil Pump Starter (TB 1-29/1) (Style C and
earlier chillers) Liquid Line Solenoid (Style C and earlier chillers,
In automatic operation, contacts close 13 seconds after fixed speed oil pump)
“System Prelube” is initiated. Contacts open at com- • Electro-Mechanical and Solid State Starter applications:
pletion of “System Coastdown”. In manual Oil Pump Contacts close 1 minute after “System Run” is initi-
operation, the contacts close for the duration of manual ated.
pump operation. Anytime the chiller is not in “System • Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive applica-
Run” or “System Coastdown” and a motor current value tions: After chiller has been running for > 1 minute,
of >15%FLA is detected, the contacts close until motor contacts close if oil temperature reaches > 140ºF.
They remain closed until the oil temperature de-
current is no longer detected, whereupon a complete “Sys-
creases to < 135ºF, whereupon they de-energize.
tem Coastdown” is performed. If Standby Lubrication is
enabled, contacts close for 2 minutes every 24 hours since K16 - High Speed Thrust Solenoid (Style C and ear-
the oil Pump was last automatically or manually run. lier chillers; Fixed Speed Oil Pump)(TB1-62/1)
K12 - Oil Return Solenoid (all styles, fixed or variable Contacts close 15 seconds after “System Run” is ini-
speed oil pump). Liquid Line Solenoid (style D and tiated. They open on chiller shutdown coincident with
later chillers - “J” compressor only, variable speed the beginning of “System Coastdown”.
oil pump). Vent line Solenoid (style C and earlier
chillers, fixed speed oil pump). (TB1-61) K17 - Condenser Motor Pump Starter (TB1- 164)
Contacts close 1minute after “System Run” is initiated. (If chiller is equipped with Mod “B” Solid State
They open on chiller shutdown coincident with the be- Starter, use K5 above)
Contacts operate the same as K14.
ginning of “System Coastdown”.
K18 - Compressor Motor Starter (TB5-22/25)
K13 - Compressor Motor Starter (start) (TB1-6/16)
Run Status (TB2-35/36)
Contacts close coincident with the beginning of “Sys-
Contacts operate the same as K14.
tem Run”. They remain closed for 0.2 seconds and then
open.

LD04055

FIG. 13 – I/O BOARD

YORK INTERNATIONAL 39
 I / O Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TB3 - 32 OPTO-
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY
COUPLER
J1 -1

J2 - 1
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN J1 -2

TB3 - 30
STOP SWITCH (LOCAL) J1 -3
FACTORY CONNECTIONS

TB3 - 28
START SWITCH (LOCAL) J1 -4

TB3 - 71
NOT USED J1 -5

TB3 - 70
OIL PUMP VSD CYCLING SHUTDOWN J1 -6

TB3 - 18
VANE MOTOR SWITCH J1 -7

TB3 - 80 J1 -8
NOT USED

HIGH SPEED THRUST TB3 - 81

BEARING LIMIT SWITCH J1 -9
("P" compressors and style F and later chillers with
"G" and "H5-8" compressors)
TB4 - 1
115VAC

TB4 - 7
REMOTE START J1 -10

TB4 - 8
REMOTE STOP J1 -11
TB4 - 1
115VAC

REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TB4 - 19

J1 -12
TEMP SETPOINT (PWM)
REMOTE CURRENT LIMIT TB4 - 20
J1 -13
SETPOINT (PWM)
FIELD CONNECTIONS

TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 12
CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH J1 -14
(Style E and earlier chillers; optional style F and later chillers with Flash
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx or later versions)
TB4 - 13
REMOTE / LOCAL CYCLING J1 -15
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 9
MULTI-UNIT SEQUENCE J1 -16

TB4 - 31
AUXILIARY SAFETY SHUTDOWN J1 -17
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 11
CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCH J1 -18
(Style E and earlier chillers; optional style F and later chillers with Flash
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx or later versions)

TB4 - 82
NOT USED J1 -19
TB4 - 1
115VAC

TB4 - 95
NOT USED J1 -20
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB3 - 1
115VAC

FIG. 14 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL INPUTS LD06856

40 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

OPTO-COUPLER +5VDC
TYPICAL (20 CKTS) J19 - 21
TB4 - X
TB3 - X

JI - Y

4
NEUTRAL
TB3 - 2
JI - 22/23

LD04057

FIG. 15 – I/O BOARD TYPICAL OPTO-COUPLER CIRCUIT

TB4 - X
OPTO-
COUPLER J1 - Y

115VAC
FIELD SUPPLIED TB4 - 1 TB3 - 1
DRY CONTACTS
(RATED 5MA @ 115VAC)
LD04058

FIG. 16 – I/O BOARD TYPICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS

YORK INTERNATIONAL 41
 I / O Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

J1
+ 12 VDC
26

27
+ 12 VDC

TB2 - 44
50
CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER K0 K0
TB2 - 45
TB2 - 55
49
ANTICIPATORY ALARM K1 K1
TB2 - 56
TB2 - 26
48
REMOTE MODE READY TO START K2 K2
TB2 - 27
TB2 - 42
47
SAFETY SHUTDOWN K3 K3
TB2 - 43
TB2 - 40
46
CYCLING SHUTDOWN K4 K4
TB2 - 41
TB2 - 150
45
CONDENSER MOTOR PUMP STARTER K5 K5
(Applies to Flash Memory Card version TB2 - 151
C.MLM.01.04.xxx and later)
TB2 - 152
44
NOT USED K6 K6
TB2 - 153
TB2 - 154
43
NOT USED K7 K7
TB2 - 155
TB2 - 156
42
NOT USED K8 K8
TB2 - 157
TB1 - 165
41
NOT USED K9 K9
TB1 - 1
OIL HEATER ON/OFF TB1 - 64
("P" compressors and all style F and later 40
K10 K10
chillers equipped with Flash Memory Card
TB1 - 17
version C.MLM.01.07.xxx or later version)
TB1 - 29
OIL PUMP STARTER 39
(Style C and earlier chillers) K11 K11
TB1 - 1
TB1- 61
38
OIL RETURN SOLENOID (ALL STYLES) K12 K12
(LIQUID LINE SOLENOID - TB1 - 1
(Style D and later chillers) J-COMPRESSOR ONLY)
VENT LINE SOLENOID (Style C and earlier chillers)

FIG. 17 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS LD09042

42 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

(Not applicable to "P" compressors or style F and later chillers)(See Note 3)

(See inset below for all others)

J1 TO I/O
K13 BOARD TB3-32
COMPRESSOR MOTOR 37
K13
STARTER (START) 1
START
K14 K18
COMPRESSOR MOTOR 36 TB1-6 RUN
K14
STARTER (STOP)
TB1-16
OIL HEATER ON/OFF (STYLE D/E - ALL HP STOP
COMPRESSORS EXCEPT "P") LIQUID TB1-34
35 K15 16 TO I/O
LINE SOLENOID (style C and earlier chillers) K15
TB1-1 BOARD J2-1
CM/TM (NOTE 2)
NOT USED (style D and later chillers) TB1-62
34 53
K16 K16
HIGH SPEED THRUST TB1-1
SOLENOID (style C and earlier chillers) 1
TB2-164
CONDENSER MOTOR PUMP STARTER K17 K17
(All starter applications except
Mod "B" Solid State Starter)
(Chillers equipped with "P" compressors and all
style "F" and later chillers) (See Note 3) 4
K13

START
K14 K18
TB1-6 RUN
TB1-16
STOP
16 TO I/O
BOARD J2-1
CM/TM (NOTE 2)
TB3-32
53

15 1
TB1-33 TB5-23
HP
COMPRESSOR MOTOR NOT USED
STARTER K18 TB5-22
K18 115 VAC
TB1-2 K18 TB5-25
115VAC NEUTRAL COMPRESSOR
MOTOR STARTER
TB2-35

K18 RUN STATUS

TB2-36

TB1-3 PRV
ACTUATOR
2
J1-33 TRIAC
PRV OPEN Q1 OPE
DRIVER 2 N
G 1
TB1-59
X
1
G OSE
J1-32 TRIAC Q2 3 CL
PRV CLOSE
DRIVER
2
TB1-58 L1 L2

FIELD

NOTES: 115VAC
1. – – – – – – – indicates wiring external to I/O Board.
2. “CM” – Contacts of Relay K1 on Current Module (EM Starter Applications) or Solid State Starter Logic LD09043
Board (Solid State Starter Applications) or VSD Logic Board (Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive
Applications).
3. Chillers equipped with “P” compressors and all style "F" and later chillers use a different High Pressure
(HP) Switch and associated interface than other compressor applications.

FIG. 17 (CONT’D) – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS

YORK INTERNATIONAL 43
 I / O Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TB1-158

2
J1-31 TRIAC
NOT USED Q3
DRIVER
G 1
TB1-159

1
G
J1-30 TRIAC Q4
NOT USED
DRIVER
2
TB1-160

REFRIGERANT
LEVEL CONTROL
TB1-161 ACTUATOR
(BARBER-COLEMAN)
2
REFRIGERANT J1-29 TRIAC Q5
LEVEL CONTROL OPE
DRIVER 3 N
OPEN G 1
TB1-162
X
1
G SE
REFRIGERANT
J1-28 TRIAC 2 CLO
LEVEL CONTROL Q6
DRIVER
CLOSE 2 TB1-163 L1 L2

FIELD

115VAC

REFRIGERANT
TB1-161
LEVEL CONTROL
ACTUATOR
2 (BELIMO)
REFRIGERANT J1-29 TRIAC Q5
LEVEL CONTROL OPE
DRIVER 2 N
OPEN G 1
TB1-162 24VAC
1
1
G OSE
REFRIGERANT
J1-28 TRIAC 3 CL
LEVEL CONTROL Q6
DRIVER
CLOSE 2
TB1-163

115VAC

LD04061

FIG. 17 (CONT’D) – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS

44 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 5
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
(REFER TO FIG. 18 - 27)

A 10.4 inch color Liquid Crystal Display, along with the conduction of which determines the amount of light
supporting components Display Interface Board and that will pass through the window. The conduction of
Backlight Inverter Board are mounted on a plate that each transistor is controlled by a signal from the Display
is attached to the OptiView Control Center door. A clear Controller on the Microboard. The overall pixel color
plexiglass faceplate prevents display surface damage. is a result of the gradient of red, green and blue light
System operating parameters are displayed on various allowed to pass.
color graphic screens. The various display screens are
selected for display using the Keypad keys. Under Program control, the Display Controller on the
Microboard sends a drive signal for each pixel to create
The Display provided in the new chiller or from YORK the image on the display. Each pixel’s drive signal is an
as a service replacement part, could be manufactured by 18 bit binary word; 6 bits for each of the 3 colors, red
any of several approved manufacturers. Each Display green and blue. The greater the binary value, the greater
requires a specific Display Interface Board, Backlight the amount of light permitted to pass. The columns of
Inverter Board, Inverter Board interface cable and Pro- pixels are driven from left to right and the rows are
gram command set. Therefore, Service replacement driven top to bottom. To coordinate the drive signals
Displays or supporting components cannot be ar- and assure the columns are driven from left to right
bitrarily selected!!! As explained below, replacement and the rows are driven from top to bottom, each drive
Displays are provided from YORK as kits to assure signal contains a horizontal and vertical sync signal. The 5
compatibility of all components. Non-compatibility Display Interface Board receives these display drive
of components will result in incorrect operation!!! signals from the Microboard J5 and applies them to the
Refer to “Display Interface Board” and “Backlight In- Display at connector CN1. Refer to Fig. 28.
verter Board” sections that follow this section. Displays
that could be provided from YORK in new chillers or Although there are variations in control signal timing
as replacement parts are: between different display manufacturers, Fig. 23 depicts
typical control signals. Since these control signals occur
• SHARP LQ10D367 at rates greater than can be read with a Voltmeter, the
following description is for information only. There are
• SHARP LQ10D421
480 horizontal rows of pixels. Each row contains 640
• NEC NL6448AC33-24 3-window pixels. Beginning with the top row, the drive
• LG SEMICON LP104V2-W signals are applied within each row, sequentially left
to right, beginning with the left most pixel and ending
The YORK part numbers of the Display Interface with the right most pixel. The rows are driven from top
Board, Backlight Inverter Board and Inverter ribbon to bottom. The Vertical Sync (VSYNC) pulse starts the
cable provided, are listed on a label attached to the scan in the upper left corner. The first Horizontal Sync
Display mounting plate. These are the part numbers of (HSYNC) pulse initiates the sequential application of
the supporting components that are compatible with the RGB drive signals to the 640 pixels in row 1. Upon
installed display. These supporting components can be receipt of the ENABLE signal, an RGB drive signal
individually replaced. However, if the Liquid Crystal is applied to the first pixel. As long as the ENABLE
Display fails, Display replacement kit 331-01771-000 signal is present, RGB drive signals are then applied to
must be ordered as detailed below. This kit contains the remaining 639 pixels at the CLK rate of 25.18M Hz,
a replacement Display and all compatible supporting or one every 39.72 nanoseconds. Typically it takes 31
components. microseconds to address all 640 pixels. Similarly, the
next HSYNC pulse applies drive signals to row 2. This
The Display has 307,200 pixels arranged in a 640 col- continues until all 480 rows have been addressed. Total
umns X 480 rows matrix configuration. Each pixel con- elapsed time to address all 480 rows is approximately 16
sists of 3 windows; red, green and blue, through which milliseconds. The next VSYNC pulse causes the above
a variable amount of light from the Display Backlight cycle to repeat. Displays can be operated in FIXED
is permitted to pass through the front of the display. mode or DISPLAY ENABLE mode. In FIXED mode,
Imbedded in each window of the pixel is a transistor, the first pixel drive signal is applied a fixed number
YORK INTERNATIONAL 45
 Liquid Crystal Display
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

(48) of clock (CLK) cycles from the end of the HSYNC Display Interface Board required for each Display ap-
pulse and the drive signals are terminated a fixed num- plication and each has a unique jumper configuration
ber (16) of CLK cycles prior to the next HSYNC pulse. that identifies the Display. A complete explanation of
In DISPLAY ENABLE mode, the pixel drive signals this process is included in the preceding “Microboard”
are applied to the pixels only while ENABLE signal is section and the “Display Interface Board” section that
present. This signal is typically present 4-48 CLKS after follows.
the end of the HSYNC pulse and 2-16 CLKS prior to
The DC power source to operate the Display is provided
the next HSYNC pulse. All YORK applications oper-
by the Microboard J5. Some Display manufacturers re-
ate in the DISPLAY ENABLE mode. The state of the
quire +5VDC; others require +3.3VDC. The position of
ENABLE (Display Interface Board J1-27) signal from
Microboard Program Jumper JP2 determines which of
the Microboard places the Display in the desired mode
these power sources is supplied to the Display. JP2 must
as follows:
be positioned according to the Display manufacturers
requirements. Refer to Table 1, “Program Jumpers”.
• SHARP LDQ10D367 & LDQ10D421 Displays -
When ENABLE maintained “low”, display operates The Backlight Lamp provides the illumination for the
in fixed mode. display. Average lamp life is 25000 hours (2.9 years).
• NEC NL6448AC33-24 Displays - When ENABLE Some displays use one lamp. Others use two lamps.
maintained “high” or “open”, display operates in Lamps are replaceable, but not interchangeable between
fixed mode. different displays. Each Display manufacturer specifies
• LG SEMICON Display does not have the fixed the required lamp for their display. Refer to replacement
mode feature. parts list for appropriate replacement lamp. Service
replacement lamps are stocked in the YORK Service
As described above, in OptiView Control Center appli- Parts Distribution Center. The lamp is illuminated by
cations, the Display scan is left to right, beginning with applying a high voltage AC (500 to 1500VAC) to it.
the top row and continuing sequentially through the This illumination voltage is created from a low level DC
rows to the last row. However, in Display applications voltage (+12VDC or +5VDC as required by the Display
other than OptiView Control Centers, image reversal manufacturer) by the Backlight Inverter Board. Lamp
is sometimes required. In image reversal applications, brightness is controlled by varying the high voltage AC.
the scan is reversed; the scan is right to left, beginning The greater the voltage the brighter the illumination.
with the last row and proceeding to the top row. The The lamp is controlled by on/off commands and bright-
SHARP or NEC Display is placed in the NORMAL ness control signals applied to the Backlight Inverter
or REVERSE scan mode by the voltage levels on the Board from the Microboard. The Microboard Program
Display Interface Board J1-30 and J1-31 (display con- determines when the lamp is turned on and off and the
nector CN1-30/31). These voltage levels are determined lamp brightness. Each Display manufacturer specifies
by the configuration of Wire jumpers P30 and P31 on the Backlight Inverter Board to be used. Therefore,
the Display Interface Board (ref. Fig. 28). The Display it will vary according to the Display manufacturer.
reads these voltage levels and automatically assumes The ribbon cable that connects the Microboard to the
NORMAL or REVERSE scan operation. Refer to DIS- Backlight Inverter Board also varies according to the
PLAY INTERFACE BOARD section that follows for Display manufacturer’s requirements. Refer to Fig. 29
jumper configurations. to 31. Microboard Program Jumpers JP3, 4, 5, 7 and 8
determine the voltage levels of the control signals sent to
Displays by different manufacturers can require different the Backlight Inverter Board and must be configured
timing and control signals. The Microboard must know per the Display manufacturer’s requirements as listed
which Display is present in order provide the correct in Table 1. A detailed description of the operation of
signals. Therefore, when AC control power is first ap- this board is in the “Backlight Inverter Board” section
plied to the OptiView Control Center, as part of the that follows. Also refer to the preceding “Microboard”
power-up sequence, the Microboard reads the Panel ID section for a detailed description of the Lamp Dimmer
wire jumpers P1D0 - P1D3 on the Display Interface circuit.
Board and determines which Display is present. It can
then provide the correct timing and control signals to The actual Display that is installed in the OptiView
produce the graphic image, as required by the Display Control Center of the new chiller is determined by the
manufacturer. Since the Display Interface Board iden- Display manufacturer contractual agreement in place
tifies the Display for the Microboard, there is a different during the time of OptiView Control Center production.
46 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Displays stocked for Service replacement are a result of BACKLIGHT LAMP REPLACEMENT:
that same agreement. Therefore, the Display received for
service replacement may be by a different manufacturer SHARP LQ10D367 Display: (Refer to Fig. 29)
than the one in the OptiView Control Center. Since each Removal:
Display manufacturer requires a specific Display In- The Lamp slides into the Display from left to right and
terface Board, Backlight Inverter Board and Inverter is secured with a locking tab.
Ribbon Cable, replacement Displays are ordered and
1. Remove Control Power from the OptiView Control
supplied as a Display Replacement Kit (YORK Part
Center.
Number 331-01771-000) to assure component compati-
bility. The items supplied in the kit are compatible with 2. Remove protective cover from rear of Display.
the supplied Display. The kit consists of the following 3. Disconnect Lamp AC power connector from Back-
items mounted on a Display mounting plate: light Inverter Board.
4. Using fingernail or thin flat blade screwdriver, bend
Display Replacement Kit 331-01771-000: the locking tab outward slightly to clear the Lamp
1. Liquid Crystal Display with Lamp housing protrusion.
2. Appropriate Display Interface Board for item 1 5. Grasp Lamp AC power connector and gently pull
3. Appropriate Backlight Inverter Board for item 1 until Lamp housing clears locking tab.
4. Appropriate ribbon cable (Backlight Inverter Board 6. Grasp Lamp housing and pull until Lamp housing
to Microboard) for item 1 is completely removed from the Display.
5. Ribbon cable (Display Interface Board to Installation:
Microboard) 1. Slide new Lamp into Display from left to right until
5
6. All mounting hardware Lamp housing protrusion locks into Display locking
7. Installation instructions. A label attached to the Dis- tab.
play mounting plate lists the YORK part numbers 2. Connect Lamp AC power connector to Backlight
of the Display supporting components mounted Inverter Board.
on the Display mounting plate and the required 3. Apply Control Power to OptiView Control Center.
Microboard Program Jumper (JP2 through 8) con-
figurations. Microboard Program Jumpers JP2- SHARP LQ10D421 Display (refer to Fig. 30)
JP8 will have to be configured appropriately for
Removal:
the replacement display.
Both the top and bottom lamps slide into the Display
from left to right and are secured with locking tabs.
Display Handling:
1. Remove Control power from the OptiView Control
1. The display is made of glass. It could break if
Center.
dropped.
2. Remove protective cover from rear of display.
2. The display front surface is easily scratched. If
soiled, wipe with a dry cotton cloth. Use no water 3. Disconnect lamp AC power connector from de-
or chemicals. fective lamp.
3. The display is static sensitive. Electrostatic dis- 4. Using a thin flat blade screwdriver, press in on the
charges may damage the display. small black locking tab.
4. A laminated film is adhered to the display front 5. Grasp Lamp AC power connector and gently pull
glass surface to prevent it from being scratched. until Lamp clears locking tab.
Peel off very slowly to prevent static damage. 6. Grasp Lamp housing and pull until Lamp housing
is completely removed from the display.
Always remove control power from the Installation:
OptiView control center before con-
necting or disconnecting wires to the Follow instructions above for SHARP 367 Display.
display. Connecting or disconnecting
NEC NL6448AC33-24 Display (refer to Fig. 31)
wires to the display with power applied
will damage the display!!! Removal:
Not available at this time.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 47
 Liquid Crystal Display
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Installation: 4. Using small Phillips screwdriver, remove lamp

Not available at this time. retaining screw.
5. Grasp Lamp AC power connector and gently pull
LG Semicon LP104V2-W Display (refer to Fig. 29) until Lamp housing is completely removed from
Removal: the Display.
The Lamp slides into the Display from left to right and Installation:
is secured with a screw.
1. Slide new Lamp into Display from left to right until
1. Remove Control Power from the OptiView Control Lamp housing is fully inserted.
Center.
2. Secure Lamp with Lamp retaining screw.
2. Remove protective cover from rear of Display.
3. Connect Lamp AC power connector to Backlight
3. Disconnect Lamp AC power connector from Back- Inverter Board.
light Inverter Board.
4. Apply AC power to OptiView Control Center.

LD04062

FIG. 18 – DISPLAY, MOUNTING

48 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

BACKLIGHT BULB DISPLAY INTERFACE MOUNTING

025-33752-000 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY BOARD 031-01765-002 PLATE
SHARP LQ10D367
LABEL

BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD 5
031-01789-000
DISPLAY CABLE
INVERTER CABLE 031-01769-000
031-01770-003

NOTE:
LD05526
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.

FIG. 19 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ10D367 DISPLAY

INVERTER CABLE MOUNTING PLATE

LABEL (NOT AVAILABLE)

CN3

CN1

CH1

CN2

DISPLAY CABLE
(NOT AVAILABLE)

BACKLIT INVERTER
BOARD (NOT AVAILABLE)
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DISPLAY INTERFACE
NOTE: SHARP LQ10D421 BOARD (NOT AVAILABLE)
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.
LD04064

FIG. 20 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ10D421 DISPLAY

YORK INTERNATIONAL 49
 Liquid Crystal Display
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

INVERTER CABLE
(NOT AVAILABLE) MOUNTING PLATE

CN2

CH1
CN1

CN2

BACKLIT DISPLAY CABLE

INVERTER (NOT AVAILABLE)
BOARD
(NOT AVAILABLE)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DISPLAY INTERFACE

NEC NL6448AC33-24 BOARD (NOT AVAILABLE)
LABEL

LD04065

NOTE:
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.

FIG. 21 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – NEC NL6448AC33-24 DISPLAY

50 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

BACKLIGHT BULB DISPLAY INTERFACE MOUNTING

025-34564-000 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY BOARD 031-01765-001 PLATE
LG SEMICON LP104V2-W
LABEL

4564

4
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER

5
BOARD
031-01789-000
DISPLAY CABLE
INVERTER CABLE 031-01769-000
031-01770-003
LD05525
NOTE:
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.

FIG. 22 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY - LG SEMICON LP104V2-W

480 ROWS
16MS
VSYNC

31US
HSYNC
ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 480

BP FP
640
COLUMNS

ENABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY

PERIOD PERIOD PERIOD
39.72 NS
640 CLKS

CLK NOTES:
(25.18 1. BP = Back Porch = 4-48 CLKS
MHz)
2. FP = Front Porch = 2-16 CLKS

RGB LD04066

FIG. 23 – LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY TYPICAL CONTROL SIGNAL TIMING

YORK INTERNATIONAL 51
 Liquid Crystal Display
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

BEZEL
LAMP HOLDER

WIRE PROTRUSION
(white/GND side)

HOLE

LOCKING TAB
WIRE
(pink/HOT side)

DIRECTION A

DIRECTION B

LD04067

DIRECTION C

FIG. 24 – DISPLAY (SHARP LQ10D367) LAMP REPLACEMENT

BLACK LOCKING TAB

REAR
FLAT HEAD VIEW
BLACK LOCKING TAB SCREWDRIVER

LAMP UNIT

C REAR
" ∇ " MARKING AT THE VIEW
SIDE OF THE LAMP UNIT
∇
" " MARKING AT THE
METAL PORTION AT THE SIDE
OF THE MODULE C

LD04068
FIG. 25 – DISPLAY (SHARP LQ10D421) LAMP REPLACEMENT

52 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS TIME

5
LD04069

FIG. 26 – DISPLAY (NEC NL6448AC33-24) LAMP REPLACEMENT

BEZEL
LAMP HOLDER

WIRE
(white/GND side)

RETAINING SCREW

WIRE
(pink/HOT side)

DIRECTION B

LD05527

DIRECTION C

FIG. 27 – DISPLAY (LG SEMICON LP104V2-W) LAMP REPLACEMENT

YORK INTERNATIONAL 53
 Display Interface Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 6
DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD
(REFER TO FIG. 28)

The Display Interface Board is located on the Liq- NEC NL6448AC33-24 Display:
uid Crystal Display mounting plate and is part of the P30 Not Used
Microboard interface to the Display. It permits the use P31 IN or OUT - Normal scan; left to right, top to
of Displays by different manufacturers, by providing the
bottom
Microboard with a means of automatically determining
which Display is present. The wire jumpers on this board are not field configu-
rable, as with typical Program Jumpers. There are two
Since different Display manufacturers require different variations of the Display Interface Board. Each board
timing and control signals, the Display Controller on has the wire jumpers configured appropriately for the
the Microboard must be configured to meet the require- display to which it is attached, as shown below. Display
ments of the actual Display installed. When AC power Interface Boards are available individually for service
is applied to the OptiView Control Center, as part of the replacement. The YORK part number of the Display
power-up sequence, the Microboard reads the four Panel Interface Board compatible with the installed Display is
ID wire jumpers, P1D0 through P1D3, on the Display listed on a label attached to the Display mounting plate.
Interface Board to determine which Display is present. However, service replacement Displays are provided as
The configuration of these jumpers indicates the actual a kit (331-01771-000) that includes, among other items,
Display that is installed on the OptiView Control Center the appropriate Display Interface Board for the Dis-
door. The Display Controller on the Microboard is then play included in the kit. Refer to explanation in “Liquid
configured appropriately. Crystal Display” section.
031-01765-001:
On Sharp and NEC displays the configuration of wire Display applicability - LG Semicon LP104V2-W
jumpers P30 and P31 determines whether the Display &
scan orientation is Normal or Reverse (image reversal) NEC NL6448AC33-24
scan. As described in the preceding “Display” section, Jumper configuration - PID0 - IN
Normal scan is left to right, beginning with the top row PID1 - OUT
and continuing sequentially through the rows to the PID2 - OUT
bottom row. Normal scan is used in OptiView Control PID3 - OUT
P30 - OUT
Center applications. In Display applications other than
P31 - OUT
OptiView Control Center applications, image reversal
is sometimes required. In image reversal applications, 031-01765-002:
Display applicability - SHARP LQ10D367 &
the scan is reversed; the scan is right to left, beginning
LQ10D421
with the bottom row and proceeding to the top row. The
Jumper configuration - PID0 - OUT
jumper configurations determine the voltage level at Dis- PID1 - IN
play Interface Board J1-30 (P30) and J1-31 (P31). If P30 PID2 - OUT
is IN, the voltage at J1-30 is +5.0VDC or +3.3VDC (as PID3 - OUT
determined by position of Microboard Program Jumper P30 - IN
JP2); if OUT, 0VDC. If P31 is IN, the voltage at J1-31 is P31 - IN
GND; if OUT, 0VDC. The Display reads these voltages
The red, green and blue display drive and control signals
and adopts a scan mode as follows:
are simply passed through the Display Interface Board.
The value of VCC is either +5VDC or +3.3VDC, as
SHARP LQ10D367 & LQ10D421 Displays:
determined by the position of Program Jumper JP2 on
SHARP displays require configuration of both jumpers
the Microboard. PID0 through PID3, when installed,
to achieve total image reversal.
connect their respective Microboard (J5) inputs to GND;
when removed, the Microboard pulls these signals up
P30 IN - Normal scan; left to right
to +5VDC. When P30 is installed, the Display input
OUT - Reverse scan: right to left
(CN1-30) is connected to VCC (+5VDC or +3.3VDC
P31 IN - Normal scan; top to bottom as determined by Microboard Program Jumper JP2).
OUT - Reverse scan; bottom to top When P31 is installed, the Display input (CN1-31) is
54
connected to GND.
YORK INTERNATIONAL
YORK INTERNATIONAL
FIG. 28 – DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD
LG SEMICON LP104V2-W &
NEC NL6448AC33-24 DISPLAYS
031-01765-001-PID0 IN
PID1-3 OUT
P30, P31 OUT
SHARP LQ10D367 & LQ10D421 DISPLAYS
031-01765-002 - PID0 OUT
PID1 IN
PID2, 3 OUT
P30, 31 IN LD04070

55
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

6
 Display Backlight Inverter Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 7
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD
(REFER TO FIG. 29 - 31)

The Display Backlight Inverter Board generates a signal turns the lamp on and off. Some manufacturers re-
high voltage AC signal that is applied to the backlight quire this signal to be +12VDC, others require +5VDC.
lamp, causing it to illuminate. The magnitude of the Program Jumper JP4 must be positioned to provide the
signal determines the lamp brightness. Displays by some required voltage. Further, some applications require this
manufacturers have two lamps; one at the top and one at signal to be a +VDC (+12VDC or +5VDC) to turn on
the bottom of the display. Other Display manufacturers the lamp. Others require this signal to be 0VDC to turn
have only a lamp at the top of the display. on the lamp. Program Jumper JP3 must be positioned
to provide the required polarity.
An Inverter converts low level DC voltage (+12VDC
or +5VDC, as required by the manufacturer) from the Depending upon the Display manufacturer, the bright-
Microboard to a 500 to 1500VAC 60K Hz signal that ness control input from the Microboard must be either
is applied to the lamp. The higher the AC voltage, the a variable voltage or a variable resistance. Microboard
greater the brightness of the lamp. When this voltage is Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are used to provide the
not present, the lamp is turned off. appropriate technique (refer to Fig. 10). The lamp dim-
mer circuit on the Microboard is an IC that is the elec-
High voltage, up to 1500VAC, is trical equivalent of a 10K ohm potentiometer with 100
present at the output of the backlight positions or steps. The Program adjusts the position of
inverter board. Refer to Figures 29 to the potentiometer. When configured for variable voltage
31 and locate the output connectors. (JP7 & JP8 installed), the output between Microboard
J6-7 and J6-8 is a 0 to +5.0VDC signal. Not all applica-
Use extreme caution when working in
tions require the full 5.0VDC range. If configured for
this area!!!
variable resistance (JP7 and JP8 removed), the output
Different Display manufacturers require different Back- between Microboard J6-7 and J6-8 is a 0 to 10K ohm
light Inverter Boards. The different board designs require variable resistance.
different control voltage inputs. To accommodate these
variations, Microboard Program Jumpers JP3 - JP5, The OptiView Control Center could be supplied with
JP7 and JP8 must be configured to provide the required any of several approved Displays. Each Display re-
voltage levels. A label attached to the Display mounting quires a specific Backlight Inverter Board as speci-
plate lists the required Program Jumper configuration fied below and in Figures 29 to 31. These boards are
for that particular display. Refer to Table 1 for required individually available as service replacement parts (the
Program Jumper configurations for the various Display required Backlight Inverter Board part number is listed
applications. on the label attached to the Display mounting plate).
However, service replacement Displays are provided
Under Program control, the Microboard generates the in a kit (YORK P/N 331-01771-000) that includes the
control signals that are applied to the Backlight Inverter appropriate Backlight Inverter Board (refer to “Liquid
Board. The Program determines when the lamp is turned Crystal Display” Section).
on and off. It also adjusts the lamp brightness. To in-
crease the average lamp life of 25000 hours, the lamp SHARP model LQ10D367 AND LG Semicon LP104V2-
brightness is normally adjusted to 50%. This brightness W displays require a TDK CXA-LO612-VJL Backlight
level will still allow the display to be visible. When the Inverter Board (YORK P/N 031-01789-000) (ref. Fig.
Program senses a Keypad key has been pressed, it adjusts 29). These boards generate a lamp illumination high
the brightness to 100% (maximum). voltage AC from +12VDC. When the Backlight Enable
signal at connector CN1-3 is +5VDC, the high voltage
The lamp illumination high voltage AC is generated signal is applied to the lamp. When CN1-3 is 0VDC, the
from either +12VDC or +5VDC as required by the high voltage signal is removed from the lamp, turning
manufacturer. Microboard Program Jumper JP5 must it off. The lamp brightness is controlled by a variable
be positioned to provide the required voltage. The voltage signal, developed by the lamp dimmer circuit
Microboard provides the Backlight Enable signal. This (ref. Fig. 10) on the Microboard and applied to connector

56 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

CN1-4. The lamp dimmer circuit varies the voltage at these values produce a linear brightness between 0 and
CN1-4 over the range of 0 to +3.0VDC. 0VDC produces 100%. This display has a lamp at the top of the display
maximum (100%) brightness; +3.0VDC produces mini- and one at the bottom of the display. Connector CN2
mum (0%) brightness. Voltages between these values applies the high voltage lamp illumination signal to the
produce a linear brightness 0 and 100%. Connector lower lamp; CN3 the upper lamp.
CN2 applies the high voltage lamp illumination signal
to the lamp. NEC model NL6448AC33-24 displays require an NEC
104PWBR1 Backlight Inverter Board (YORK P/N XXX-
SHARP model LQ10D421 displays require a XENTEK XXXXX-XXX) (refer to Fig. 31). These boards generate
LS520 Backlight Inverter Board (YORK P/N XXX- the lamp illumination high voltage AC from +12VDC.
XXXXX-XXX) (refer to Fig. 30). These boards generate When the Backlight Enable signal at connector CN3-1
the lamp illumination high voltage AC from +12VDC. is +5VDC, the high voltage signal is applied to the lamp,
When the “Backlight Enable” signal at connector turning it on. When CN3-1 is 0VDC, the high voltage
CN1-5 is 0VDC, the high voltage signal is applied to signal is removed from the lamp, turning it off. The
the lamp, turning it on. When CN1-5 is +12VDC, the lamp brightness is controlled by a variable resistance,
high voltage signal is removed from the lamp, turning developed by the lamp dimmer circuit (ref. Fig. 10) on
it off. The lamp brightness is controlled by a variable the Microboard and applied to connector CN3-2 and
voltage signal, developed by the lamp dimmer circuit CN3-3. The lamp dimmer varies the resistance between
(ref. Fig.10) on the Microboard and applied to connec- CN3-2 and CN3-3 over the range of 0 to 10K Ohms. 0
tor CN1-6 and CN1-7. The Microboard places CN1-7 Ohms produces minimum (0%) brightness; 10K Ohms
at ground (GND) potential. The lamp dimmer varies the produces maximum (100%) brightness. Resistances be-
voltage at CN1-6 over the range of 0 to +2.5VDC. 0VDC tween these extremes produce linear brightness between
produces maximum (100%) lamp brightness; 2.5VDC 0% and 100%. Connector CN2 applies the high voltage
produces minimum (0%) brightness. Voltages between lamp illumination signal.

RETURN
BACKLIGHT DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD
500 - 1400 VAC LAMP TYPE: TDK CXA-L0612-VJL
PART NUMBER: 031-01789-000
7
N.C.

FOR: SHARP LQ10D367 &

LG SEMICON LP104V2-W DISPLAYS
3 2 1 NOTES:
1. OFF = 0VDC; ON = +5VDC. Refer to
CN2 Microboard Program Jumpers JP3 & JP4.
2. 0 - +3.0VDC. 0VDC = MAX (100%) Bright-
ness; +3.0VDC = MIN (0%) Brightness.
Refer to Fig. 10 and Microboard Jumpers J6
INVERTER JP7 & JP8. N.C. 10
BOARD 3. Refer to Microboard Program Jumper JP5.
4. N.C. = No Connection.
N.C. 9
N.C. 8
CN1 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (NOTE 2)
7 MICRO
1 2 3 4 5 N.C. 6 BOARD
N.C. BACKLIGHT ENABLE (NOTE 1)
5
GND
4
N.C. 3
N.C. 2
+ 12 VDC (NOTE 3)
1

INVERTER CABLE 031-01770-003 LD05528

FIG. 29 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD (SHARP LQ10D367 & LG SEMICON LP104V2-W)

YORK INTERNATIONAL 57
 Display Backlight Inverter Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

UPPER
BACKLIGHT 500 - 1500 VAC
LAMP N.C. DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD
1 2 3 TYPE: XENTEK LS520
PART NUMBER: NOT AVAILABLE
CN3
FOR: SHARP LQ10D421 DISPLAY
J6
+12VDC (NOTE 3) 1
1
+12VDC (NOTE 3) 2
2
GND 3
3
GND
MICRO
CN1 4
4 BOARD
BACKLIGHT ENABLE (ON/OFF) (NOTE 1) 5
5
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL WIPER (NOTE 2)
6 N.C. 6
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ( - ) (GND) 7
7

8
CN2 N.C. 9
1 2 3 INVERTER CABLE
N.C. (NOT AVAILABLE) N.C. 10
LOWER
BACKLIGHT 500 - 1500 VAC
LAMP LD04072
NOTES:
1. ON = 0VDC; OFF = +12VDC. Refer to Microboard Program Jumpers JP3 & JP4.
2. 0 - +2.5VDC. 0VDC = MAX (100%) Brightness; +2.5VDC = MIN (0%) Brightness.
Refer to Fig. 10 and Microboard Program Jumpers JP7 & JP8.
3. Refer to Microboard Program Jumper JP5.
4. N.C. = No Connection.

FIG. 30 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD (SHARP LQ10D421)

BACKLIGHT 500 - 1500 VAC DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD

LAMP GND
TYPE: NEC 104PWBR1
1 2 3 PART NUMBER: NOT AVAILABLE
CN2 FOR: NEC NL6448AC33-24 DISPLAY
J6
+12VDC (NOTE 3) 1
1
+12VDC (NOTE 3) 2
2
GND 3
3
GND
MICRO
CN1 4
4 BOARD
5 N.C. 5

6
BACKLIGHT ENABLE (ON/OFF) (NOTE 1) 7
1
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL WIPER (NOTE 2)
CN3 2 N.C. 8
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ( - ) (NOTE 2) N.C. 9
3

N.C. 10

INVERTER CABLE
(NOT AVAILABLE)
LD04073

NOTES:
1. ON = +5VDC; OFF = 0VDC. Refer to Microboard Program Jumpers JP3 & JP4.
2. 0 - 10K Ohms. 0 Ohms = MIN (0%) Brightness; 10K Ohms = MAX (100%) Brightness.
Refer to Fig. 10 and Microboard Program Jumpers JP7 & JP8.
3. Refer to Microboard Program Jumper JP5.
4. N.C. = No Connection.

FIG. 31 – DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD (NEC NL6448AC33-24)

58 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 8
KEYPAD
(REFER TO FIGURES 32 & 33)

The Keypad contains touch-sensitive keys that allow the is being driven low, if column 3 is low, then the Micro
Operator to interface with the OptiView Control Center. concludes the key at coordinate of row 4 and column 3
The Operator presses the keys to request the desired is pressed. Since the coordinates of all keys are stored
screens of information and enter System Setpoints. in the Microboard’s Program, it can identify which key
is at this coordinate and responds accordingly. In this
The top layer of the Keypad contains embossed areas example the “1” key is pressed.
identifying the keys. Under each embossed key area
are two conductors, one on top of the other, separated In order for the Microboard to reliably detect closed and
by an air space. The conductors are arranged in a ma- open keys, each key must meet a closed circuit and open
trix of rows and columns and connected to the Keypad circuit resistance requirement. When a key is pressed, the
connector as shown in Fig. 32. The embossed area of contact resistance must be < 100 Ohms. When a key is
each key is located directly over the intersection point not pressed, the contact resistance must be > 1Meg Ohm.
of the conductors. Pressing the embossed key area If the Microboard is not responding to a pressed key, or
causes contact and electrical continuity between the if it’s detecting a closed key when none are pressed, it
two conductors. For example, pressing the “1” key could be because the contact resistance requirements are
creates continuity between the Keypad connector pin not being met. The operation of each key can be checked
5 (column 3) and pin 13 (row 4). Since this connector with an Ohmmeter. To check the open and closed con-
is interfaced to the Microboard (J18), the Microboard tact resistance of any key, refer to the “Diagnostics and
senses this continuity as described below and concludes Troubleshooting” Section 23 of this book.
the “1” key is pressed.
The Keypad is attached to the front of the OptiView
The Microboard Program continuously scans the Key- Control Center door with an adhesive backing. If service
pad to determine if a key is pressed. Beginning with replacement is required, start at one corner and slowly
row 1 and proceeding through all rows, the Program peel the Keypad from the door. The rear side of the re-
places a “logic low” (<1VDC) on a row, a “logic high” placement Keypad is coated with an adhesive covered
(>4VDC) on the remaining rows and reads the columns. with a paper backing. Remove the paper backing, align
A logic low in any column indicates a key in that column the Display and rocker switch openings and apply the
and row is pressed. For example, if at the time row 4 Keypad to the door.
8

YORK INTERNATIONAL 59
 Keypad
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LD04074

CONNECTOR

FIG. 32 – KEYPAD

60 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LD04075

LD04076
FIG. 33 – KEYPAD

YORK INTERNATIONAL 61
 Power Supply
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 9
POWER SUPPLY
(REFER TO FIG 34 & 35)

The Power Supply provides the DC power for the LCD

Display and all the printed circuit boards in the OptiView
Control Center. It receives a 102 to 132VAC input from
an external power source and provides the following
DC outputs:
• -12VDC
• +12VDC
• +5VDC 29136A
FIG. 34 – POWER SUPPLY
• +24VDC
• Ground

The +24VDC output provides power to the CM-2 Board supply is utilized by the Microprocessor, Flash Memory
(Electro-Mechanical starter applications), Solid State Card and other digital circuits. It could also be applied to
Starter Logic Board (Mod “A” Solid State Starter), Solid the Backlight Inverter Board, depending on the Display
State Starter Logic/Trigger Board (Mod “B” Solid State manufacturer’s requirements as explained below.
Starter) or Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC) (Variable
Speed Drive applications). If the Chiller is equipped Different Display manufacturers can require different
with Proximity Probe Part number 025-30961-000 supply voltages for their display and supporting circuits.
or 025-35900-000, the Probe is also powered by this To accommodate the different Display manufacturer’s
+24VDC. voltage requirements, Microboard Program Jumpers
JP2 and JP5 must be positioned to provide the required
The -12VDC, +12VDC, Gnd and +5VDC outputs are supply voltages to the Display and the Display Back-
applied to the Microboard. There, these voltages are light Inverter Board. Either +5VDC or +3.3VDC, as
applied to the circuits requiring the respective voltage. determined by JP2, is applied to the Display. Either
From the Microboard, the +12VDC and +5VDC are +12VDC or +5VDC, as determined by JP5, is applied
distributed to other system components requiring these to the Display Backlight Inverter Board. Refer to Table
voltages. These include the MicroGateway, Proximity 1 “Microboard Program Jumpers”.
Probe (025-xxxxx-000 only), I/O Board, VSD Oil Pump,
LCD Display and Display Backlight Inverter Board. The chiller could be equipped with either of two Proximity
Probes. The power supply requirements are different for these
As shown in Fig. 7, the Microboard contains two volt- Probes. All Probes operate from a +5VDC power source.
age regulators that create separate +5VDC and +3.3VDC In addition, Probe part number 025-xxxxx-000 requires
supplies. The +5VDC supply is dedicated to all the a +12VDC source that is supplied directly from the
Microboard Analog circuits and is labeled as the +5VDC Microboard as shown in Fig. 46. Probe 025-30961-000
(Analog) supply. It is also routed to all Pressure Transduc- and Probe 025-35900-000 require a +24VDC source that
ers, Temperature Thermistors, Proximity Probe and Mo- is tapped off of the supply to the CM-2 Current Module
tor controller Board (CM-2, Mod “A” Solid State Starter (Electro-Mechanical Starter applications), Solid State
Logic Board or VSD ACC Board). This permits all Analog Starter Logic Board (Solid State Starter applications)
circuits to be powered by the same supply, eliminating any or ACC Board (VSD applications) as shown in the
offsets caused by voltage regulator drift. The +3.3VDC Proximity Probe Section of this book.

62 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 +5VDC (ANALOG)
ALL TRANSDUCERS & THERMISTORS

+5VDC
- 12VDC
+12VDC
+12VDC MICROGATEWAY
GND
DC GND

YORK INTERNATIONAL
POWER
SUPPLY +5VDC

PROXIMITY
PROBE
(NOTE 5)

+5VDC

MICROBOARD +12VDC I/O

GND
BOARD

+24VDC
GND

+12VDC OIL PUMP

(NOTE 4) VSD
CM-2 BOARD
or
+5VDC (ANALOG)
SOLID STATE (NOTE 3) VDD (NOTE 1)
STARTER LOGIC GND (NOTE 3) LCD
BOARD GND DISPLAY
or
ACC BOARD
NOTES:
+V (NOTE 2)
1. +5 or +3.3VDC as determined by Microboard Program Jumper JP2 DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
& display requirements. GND INVERTER BOARD
2. +12 or +5VDC as determined by Microboard Program Jumper JP5 &
display requirements.
3. Not Applicable to VSD or Mod “B” Solid State Starter applications.
LD06509
4. Applications - CM2 (Em Starter), Logic Board (Mod “A” Solid State
Starter), Logic/Trigger Board (Mod “B” Solid State Starter), Adaptive
Capacity Control (VSD).
5. Refer to Fig. 45, 46 & 47 for Proximity Probe Power Connections. (Not
applicable to “P” compressors and style F and later chillers with “G”
and “H5-8” compressors)
FIG. 35 – POWER SUPPLY – DC POWER DISTRIBUTION (REFER TO OPTIVIEW CONTROL CENTER WIRING DIAGRAM FOR WIRE CONNECTIONS)

63
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

9
 Current Module (CM-2)
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 10
CURRENT MODULE (CM-2)
(REFER TO FIG 36 - 38)

On applications where the Compressor Motor is con- The motor current signal input at J1-1 & J1-2 is applied
trolled by an Electro-Mechanical Starter, the OptiView to potentiometer R8. This is Factory adjusted (field ad-
Control Center is equipped with a Current Module. The justed on service replacements) to illuminate the 105%
Current Module provides compressor motor Overload CURR indicator (CR6) when the compressor motor
and Power Fault protection. The Current Module also current reaches 105% FLA. This calibrated voltage is
provides an analog voltage representing the compressor applied to the Power Fault detector, Overload detectors
motor current to the Microboard for display and Cur- and Multiplexer (MUX).
rent Limit control. While the chiller is running, the
Microboard controls the Pre-rotation Vane (PRV) po- The Power Fault circuit protects the compressor
sition to limit the motor current to the system 100% Full motor and driveline from transient torque damage. It
Load Amp (FLA) value. anticipates the transient torque condition by detecting
a momentary interruption in motor current and de-
The contacts of Current Module K1 relay (identified as energizing the starter before damage can occur. If the
“CM” contacts on the OptiView Control Center wiring chiller has been running for >75 seconds and the motor
diagram) are interfaced into the Motor Controller ini- current decreases to <10% FLA, a Power Fault shut-
tiated shutdown circuit that is located between OptiView down is initiated. The Power Fault indicator (CR5) is
Control Center TB6-53 and I/O Board TB1-16 (ref. Fig illuminated and remains illuminated until manually reset
17 and 37). They are also connected as a digital input with RESET switch S2. Relay K1 is de-energized for 1
to I/O Board J2-1. Relay K1 is normally energized, second and then returned to the energized state. Relay K1
maintaining its contacts in a closed position. Whenever contacts (CM) open for 1 second and then return to the
the Current Module initiates a chiller shutdown, it de- closed state. A SYSTEM COASTDOWN is initiated
energizes K1, opening its contacts. This interrupts the and POWER FAULT is displayed on the Display. The
circuit to I/O Expansion Board RUN relay coil 1R (K18), chiller will automatically restart upon completion of
de-energizing it and causing the Starter to shutdown. SYSTEM COASTDOWN.
Simultaneously, the Microboard reads the opening of
these contacts via I/O Board J2-1, initiates a SYSTEM If the motor current remains continuously at >105%
COASTDOWN and displays the appropriate message FLA for 50 seconds (Nominal), an OVERLOAD
as described below. shutdown is initiated. The Overload indicator (CR4)
is illuminated and remains illuminated until manually
Three Current Transformers in the Compressor Mo- reset with RESET switch S2. Relay K1 is de-energized,
tor Terminal Box (ref Fig. 38) provide 3 phase motor opening K1 contacts (CM). Relay K1 remains de-ener-
current signals to the Diode Bridge (DB). The required gized until manually reset with RESET switch S2. A
turns ratio of the Current Transformers is determined SYSTEM COASTDOWN is initiated and MOTOR
by the system 100% FLA. The Diode Bridge rectifies CONTROLLER-CONTACTS OPEN is displayed.
and combines the three signals into one DC signal that The chiller cannot be started until RESET switch S2 is
is applied to the parallel Variable Resistors (RES). manually pressed.
These are Factory adjusted (field adjusted on service
replacements) to provide a nominal 1.0VDC (0.15 to If the motor current remains continuously at 245% FLA
1.10VDC) signal to the Current Module at J1-1 and J1-2 for 40 seconds, 290% FLA for 20 seconds or 360%
when the compressor motor current is at 100% FLA. Fig. FLA for 10 seconds, an OVERLOAD shutdown is ini-
38 contains a formula to calculate the resistance of RES tiated. Relay K1 and Overload indicator CR4 operate
required to achieve 1.0VDC at 100%FLA. The 100% as described immediately above. A SYSTEM COAST-
FLA value is located on a label adhered to the inside of DOWN is initiated and MOTOR CONTROLLER -
the OptiView Control Center door. CONTACTS OPEN is displayed. The chiller cannot

64 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

be restarted until RESET switch is manually pressed. decreases to 98% FLA. If the motor current continues
LRA/FLA Potentiometer R16 is factory adjusted (field to rise to 104% FLA, the Microboard applies a close
adjusted on service replacements) to the ratio of Locked signal to the PRV until the motor current decreases to
Rotor Amps to Full Load Amps. The correct setting is 102% FLA. While Current Limit is in effect, MOTOR
determined by dividing the LRA by the FLA. If Switch - HIGH CURRENT LIMIT is displayed.
S1 is in the “Y-Delta/57%” position, there is no 245%
FLA threshold. Switch S1 must be positioned accord- As detailed in the “System Calibration” section of this
ing to the type of Electro-Mechanical starter present; book, to field calibrate Potentiometer R8, the PRV must
UP for Y-delta or Autotransformer starters, DOWN for be manually operated to achieve 105% FLA compressor
Across-the-Line starters. motor current. Therefore, during this procedure, Cur-
rent Limit is not invoked until 107% FLA and 110%
The Multiplexer (MUX) is an electronic switch with 8 FLA. The first time the PRV OPEN key is pressed on the
inputs and 1 output. The address applied to it determines COMPRESSOR Screen after logging in at SERVICE
the position of the switch (i.e., which input is routed access level, a 10 minute window is opened, allowing
to the output). The inputs to channel 0 through 6 are the current to rise to 107% FLA before further PRV
grounded (0VDC) . The input to channel 7 is a 0 to opening is inhibited. This inhibit is released when the
4.0VDC analog signal, representing motor current over current decreases to 106% FLA. If the current continues
the range of 0 to 100% FLA. It is Factory calibrated by to rise to 110%, manual control is overridden and a close
Potentiometer R34 to be 4.0VDC when the compressor signal is applied to the PRV until the current decreases
motor current is at 100% FLA. Under Program control, to 109% FLA. After 10 minutes, the normal current limit
the Microboard commands the MUX to route the inputs thresholds of 100% FLA and 104% FLA are applied.
to the MUX output by applying 3-bit Binary addresses
to the MUX address inputs at J5-1,2,3. The voltage level The MUX address inputs along with respective outputs
for a logic 1 is +12VDC and logic 0 is 0VDC. The are as follows:
Microboard reads the MUX outputs at J5-6. It first ad- BINARY
DECIMAL OUTPUT
dresses channel 0 to determine the type of starter applied. J5-1 J5-2 J5-3
The 0VDC at channel 0 indicates to the Microboard 0 0 0 0 Ground
that this is an Electro-Mechanical Starter application 0 0 1 1 Ground
(In all starter applications, the Micro reads channel 0 to 0 1 0 2 Ground
determine the type starter applied; 0VDC = EM starter, 0 1 1 3 Ground
>0VDC=Solid State Starter). It then addresses channel 1 0 0 4 Ground
7 (ignoring channels 1 through 6) to read the analog 1 0 1 5 Ground
motor current voltage. The Microboard interprets this 1 1 0 6 Ground
analog value in terms of %FLA and displays it upon 0-5.0VDC motor current
operator keypad request. It also uses this value to invoke analog signal calibrated on
1 1 1 7 CM-2 board to be +4.0VDC at
compressor motor Current Limit at 100% FLA and 100% FLA.
104% FLA. When motor current rises to 100% FLA, the
Microboard prevents any further current rise by inhib-
iting further Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV) opening until it

10

YORK INTERNATIONAL 65
 Current Module (CM-2)
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LD04079

FIG. 36 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATION)

LD04080

FIG. 37 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS)

66 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

LD04081

NOTES:
MOTOR CT
FLA RESD (OHMS) A. Requires passing motor lead through current transformer (CT)
VOLTAGE RATIO
once before connecting to power supply.
65-111A 200:1
B. Requires passing motor lead through CT twice before connecting
112-224A 350:1 R = 1.282 (CT RATIO) to power supply.
208-600
225-829A 700:1 FLA C. Requires passing motor lead through CT three times before con-
830-1790A 1400:1 necting to power supply.
R = 0.247 (CT RATIO) D. Calculates resistance of “RES” to achieve 1.0VDC at FLA.
11-18C 200:1
FLA
R = 0.370 (CT RATIO)
19-37B 200:1
FLA
2300-4160
38-123A 200:1
R = 0.740 (CT RATIO)
124-264A 350:1
FLA
265-518A 700:1

LD04082
10

FIG. 38 – CM-2 CURRENT MODULE – INTERFACE, CURRENT TRANSFORMERS & VARIABLE RESISTORS

YORK INTERNATIONAL 67
 Solid State Starters
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 11
SOLID STATE STARTERS
(REFER TO FIG. 39 - 41)

SOLID STATE STARTERS Troubleshooting” section of this book. The STOP relay
contacts on the Logic/Trigger Board assure a positive
The OptiView Control Center will accommodate either shutdown on all LCSSS initiated shutdowns.
of two different YORK Liquid Cooled Solid State Start-
ers (LCSSS). Later production chillers are equipped with After power has been applied to the system, the
the Mod “B” LCSSS. This style LCSSS contains the Microboard will attempt to establish communications
Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) assemblies, an inte- with the Logic/Trigger Board. If unsuccessful within 10
grated Logic/Trigger Board and interfaces the OptiView attempts, the Microboard initiates a Cycling shutdown
Control Center via a serial data communications link and displays “LCSSS INITIALIZATION FAILED”
and hardwired relay contacts. Earlier vintage chillers on the System Details line of the OptiView Control Cen-
are equipped with the previous version LCSSS that in- ter display. The Microboard will continue to establish
terfaces the OptiView Control Center via a multiplexed communications until successful. Also, at power-up, the
data interface and hardwired relay contacts. This earlier Logic/Trigger Board reads wire jumpers in its connec-
vintage LCSSS houses the SCR assemblies and Trig- tor J1 to determine the LCSSS model applied (refer to
ger Board; a separate Logic Board is located inside the 160.00-O2). If an invalid jumper configuration is read,
OptiView Control Center. Microboard Program Jumper the Logic/trigger Board initiates a Cycling shutdown
JP39 must be positioned to invoke the appropriate and “LCSSS - INVALID CURRENT SCALE SE-
Microboard/Program operation for the starter applied LECTION” is displayed on the System Details line of
(refer to Table 1). the OptiView Control Center Display. The model desig-
nation is transmitted to the Microboard for display on
Mod “B” Serial Interface LCSSS (Refer to Fig. 39) the MOTOR Screen. This designation determines the
allowable range for the Full Load Amps (FLA) Setpoint
A complete description, theory of operation and trou- and Start Current Setpoint. There are 4 LCSSS models:
bleshooting instructions of this LCSSS are contained 7L, 14L, 26L and 33L. Each model has an allowable
in YORK Service Manual 160.00-O2. The following Full Load Amps (FLA) range and Start Current range
describes the interface and interaction of the LCSSS as listed below.
with the OptiView Control Center.
Communications between the Microboard and Logic/
As shown in Figure 39, the LCSSS contains a single Trigger Board are in the form of master/slave. The
Logic/Trigger printed circuit board. This board performs Microboard is the master and the Logic/Trigger Board is the
the following functions: slave. The Logic/Trigger Board sends two types of data to
the Microboard: Status data and Fault data. After successful
• Generates the SCR trigger pulses
initialization, the Microboard sends a data request every 2
• Receives start/stop commands from the seconds. Normally, the Logic/Trigger Board responds to
Microboard each request. However, if the Microboard does not receive
• Transmits status and fault data to the Microboard a response to 10 consecutive requests, the Microboard
initiates a Cycling shutdown and displays “LCSSS - SE-
• Generates all LCSSS initiated Safety and Cycling RIAL COMMUNICATIONS” on the System Details
shutdowns. line of the OptiView Control Center display. In addition,
the Logic/Trigger Board will initiate the same Cycling
The Logic/Trigger Board is powered by +24VDC shutdown if it does not receive a data request from the
from the OptiView Control Center Power Supply. The Microboard after 10 successive attempts to send data.
OptiView Control Center Microboard (J15) commu-
nicates with this board via a 1200 baud 0/+5VDC serial Anytime the Logic/Trigger Board initiates a Cycling or
data communications link. If this communications link Safety shutdown, it opens its STOP contacts that are
does not operate properly, correct Microboard J15 serial connected in series with the OptiView Control Center’s
port operation can be verified using the Serial Inputs and 1R (K18) RUN relay coil. The contacts remain open as
Outputs diagnostic procedure in the “Diagnostics and long as the condition exists. The open STOP contacts
interrupt the circuit to 1R causing it to
68 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

de-energize, removing the run signal to the LCSSS. The following are the programmable setpoints asso-
Simultaneously, the Microboard reads the opening of ciated with the LCSSS. They are programmed on the
the LCSSS STOP contacts via the I/O Board J2- 1. This MOTOR Screen. Refer to programming instructions in
signals the Microboard that the LCSSS has initiated a the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset
shutdown. The Logic/Trigger Board sends the cause of Procedures” section of this book.
the shutdown in response to the next data request. This is
logged on the HISTORY Screen as the “LAST FAULT • Full Load Amps - This is the maximum allowed
WHILE RUNNING”. A snapshot of the LCSSS oper- motor current at which this chiller is permitted to
ating parameters valid at the instant of the fault are also operate to achieve maximum design capacity. It is
sent. Any additional faults that occur within the 2 second the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller, as listed
transmission time are also sent and logged on the HIS- on the SALES ORDER Screen. Each starter model
TORY Screen under “LAST TEN FAULTS”. Refer to has a permissible range over which this setpoint can
Operation Manual 160.54-O1 for description of all Cy- be programmed as follows:
cling and Safety shutdown messages. While this data is
being sent, “LCSSS - SHUTDOWN - REQUESTING LCSSS Model Permissible FLA
FAULT DATA” is displayed on the System Details line 7L-46, 58 and 50 35 to 260 Amps
of the OptiView Control Center display. If fault data 14L-17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 65 to 510 Amps
is not returned within 2 seconds, the Microboard will
26L-17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 125 to 850 Amps
continue to send a request at 2 second intervals until
the fault data is returned. If none is returned within 10 33L-17, 28, 46 and 50 215 to 1050 Amps
consecutive requests, it assumes it is not forthcoming
and it displays “LCSSS - STOP CONTACTS OPEN” • Start Current - The Logic/Trigger Board will limit
on the System Details line of the display. inrush motor current to this value during starting.
The programmed value is sent to the Logic/Trigger
The chiller can be started if there are no Safety and Cycling Board over the serial communications link. This
conditions. If the temperature of any of the SCR modules setpoint should be programmed to (0.45 x mo-
are >110°F, the LCSSS cooling pump will run and the tor Delta Locked Rotor Amps) as listed on the
chiller will be inhibited from starting until the temperature SALES ORDER Screen. Each model starter has a
has decreased below 109°F. While this start inhibit is in permissible range over which this setpoint can be
effect, “LCSSS - HIGH TEMPERATURE PHASE programmed as follows:
X - STOPPED” (where X is phase A, B, or C) is dis-
played on the System Details line of the display. When Permissible Start
LCSSS Model
Current Range
the chiller is started, the OptiView Control Center sends
two start signals simultaneously to the Logic/Trigger 7L-46, 58 and 50 310 to 700 Amps
Board. One is transmitted via the serial communications 14L- 17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 620 to 1400 Amps
link. The other is the closure of 1R (K18) Start relay, 26L- 17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 1150 to 2600 Amps
applying 115VAC to Logic/Trigger Board TB1-24. If
33L-17, 28, 46 and 50 1460 to 3300 Amps
these two signals are not received within 5 seconds of
one another, the Logic/Trigger Board initiates a cycling
shutdown and “LCSSS - RUN SIGNAL” is displayed • Supply Line Voltage Range - This setpoint is the
on the System Details line of the display. line voltage application and establishes the high and
low line voltage shutdown thresholds. Shutdown
The Logic/Trigger Board transmits the following pa- and restart thresholds are contained in Operation
rameters over the serial communications link for display manual 160.54-O1 under the messages “LCSSS
on the MOTOR Screen: - LOW SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE” and “LCSSS
- HIGH SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE”.
• Three phase motor current • Open SCR Enable/Disable - This enables or
• Three phase line-to-line motor supply voltage disables the Open SCR detection Safety protec- 11
• Input Power (KW) tion performed by the Logic/Trigger Board. This
protection must never be disabled unless advised
• Three phase SCR module temperature by the YORK factory.
• Starter model designation

YORK INTERNATIONAL 69
 Solid State Starters
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

• Kilowatt Hours (KWH) Reset - This allows the ac- or inhibit opening of the Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV), as
cumulated KWH to be set to a desired starting value required, to limit the compressor motor current to the
in the event the BRAM has to be field replaced. This Current Limit or Pulldown Demand Limit setpoint (30%
must never be arbitrarily performed. to 100% FLA) that is in effect. The Microboard calculates
the “% Full Load Amps” (FLA) by dividing the high-
To assure the chiller is not permitted to run for extended est phase of the 3-phase motor current, received from
periods with the supply line voltage outside of acceptable the Logic/Trigger Board, by the value programmed for
limits, the Logic/Trigger Board compares the actual 3- the FULL LOAD AMPS setpoint. “% FULL LOAD
phase line voltage to the thresholds established with AMPS” is displayed on the MOTOR Screen. If the
the Supply Line Voltage Range setpoint. Each supply motor current increases to the extent that the “% FULL
voltage application has an allowable upper and lower LOAD AMPS” reaches 100% of the Current Limit
limit. If the supply voltage goes above or below these Setpoint, the PRV are inhibited from further opening
limits continuously for 20 seconds, the logic trigger until the motor current decreases to <98% of the Cur-
Board initiates a Cycling shutdown and displays “LC- rent Limit setpoint. If the motor current increases to the
SSS - HIGH SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE” or “LCSSS extent that the “% FULL LOAD AMPS” is 104% of the
- LOW SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE” as appropriate. Current Limit setpoint, the PRV will be driven closed
The chiller will automatically restart when the line volt- until the “% FULL LOAD AMPS” decreases to 102%
age is within the acceptable range. of the Current Limit setpoint. The PRV opening will
then be inhibited until the “% FULL LOAD AMPS”
While the chiller is running, the Microboard will close decreases to <98% of the Current Limit setpoint.

CONTROL CENTER SOLID STATE STARTER

J30 / P30
GND 5
POWER 6 6
J2 +24 VDC
SUPPLY 12 4
* 3
2
J15 1
3 GND
2 RX TB2
MICRO 1 TX
BOARD SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

LCSSS
LOGIC / TRIGGER
2 36 37 J19 BOARD
CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWNS
MOTOR

START
STOP

TB1
– TB6 –
J1 2 36 37 START / STOP 24
25 25 24
TB5
I/O TB1 TB6
STARTER (MOTOR CONTROLLER) INITIATED SHUTDOWN
BOARD 16 16 16
STOP CONTACTS
53 53
J2 1 1 115VAC

NOTES: LD04648

* 9 – “CONDOR” Power Supply; 13 – “POWER ONE” Power Supply

FIG. 39 – MOD “B” LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE

70 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Mod “A” Multiplexed Data Interface LCSSS (Refer

to Fig. 41)
A complete description, theory of operation and trou-
bleshooting instructions of this LCSSS are contained
YORK Service Manual 160.46-OM3. 1.
As shown in Fig. 41, the Logic Board of this model
starter is mounted inside the OptiView Control Center.

300 / 600V
VOLTMETER
K1
SCALE JUMPER
RELAY

J3

J6
J2
J5

J7
JUMPER

P1 /
J1 LOGIC
PLUG BOARD
INDI-
CATOR
LED’S

24672A

INTERLOCK R3 R2 R1 J4 START OVERLOAD RESET

JUMPER RESISTORS CURRENT CURRENT PUSHBUTTON
BETWEEN POT POT (SWI)
NO. 7 & 8
PINS 11

FIG. 40 – SOLID STATE STARTER LOGIC BOARD

YORK INTERNATIONAL 71
 Solid State Starters
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

This board provides Overload, Power Fault, Fault ally reset with the S1 RESET switch. The chiller will
Current, Phase Rotation/Loss, and Half Phase Pro- automatically restart when the contacts close.
tection for the Compressor Motor. It also receives SCR
High Temp and Trigger Out Of Lock (OOL) shutdown The Starter Trigger Board monitors the Starter’s Sil-
signals from the Starter Trigger Board. Finally, it pro- icon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) heatsink temperature.
vides analog voltages representing Compressor Motor Whenever the heatsink temperature increases to 212ºF,
Current, Power Line Voltage, Current Limit commands the Trigger Board signals the Logic Board. MOTOR
and a Starter Model code to the Microboard. CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN is displayed.
The Logic Board illuminates the High Temp LED and
The contacts of Logic Board relay K1 (identified as opens Relay K1 contacts. The LED remains illuminated
“CM” contacts on the OptiView Control Center wiring and the contacts remain open until the temperature de-
diagram) are interfaced into the Motor Controller ini- creases to less than 110ºF and manually reset with the
tiated shutdown circuit that is located between OptiView Logic Board’s S1 RESET switch. After S1 is pressed,
Control Center TB6-53 and I/O Board TB1-16 (ref. Fig. the chiller can be restarted. In routine operation, each
16 and 37). They are also connected as a digital input to time the chiller is shutdown for any reason, it is pre-
I/O Board J2-1. Relay K1 is normally energized, main- vented from restarting until the heatsink temperature
taining its contacts in a closed position. Whenever the decreases to less then 110ºF. While it is waiting for the
Logic Board initiates a chiller shutdown, it de-energizes temperature to decrease to this threshold, the HIGH
K1, opening its contacts. This interrupts the circuit to I/O TEMP LED is illuminated, Relay K1 contacts are open,
Board RUN relay coil 1R (K18), de-energizing it and and MOTOR CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN
causing the Starter to de-energize. Simultaneously, the is displayed. When the temperature is below 110ºF, K1
Microboard reads the opening of these contacts via I/O contacts will open, the LED is extinguished, MOTOR
Board J2-1, initiates a SYSTEM COASTDOWN and CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN message is
displays the appropriate message as described below. cleared and the chiller will automatically restart.

When the Logic Board detects an Overload condition,

The Multiplexer (MUX) is an electronic switch with 8
Relay K1 contacts open and the Overload LED illu-
inputs and 1 output. The address applied to it determines
minates. “MOTOR CONTROLLER – CONTACTS
the position of the switch and therefore the output. Under
OPEN” is displayed. The contacts remain open and the
Program control, the Microboard sequentially addresses
LED remains illuminated until manually reset with the
MUX channels 0 through 7. The voltage output of each
Logic Board’s S1 RESET switch. After S1 is pressed,
channel is listed in the table below. Channel 0 is an
the chiller can be restarted.
analog voltage that represents the Starter model and
When a Power Fault, Fault Current or Half Phase Power Line voltage Voltmeter scale. The Program uses
condition is detected, Relay K1 contacts open for 1 sec- this value to limit the Full Load Amps Setpoint range
ond and then close. The Power Fault LED illuminates to the maximum allowed value for the Starter size. This
and will remain illuminated until manually reset with value also determines the Line Voltage display range and
the S1 RESET switch. POWER FAULT is displayed. Motor current display range. Channel 1 is a current limit
At the completion of SYSTEM COASTDOWN, the command that forces the Micro to perform Pre-rotation
chiller will automatically restart. vanes inhibit and closure at the 100% and 104% FLA.
This command is in addition to the Micro’s software cur-
When a Power line Phase Rotation/Loss or Trigger Board rent limit feature that’s based on a calculation comparing
Out of Lock (OOL) condition is detected, Relay K1 con- the highest current phase to the programmed Full Load
tacts open and remain open for as long as the condition ex- Amp Setpoint to arrive at an FLA Percentage. Channels
ists. If the contacts remain open for more than 3 seconds, 2 though 4 are analog voltages representing Phase C,
MOTOR CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN is B and A
displayed; if less than 3 seconds, POWER FAULT is
displayed. The respective Ph. Rot/Loss or Trig. OOL
LED illuminates and remains illuminated until manu-

72 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Power Line Voltages. Channels 5 through 7 are analog

voltages representing Phase A, B and C Compressor
Motor Current. The addresses are +12VDC for logic
high (1). <1VDC for logic low (0).
The Logic Board MUX address inputs, along with the
respective outputs are as follows:

BINARY
DECIMAL OUTPUT
J6-1 J6-2 J6-3
0 0 0 0 Starter Model/Voltmeter/Ammeter full scale, max FLA:
0.41 to 0.77VDC - 7L, 600VAC, max FLA 281, full scale 787A
0.78 to 1.22VDC – 14L, 300VAC, max FLA 551, full scale 1574A
1.23 to 1.76VDC – 14L, 600VAC, max FLA 551, full scale 1574A
1.77 to 2.39VDC – 26L, 300VAC, max FLA 916, full scale 2938A
2.40 to 3.08VDC – 26L, 600VAC, max FLA 916, full scale 2938A
3.09 to 3.87VDC – 33L, 300VAC, max FLA 1134, full scale 3672A
3.88 to 5.00VDC – 33L, 600VAC, max FLA 1134, full scale 3672A
0 0 1 1 Current Limit commands
3.46 to 5.00VDC - <98% FLA
1.21 to 3.45VDC - >100% FLA
0.0 to 1.20VDC - >104% FLA
0 1 0 2 Phase “C” AC Power Line voltage as follows:
300VAC scale = VDC(out) = VAC
67.9
600VAC scale = VDC(out) = VAC
135.8
0 1 1 3 Phase “B” AC Power Line voltage. Same as Phase “C” above.
1 0 0 4 Phase “A” AC Power Line voltage Same as Phase “C” above.
1 0 1 5 Phase “A” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.
1 1 0 6 Phase “B” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.
1 1 1 7 Phase “C” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.

11

YORK INTERNATIONAL 73
 74
CONTROL CENTER SOLID STATE STARTER
J/P-30
GND
POWER 6 6 1
SUPPLY J2 J3
+24VDC
12 2
*
Solid State Starters

ADDRESS (2 2 )
1 1
MICRO 1
ADDRESS (2 )
BOARD 2 2
ADDRESS (2 0 )
3 3
J6 J6
+5VDC
4 4
GND.
5 5
MULTIPLEXED DATA
6 6
J19
2 36 37 L.C.S.S.S
LOGIC PCB
TB6
(031-00936)
TB5
2 36 37
25 25 24 3
J1 J2
J1-2 = MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN TB1
J1-36 = STOP STARTER (MOTOR CONTROLLER) INITIATED SHUTDOWN
J1-37 = START 16 16 1

J2 53 STOP
2 CONTACTS
1 1 115VAC
I/O BOARD
TB6

LD04649

NOTES:

*9 on “CONDOR” Power Supply

13 on “POWER ONE” Power Supply

FIG. 41 – MOD “A” LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 12
ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL BOARD
(REFER TO FIG. 42 - 44)

On applications where the compressor motor is driven by of communications between the Microboard and the
the YORK Variable Speed Drive (VSD), the OptiView VSD components. The communications is in master/
Control center is equipped with an Adaptive Capacity slave form. The VSD Logic Board and Harmonic Filter
Control (ACC) Board (Fig. 42). This board performs Logic Boards act as slaves to the ACC and the ACC acts
the following functions: as a slave to the Microboard. The Microboard initiates
all communications by sending a command to the ACC
• Acts as a bi-directional serial communications gate- Board. The ACC Board passes the command to the VSD
way between the Microboard and the VSD Logic Logic Board. The VSD Logic Board responds to the
Board and VSD Harmonic Filter Logic Board. command by returning the requested data to the ACC
Board and passes the command to the Harmonic Filter
• Tells the VSD Logic Board at what speed (fre-
logic Board. The Harmonic Filter Logic Board returns
quency) to operate the compressor motor. The speed
the requested data to the ACC Board. The ACC Board
will be the lowest speed between 30 to 60 (50) Hz
returns both the VSD Logic Board’s response and the
it can operate without compressor surging.
Harmonic Filter’s response to the Microboard.
• Detects Compressor surge conditions.
• Creates a Surge Map in battery backed memory by There are three different commands issued from the
storing the Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV) position, motor Microboard: Test and Initialize, Fault Data Request
speed (frequency) and Evaporator/Condenser pres- and Status Data Request. When power is first applied to
sure differential (head) that exists when each surge the OptiView Control Center, the Microboard establishes
occurs. serial communications with the ACC, VSD Logic and
Harmonic Filter Logic Boards. To establish communic-
The VSD consists of a power electronics section, Logic ations, it sends a Test and Initialize command to the ACC
Board and an optional Harmonic Filter with Harmonic Board, which sends the command on to the VSD Logic
Filter Logic Board, all mounted in a cabinet that is either Board The VSD Logic Board relays the command to the
mounted to the compressor motor or floor standing (ret- Harmonic Filter Logic Board. If the VSD Logic and Har-
rofit applications). The ACC Board is mounted inside the monic Filter Boards respond appropriately to the ACC
OptiView Control Center. In operation, the VSD Logic Board, the ACC Board responds to the Microboard and
Board a.) controls the VSD power electronics to drive the communications are established. If any of these boards
compressor motor at the speed designated by the ACC fail to respond to the first command, the Microboard
Board, b.) monitors power electronics parameters and sends the command again 4 seconds later. It will con-
initiates chiller shutdowns when safety thresholds are tinue to send this command at 4 second intervals until a
exceeded and c.) transmits the parameters to the ACC response is received. If, after 10 attempts, no response
Board for transfer to the Microboard for display. The op- is received, a Cycling shutdown is performed and
tional Harmonic Filter reduces the power line harmonics VSD –INITIALIZATION FAULT is displayed. The
produced by the VSD. The Harmonic Filter Logic Board Microboard will continue to establish communications
a.) controls the filter b.) monitors filter parameters and until successful. Anytime communications have been
initiates chiller shutdowns when safety thresholds are established and then lost, the Microboard will repeat
exceeded and c.) transmits these parameters to the ACC this process to re-establish communications.
Board for transfer to the Microboard for display. Com-
plete operation and service details of the VSD and ACC After communications have been established, the
Board is contained in YORK manual 160.00-M1. Microboard sends a Fault Data Request command. If
there have been any faults detected by the VSD Logic
The Microboard communicates with the ACC Board, or Harmonic Filter Boards since communications were
VSD Logic Board and the optional Harmonic Filter lost, they are returned to the Microboard at this time. If
Logic Board via 0/+5VDC 1200 baud serial commu- there is no response within 2 seconds, this command is
nications (Fig. 43). The ACC Board is the center point sent at 2 second intervals until a response is received.

12
YORK INTERNATIONAL 75
 Adaptive Capacity Control Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

If no response is received in 10 attempts, a Cycling

shutdown is performed and VSD – SERIAL COM- The following VSD status data is transmitted from the
MUNICATIONS is displayed. VSD Logic Board to the ACC Board for transfer to the
Microboard for display:
The Microboard then begins normal communications • Output Frequency
with the ACC, VSD Logic and Harmonic Filter Boards.
• Output Voltage
During normal communications, commands and data are
exchanged every 2 seconds on the serial communications • Output Current - three phase
link. The Microboard sends a Status Data Request com- • Input Power KW
mand every 2 seconds to the ACC Board which is passed • KWH
along to the VSD Logic Board and Harmonic Filter • 100% Job FLA
Logic Boards as described above. It expects to receive
the data listed below in response each of these com- • DC Link Voltage
mands. If a response is not received to 10 consecutive • DC Link Current
commands, a Cycling shutdown is performed and VSD • Internal Ambient Temperature
– SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS is displayed. The • Inverter Heatsink Temperature – phase A, B, & C
VSD Logic and Harmonic Filter Boards send the data
• Converter Heatsink Temperature
listed below to the ACC Board and the ACC Board adds
its data to it and returns all the data to the Microboard • Pre-charge Relay energized/de-energized
in one response. This continues until the VSD Logic or • SCR Gate Drivers enabled/disabled
Harmonic Filter Boards detect a fault condition. • Water (cooling) Pump on/off
• VSD running/stopped
As stated above, if communications are lost with the
VSD Logic Board, a Cycling shutdown is performed • VSD Software version
and VSD – SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS is dis- • Motor HP
played. However, if communications are lost with the
Harmonic Filter Logic Board, no shutdown is performed, The following Harmonic Filter status data is transmitted
only WARNING – HARMONIC FILTER – DATA from the Harmonic Filter Logic Board to the ACC Board
LOSS is displayed. for transfer to the Microboard for display:
• Input KVA
When a VSD fault condition is detected, the VSD Logic • Total Power Factor
Board opens its VSD Stop Contacts that are connected
• Filter DC Link Voltage
in series with the OptiView Control Center’s 1R (K18)
RUN RELAY coil. This interrupts the circuit to 1R • Input voltage- phase A, B & C
causing it to de-energize, removing the run signal to • Input voltage THD – phase A, B & C
the VSD. Simultaneously, the Microboard reads the • Input Peak voltage – phase A, B & C
opening of the VSD Stop Contacts via its interface to
• Input Current – phase A, B & C
the OptiView Control Center’s I/O Board input J2-1.
This notifies the Microboard that a VSD shutdown has • Input current TDD – phase A, B & C
occurred. The Microboard requests the cause of the • Filter current – phase A, B & C
shutdown by sending a Fault Data Request command. • Filter Heatsink temperature
While this request is being processed, the Microboard • Filter Operation- running/stopped
displays VSD SHUTDOWN – REQUESTING FAULT
DATA. When the cause of the shutdown is received, the • Filter Pre-charge relay – energized/de-energized
Microboard displays a message describing the shutdown • Filter Supply Relay - energized/de-energized
(refer to YORK Operation Manual 160.54-O1 for com- • Input Phase Rotation – ABC/CBA
plete listing of messages) and begins sending normal • Harmonic Filter – present/not present
Status Data Request commands. If the fault data is not
returned to the Microboard within 2 seconds, it sends the The following ACC status data is transmitted from the
command every 2 seconds until fault data is returned. If ACC Board to the Microboard for display.
none is returned within 10 requests, it assumes it is not
forthcoming and displays VSD – STOP CONTACTS
OPEN.

76 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

• Delta P/P (Head pressure) In AUTO speed control mode, the ACC Board controls
• Pre-rotation Vanes position the speed. It determines the optimum compressor mo-
tor speed (frequency) over the range of 30 to 60(50)
• Surge count
Hz and sends this value to the VSD Logic Board via
The compressor motor speed can be controlled either the Serial communications link. The VSD logic Board
manually in MANUAL mode or automatically in AUTO controls the VSD to operate the motor at this frequency.
mode. The optimum speed is the slowest speed possible that
In MANUAL speed control mode, the speed can be will avoid compressor surge conditions but still allow
controlled from the VSD Tuning Screen using Keypad the chiller to meet capacity requirements. This speed is
keys. The speed can be set to a pre-selected frequency found in an adaptive sense as explained below.
over the range of 10 to 60 (50) Hz. Or, it can be increased In determining the optimum motor speed, the ACC
or decreased over the range of 0.0 to 60 (50) Hz in incre- Board employs the following:
ments of 0.1 to 10 Hz. Instructions for manual control are • Delta P/P – This is the chiller Head pressure. It
included in the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints is calculated as (Condenser pressure – Evaporator
and Reset Procedures” section of this book. Via Serial pressure) / Evaporator pressure. It ranges from 0.00
communications, the speed command is sent from the to 3.60. The ACC Board calculates this value from
Microboard to the ACC Board, where it is passed on to evaporator and condenser pressure values received
the VSD Logic Board. The VSD Logic Board controls from the Microboard via serial communications
the VSD to operate the motor at this frequency. While link. The ACC Board returns the calculated Delta
Manual control is selected, VALID POINT LED CR8 P/P value to the Microboard for display over the
is illuminated, indicating that surges will not be mapped same link.
in the Surge Map. Anytime this LED is illuminated,
• Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV) position – A poten-
surges are not mapped, as explained below. In making
tiometer provides PRV position (0 to 100%) to the
the transition from Manual to Auto mode, if the speed
ACC Board. The position is 0% when fully closed,
was manually set to <30 Hz, it will automatically be set
100% when fully open. This value is sent to the
to 30 Hz and automatically adjusted from this value. If
Microboard via serial communications for display.
not in Current Limit and the actual speed is <60 (50) Hz,
The potentiometer must be calibrated by a qualified
and 60 (50) Hz is selected, the speed will be increased
Service technician using a procedure in the “System
as follows. If the Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature
Calibration, Service setpoints and Reset Procedures”
is within 0.2ºF, the PRV will simultaneously be driven
section of this book. No speed reduction is permitted
closed per the following:
if this calibration has not been performed.
Speed Increase • Motor Speed – This is the actual drive frequency
of 30 to 60(50) Hz.
• 0.2 Hz every second if Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature >0.2ºF below the Setpoint and motor • Surge Map – This contains the Delta P/P, PRV
current is <80%FLA. position and motor speed that existed at the instant
of each previously encountered surge condition.
• 0.2 Hz every 1 + (%FLA-80) second if Leaving
These parameters are stored as a 3-dimenensional
Chilled Liquid Temperature is >0.2ºF below the
array for each surge. The surge map is stored in the
Setpoint and the motor current is >80% but <
ACC Board’s BRAM battery backed memory. The
98%FLA.
following procedures are detailed in the “System
• 0.2 Hz every 19 seconds if none of the above con- Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures
ditions are present. section of this book: The entire Surge Map can be
printed by pressing the “Surge Map Print” keypad
PRV Close key. Surge Map points can be automatically printed
A close signal of the following durations is applied to an external printer as they are plotted. The Surge
every 4.5 seconds: Map can be cleared.
• 3.9 seconds if PRV position >50%.
• 3.0 seconds if PRV position >25% but <50%.
• 1.5 seconds if PRV position <25%.

12
YORK INTERNATIONAL 77
 Adaptive Capacity Control Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The Surge Map must never be cleared SITIVITY Setpoint on the Optiview Evaporator
unless advised by the YORK Factory. Screen. The 50% selection reduces the magnitude
of PRV movement over the NORMAL selection and
the 30% selection reduces it even more. With Flash
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later
or “P” compressors with C.MLM.04.02.xxx and
The following conditions must be met before speed later, and the 50% or 30% sensitivity is selected,
reduction is permitted: PRV movement is further reduced during low load
conditions with variable speed drive as follows:
• The PRV calibration procedure must have been When the PRV position is < 25% and the Leaving
performed. Chilled Liquid Temperature is within + 2.5 ºF of
• Auto speed control mode must be selected at the Setpoint, the maximum allowed vane pulse is lim-
Keypad. ited to 3.5 seconds at the 25% PRV position and 0.9
• Current Limit must not be in effect. When cur- seconds at 0% position. PRV positions in between
rent limit is in effect, Valid Point LED CR8 is have linearly scaled maximums.
illuminated.
• The Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature must be When the chiller is started, the speed is brought to 60
within +0.3 and –0.6ºF of the Leaving Chilled Liq- Hz. After it has been running for >2 minutes and the
uid Setpoint. Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature is within +0.3
and –0.6ºF of the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
• The Chiller must have been running for >2 min-
Setpoint, the ACC Board evaluates if the speed can be
utes.
reduced. If there are no conditions above that would
• The Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature must be inhibit speed reduction, the ACC Board compares the
stable. Lowering the speed while this temperature real-time Delta P/P, PRV Position and motor speed to
is unstable, would tend to increase the instability. the 3-dimensional arrays stored in the Surge Map. If
The Microboard calculates the stability by com- the real-time array does not match any previous surge
paring the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature to condition, the speed will be decreased 0.1 Hz every 6
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint seconds until it is within 1 Hz of previously plotted
to arrive at a rate of change value. This value is surge condition array in the Surge Map. It will then be
then compared to the programmed Stability Limit decreased 0.1 Hz every 9 seconds until it’s to the lowest
Setpoint. If the rate of change exceeds the Stability value allowed by the Surge Map. If no plotted points
Limit Setpoint value, the Microboard sends a flag to are encountered, the speed is lowered until a surge is
the ACC Board. In response, the ACC Board starts encountered or a minimum of 30 Hz is reached.
a 60 second timer. VALID POINT LED CR8 will
be illuminated and speed decreases are prohibited The ACC Board uses two different methods of Surge
until the timer has elapsed. Also, when making Detection; Delta P method and DC Link method. Surge
the transition from Manual speed control Mode to detection is only enabled while the chiller is running. In
Auto Mode, the stability timer is started, preventing detecting a surge using the Delta P method, the outputs of
speed reduction for 60 seconds. The Stability Limit the Evaporator and Condenser pressure Transducers are
setpoint is programmed over the range of 1000 to monitored to detect when the difference between these
7000, by a qualified Service Technician using the pressures (Delta P) drops transiently toward Zero. This
procedure in the “System Calibration, Service would be indicative of a surge. A surge detected by the
Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this Delta P method must have all of the following conditions
book. This value is a relative value that represents occur within 5 seconds to be considered a valid surge: a.)
magnitude of stability. Higher values correspond to Delta P must make a negative transition and exceed 3.4
decreasing sensitivity. Default value of 4500 will PSIG for 100 Milliseconds. B.) Delta P must also exceed
provide proper operation in most applications. 3.5 PSIG for at least 340 milliseconds. C.) Delta P must
• Certain applications, such as short chilled liquid make at least 2 positive transitions. When this criteria
loops, multi-pass evaporators, parallel chillers and is met, Surge LED CR9 illuminates for 2 seconds, in-
light load conditions can cause excessive Pre-rota- dicating a valid surge has been detected. In detecting a
tion Vane (PRV) movement resulting in leaving surge using the DC Link method, the VSD’s DC Link
chilled liquid temperature control instability. This Current is monitored to detect when the current drops
instability can be reduced by adjusting the SEN- transiently toward zero. This, as the case with Delta P
78 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

method, is indicative of a surge. A surge detected by this decreasing, but increases are allowed. If a surge is
method must also meet the following requirements to be detected within this 5 minute period, it is not plotted
considered a valid surge: a.) At least 6 DC Link surges on the Surge Map, but the speed is increased by the
must occur within 2 minutes, and b.) At least 3 Delta amount as described above. This is repeated as long as
P surges have occurred within the 2 minute interval. the compressor continues to surge. The compressor must
When both these criteria have been met, Surge LED be surge free for 5 minutes before a speed decrease is
CR9 illuminates for 2 seconds, indicating a valid surge permitted or another surge or another surge can be plot-
has been detected. ted on the Surge map.

Each time a Valid Surge is detected, the ACC Board in- The ACC Board counts the surges as they occur and
creases the motor speed (up to a maximum of 60(50)HZ) sends a total count to the Microboard for display. The
to take the compressor out of surge. It also evaluates total surge count is not incremented if a different surge
other chiller conditions to determine if the surge should type occurs within 10 seconds of the previous surge.
be plotted on the Surge Map. Surges that occur during A Surge that occurs within 10 seconds of the previous
certain operating conditions are not plotted, as explained surge is only counted if it is of the same surge type. For
below. Whenever Valid Point LED CR8 is illuminated, example, if a Delta P surge is detected and a DC Link
surges are not plotted. surge is detected within 10 seconds, the DC Link surge
is not counted. If the DC Link surge occurred >10 sec-
After each surge, the speed is increased either 1.0 Hz onds after the Delta P surge, it would be counted.
or 0.8 Hz (plus the programmed Surge Margin Adjust
Setpoint), depending on operating conditions, in the fol- A surge point can be manually inserted into the Surge
lowing increments: Map using the Manual Surge Point keypad key on
• 0.1 Hz every 2 seconds if motor current the ACC Details screen and switch SW1 on the ACC
<80%FLA. Board as described in the “System Calibration, Service
Setpoints, and Reset Procedures” section of this book.
• 0.1 Hz every 2 + (%FLA-80) if motor current
This is only to be used for situations in which the auto-
>80%FLA but <98%FLA.
matic surge detection described above does not respond
• 0.1 Hz every 20 seconds if motor current to surge events. This is usually not required and is to be
>98%FLA. used only by qualified Service Technicians as a method
of plotting a surge event that the ACC Board does not
If Current Limit is in effect, or the Stability Timer is run- find on its own. At the instant the condition is identified
ning when a surge occurs, the speed is increased 1.0 Hz as a surge event, Surge LED CR9 illuminates for 2
but the surge is not plotted on the Surge Map since these seconds. The motor speed, Delta P/P and PRV Position
conditions would produce an erroneous value. Valid at the instant the point is established, is unconditionally
Point LED CR8 is illuminated as a visual indication plotted as a 3-dimensional array in the Surge Map as
that one or both of these conditions are in effect. a surge condition, regardless of whether or not Valid
Point LED CR8 is illuminated. The motor speed will be
Otherwise, the speed is increased 0.8 Hz (plus the pro- automatically increased as described above. Once plot-
grammed Surge Margin Adjust Setpoint) and the surge ted, the ACC Board will respond to this point in exactly
event is plotted on the Surge Map. The Surge Margin the same way it responds to automatically plotted surge
Adjust Setpoint can be used to add an extra margin of points, as described above.
surge prevention. It is programmed over the range of
0.0 to 25.0 Hz following instructions in the “System Surge points can be printed from the ACC Details
Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures” Screen. The entire stored Surge Map can be printed us-
section of this book. The Default value of 0 should ing the Surge Map Print keypad key. Also, the surge
provide proper operation in most applications. points can be printed in real-time as they occur, using
the Auto Print keypad key. Since the maximum rate at
When the speed has been increased either 1.0 Hz or which new surges can be plotted is every five minutes,
0.8 Hz (plus the Surge Margin Adjust Setpoint), as the rate at which new points are printed is also every
described above, this speed is maintained for the next five minutes.
15 seconds. During this period, new surges are ignored.
When the 15 seconds have elapsed, a 5 minute time When the PRV’s approach their 100% open position,
period is entered where the speed is inhibited from there is very little PRV movement remaining to com- 12
YORK INTERNATIONAL 79
 Adaptive Capacity Control Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

pensate for an increasing load condition. Therefore, in applied directly from the Microboard to the MUX (mul-
Auto speed control mode, if there is no Current Limit tiplexer) for Delta P surge detection. Also applied to the
in effect, and the PRV position reaches >98%, the speed MUX, is the output of the PRV position Potentiometer.
is automatically increased at a rate based on the Delta Under program control, these values are input to the
T between the Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature and microprocessor. The EPROM contains the operating
the Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature Setpoint as Program for the ACC Board. The RAM serves as the
follows: scratch pad memory. The BRAM is a battery backed
• 0.1 Hz every 10 seconds if Delta T is >0.2 and memory device where the Surge Map is stored. The
<0.5ºF. Watchdog circuit maintains the microprocessor in a re-
set state during low voltage conditions. This prevents
• 0.1 Hz every 8 seconds if Delta T is >0.5 and
the microprocessor from reading/writing or processing
<0.9ºF.
data until it and supporting circuits have sufficient sup-
• 0.1 Hz every 6 seconds if Delta T is >0.9ºF. ply voltage. The Watchdog also assures that the entire
Program is executed and that no Program latch-ups oc-
If Delta P/P ever increases to >3.60, the speed will be cur. Surge LED CR9 illuminates for 2 seconds when
slowly increased to 60 Hz. If this were to occur, Delta a valid surge condition has been detected as explained
P/P would have to decrease to <3.55 before a speed above. Valid Point LED CR8 illuminates whenever
decrease would be allowed. there is a condition in effect that prevents a Surge from
being plotted on the Surge Map. These conditions are:
The microprocessor is the center point of the hardware a.) Current Limit is in effect b.) Leaving Chilled Liquid
architecture (Fig. 42). It coordinates the serial data Temperature Stability Timer is running, indicating an
communications between the OptiView Control Center unstable control condition c.) Speed control is in MAN-
Microboard and the VSD Logic Board and Harmonic UAL mode. Switch SW1 is used to manually insert (plot)
Filter Logic Board. This serial data is in 0v/+5VDC form. a surge point in the Surge Map.
YM XMT (CR7) and YM RCV (CR6) LED’s illuminate
during serial communications with the OptiView Control Test points are provided as follows:
Center Microboard. Similarly, VS XMT (CR5) and VS
• TPA: +5VDC supply voltage.
RCV (CR4) LED’s illuminate during serial communic-
ations with the VSD Logic Board. Serial communications • TPB: supply voltage ground.
with the Harmonic Filter logic Board take place through • TPC: Watchdog power failure detected. Normally
the microprocessor via the Digital Signal Processor. This >+4.5VDC. Transitions to logic low (<3.5VDC)
data is accompanied by a Framing pulse and a CLK signal. during low voltage conditions.
Although Evaporator and Condenser pressures are trans- • TPD: Harmonic Filter Logic Board 0/+5VDC 1200
mitted to the ACC Board via the serial communications baud serial data.
link for Delta P/P calculation, these pressures are also • TPE: Harmonic Filter Logic Board Frame pulse.

80 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

TPE HARMONIC TPD HARMONIC

FILTER FRAME PULSES FILTER DATA

MICROBOARD
RECEIVE LED

TPC VSD
(POWER TRANSMIT
FAIL) LED

VSD
MICRO RECEIVE
BOARD LED
TRANSMIT
LED
MANUAL
SURGE
POINT
SWITCH
SURGE
LED

MICRO

VALID
SURGE
POINT
LED

TPB
(GND)

LD04084

TPA BRAM EPROM

(+5VDC)

FIG. 42 – COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD) ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD 12
YORK INTERNATIONAL 81
 Adaptive Capacity Control Board
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

EVAP PRESSURE

COND PRESSURE
TX SERIAL DATA VSD
MICRO LOGIC
ACC RX SERIAL DATA
BOARD BOARD
BOARD
TX SERIAL DATA
SERIAL
RX SERIAL DATA DATA

CLK HARMONIC
FRAME FILTER
SERIAL DATA LOGIC
PRV
BOARD
POSITION

POWER +24VDC
SUPPLY
LD04085

FIG. 43 – ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD - INTERFACE

82 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 CR6 CR7 CR5 CR4
YM YM VS VS
RCV XMT XMT RCV

J10 J8

YORK INTERNATIONAL
GREEN RED RED GREEN
3 3
MICRO
VSD LOGIC BOARD
BOARD SERIAL DATA SERIAL DATA
1 1

J3
COND PRSS.
DATA
2 J9
MICRO
CLK
BOARD 1
3 EVAP PRSS. ADDRESS
MUX DIGITAL HARMONIC
DATA TPD
SIGNAL 2 FILTER
PRV POSITION PROCESSOR LOGIC BOARD
FRAME TPE
3
J4 CR9 RED MICRO
CR8
PRV
POT 2 GREEN SURGE
REFRESH
VALID POINT WATCHDOG /
RESET POWER FAIL
SW1
DETECTOR
MANUAL
SURGE POINT
TPC
UNDER
VOLTAGE

BRAM RAM EPROM

TPA J6
+24VDC
TO ALL +5VDC +24VDC 2
CKTS REG REG POWER
GND 1 SUPPLY

TPB
LD04086

FIG. 44 – ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL (ACC) BOARD

83
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

12
 Proximity Probe
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 13
PROXIMITY PROBE
(REFER TO FIG. 45 - 48)

The following applies to all applications except “P” The difference between the Reference Position and the
compressors and style F and later chillers with “G” actual Position is the PROXIMITY DIFFERENTIAL
or “H5-8” compressors. For chillers equipped with “P” and is displayed as “High Speed Thrust Bearing Prox-
compressors, refer to Section 13A: The Proximity Probe imity Differential = xx mils” on the Compressor Screen.
senses the distance between the tip of the Proximity For example, if the Reference Position is 50 mils and
Probe and the surface of the High Speed Thrust collar. the actual Position is 45 mils, then the Differential is -5
An earlier vintage Probe (025-30961-000) also sensed mils; with the same Reference, if the actual Position is
the High Speed Drain Line oil temperature. However, 55 mils, the Differential is +5 mils.
regardless of which Probe is installed, chillers equipped
with Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.03 or If the Differential increases to > 10 mils (+10, +11, etc.) or
later do not sense the High Speed Drain Line oil tem- decreases to > 25 mils (-25, -26, etc.), a Safety shutdown
perature. is performed and “THRUST BEARING - PROXIMITY
PROBE CLEARANCE” is displayed. The +10 thresh-
The output of the Proximity circuit is connected to the old only has to be exceeded for an instant to initiate a
Microboard at J8-15 and is a 0 (0.089VDC) to +4.4VDC shutdown; the -25 threshold must be exceeded for 2
analog voltage corresponding to a measured distance of continuous seconds to initiate a shutdown.
10 to 99 mils. This is the PROXIMITY POSITION and
is displayed as “High Speed Thrust Bearing Proximity If the Reference Position is between 37 and 46 mils, the
Position = xx mils” on the Proximity Probe Calibration full -25 mil differential is not allowed; the maximum
Screen. The output of the 025-30961-000 Probe Temper- allowed distance between the tip of the Probe and the
ature circuit is connected to the Microboard at J8-1 and is surface of the Thrust Collar is 23 mils. Therefore, when
a 0 to +4.5VDC analog voltage corresponding to a mea- the distance decreases to < 22 mils, the Safety shutdown
sured temperature of 0ºF (-177ºC) to 300ºF (148.9ºC). is performed, regardless of the Differential to the Refer-
This is the OIL DRAIN LINE TEMPERATURE and ence Position.
is displayed as “High Speed Thrust Bearing Oil Drain If the distance decreases to < -17 mils, a safety shutdown
Temperature = xxxºF on the Compressor Screen (not is performed and “THRUST BEARING - PROXIMITY
applicable to Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.03 PROBE OUT OF RANGE” is displayed.
or later).

When the Probe is installed at the time of chiller man- On chillers equipped with Probe 025-30961-000
ufacture, a reference position is established. It is the and Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.02 and
distance between the tip of the Probe and the surface earlier, if the Drain Line Temperature increases to
of the High Speed Thrust Collar with a minimum of >250.0ºF (121.1ºC), a Safety shutdown is performed
25 PSID oil pressure. Any distance between 37 and 79 and “THRUST BEARING - HIGH OIL TEMPERA-
mils is acceptable. It is established using a calibration TURE” is displayed. If the Temperature signal output
procedure in the “System Calibration” section of this of the Probe decreases to 0VDC, it is indicative of an
book. This value is entered at the Keypad as the REF- open circuit or a broken wire to the Probe and a Safety
ERENCE POSITION Setpoint using the Proximity shutdown is initiated and “THRUST BEARING - OIL
Probe Calibration Screen. Distances outside the range TEMPERATURE SENSOR” is displayed.
of 37 to 79 mils will be rejected. The value is logged
on a label adhered to the inside of the OptiView Control When any of the above Thrust Bearing related Safety
Center door. This value remains the Reference Position shutdowns occur, the chiller cannot be restarted until a
until the compressor is rebuilt, whereupon the calibration special reset procedure is performed by a Service tech-
procedure must be repeated to establish a new Reference nician. Some of these shutdowns also require a thrust
Position. Since this Reference Position value is stored bearing inspection. The reset procedure and bearing
in the BRAM (U52) memory device on the Microboard, inspection criteria is listed in the “System Calibration,
field replacement of either of these items requires the Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this
Reference Position Setpoint to be programmed again. book.

84 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The Proximity Position output of the Probe is measured to provide proper operation for the actual probe installed.
at the Microboard at J8-15 and is calculated as follows: Refer to Table 1 Micro, Microboard Program Jumpers. 13
V = D - 8.14 IMPORTANT! Flash Memory Card version
20.86 C.MLM.01.03 or later (i.e. C.MLM.01.04, C.MLM.01.05,
D = 20.86 X V + 8.14 etc.) must be used with Probe 025-35900-000 or 025-
xxxx-000. If the Flash Memory card does not meet this
Where: V = VDC requirement, a new Flash Memory Card (031-01797-
D = distance in Mils 001) must be ordered at the same time as the Probe. If an
appropriate Flash Memory Card is not used, the chiller
The High Speed Drain Temperature output of Probe
will be prevented from starting due to safety shutdown
025-30961-000 is measured at the Microboard at J8-1
“Thrust Bearing – Oil Temperature Sensor” (complete
and is calculated as follows:
explanation of this message in Op er a tion Manual
V = T - 18.75 160.54-O1). This is due to the older Flash Memory
62.5 Card expecting to receive a High Speed Drain Line
Oil Temperature value from the Probe and replacement
T = 62.5 X V + 18.75 Probes do not sense this temperature.
Where: V = VDC
T = Temp in Deg F The Probe cannot accurately measure the gap distance
if its supply voltage, +12VDC or +24VDC, decreases
The chiller could be equipped with one of several different to <+9.5VDC or <19.0VDC respectively. To prevent an
Probes. The Probe differences vary with the vintage. The invalid Proximity gap Safety shutdown due to a Utility
differences involve primarily the power supply require- Power sag, the Microboard monitors the Probe’s +12VDC
ments and whether or not the Probe senses the High Speed or 24VDC power source at J9-12 on the Microboard. If
Drain Line Oil Temperature as detailed in the table below. it decreases to <9.5VDC or <19.0VDC respectively, a
To determine which Probe is present, examine the part Cycling shutdown is performed and “Proximity Probe
number printed on the Probe body. For service replacement, - Low Supply Voltage” is displayed. The chiller will
order the same Probe part number as presently installed automatically restart when the voltage increases above
or refer to Renewal Parts Manual 160.54-RP1. An appro- +9.5VDC for +12VDC applications and +19.7VDC for
priate replacement will be provided. Microboard Program +24VDC applications.
Jumpers JP41 and JP42 must be positioned appropriately

Part Number Supply Voltage Description

025-30961-000 +24VDC, +5VDC Production until April 2000. Senses Proximity. Also senses
High Speed Drain Line Oil Temperature unless equipped
with Flash memory card version C.MLM.01.03 or later.

025-35900-000 +24VDC, +5VDC Production after April 2000. Senses Proximity only. Does not
sense High Speed Drain Line Temperature.

025-xxxxx-000 +12/24VDC, +5VDC Future. Senses Proximity only. Does not sense High Speed
Drain Line Temperature.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 85
 Proximity Probe
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

J8 PROXIMITY / TEMP PROBE

+5VDC (DRAIN LINE TEMP)
12
GND
2
DRAIN TEMP
1
PROXIMITY
15
+24VDC

MICRO
BOARD
J9
+24VDC
12
NOTE 1

J31 P31
1 1 JX
2 2 NOTE 2
J1 2
GND
2
+5VDC +24VDC
1

POWER
SUPPLY

LD04090
NOTES:
1. +24VDC Reference for “Proximity Probe - Low Supply Voltage” Cycling Shutdown.
2. CM-2 Board, Solid State Starter Logic Board or Adaptive Capacity Control Board as determined by the Starter Application.

FIG. 45 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE PART NUMBER 025-30961-000

J8
+5VDC
12
PROXIMITY
GND PROBE
2

MICRO +12VDC (PROXIMITY)

4
BOARD 15
PROXIMITY

J9
12 +12VDC REFERENCE FOR "PROXIMITY PROBE - LOW SUPPLY
VOLTAGE" CYCLING SHUTDOWN

J1
7

3 +12VDC

GND POWER
2
SUPPLY
1 +5VDC

LD05531

FIG. 46 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE

PART NUMBER 025-XXXXX-000 (FUTURE)

86 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

J8
12
+5VDC
PROXIMITY PROBE
13
GND
2

PROXIMITY
15
+24VDC

MICRO
BOARD
J9
+24VDC
12
NOTE 1

J31 P31
1 1 JX
2 2 NOTE 2
J1 2
GND
2
+5VDC +24VDC
1

POWER
SUPPLY

LD05532
NOTES:
1. +24VDC Reference for “Proximity Probe - Low Supply Voltage” Cycling Shutdown.
2. CM-2 Board, Solid State Starter Logic Board or Adaptive Capacity Control Board as determined by the Starter Application.

FIG. 47 – PROXIMITY PROBE - INTERFACE PROBE PART NUMBER 025-35900-000

YORK INTERNATIONAL 87
 Proximity Probe
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2.0"

+ 24VDC PROBE
LD06510

YORK PART NUMBER 025-30961-000

2.0"

+ 24VDC PROBE LD05529a

YORK PART NUMBER 025-35900-000

2.75"

UNIVERSAL +12 / +24VDC PROBE LD05530

YORK PART NUMBER 025-xxxxx-000 (FUTURE)

FIG. 48 – PROXIMITY PROBE

88 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 13A
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH
(REFER TO FIG. 49 - 50)

Chillers that are equipped with “P” compressors and connects to I/O Board TB3-81. The Microboard reads
style F and later chillers with “G” or “H5-8” compressors the state of these contacts through the I/O Board and
have a High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch (025- when they open, a safety shutdown is performed and
34535-000) instead of the Proximity Probe described in “THRUST BEARING – LIMIT SWITCH OPEN” is
Section 13. This device detects abnormal bearing posi- displayed on the System Details line of the Display. On
tion through probe contact instead of distance measure- the COMPRESSOR Screen, a red LED illuminates when
ment as performed with the Proximity Probe. the switch is closed; extinguishes when it is open.

The High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch is an After the High Speed Thrust Bear-
assembly consisting of a pressure switch attached to a ing safety shutdown has occurred,
probe that protrudes into the compressor housing. When the chiller cannot be restarted until a
the bearing position decreases to < the allowed position, Thrust Bearing inspection, followed by
it comes into contact with the probe, causing the break- a special reset procedure which has
away probe to detach, exposing the pressure switch to
been performed by a qualified Service
the pressure inside the compressor. A set of normally
closed contacts inside the switch open when the switch
Technician. The reset procedure and
is exposed to a pressure of > 15 to 25 PSIG. One side of Bearing inspection criteria is listed
these contacts is connected to 115VAC. The other side in the “System Calibration and Reset
Procedures section of this book.

CONTROL CENTER COMPRESSOR

TB3
81 1
2
I/O
BOARD

LD06866
115VAC

TB6 1

FIG. 49 – HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH - INTERFACE

YORK INTERNATIONAL 89
 High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

PRESSURE
SWITCH

GRD PIN
(GRN/YEL)

PINS 1 & 2
(BLK)
BREAK-AWAY
PROBE
GRN/YEL

LD06860

FIG. 50– HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH

90 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 14
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL
(REFER TO FIG. 51 & 52)
The chiller can be provided with an optional Condenser condenser is the Refrigerant Level Setpoint and is
Refrigerant Level Control. A Variable Orifice, located displayed as “Refrigerant Level Setpoint = xxx%” on 14
in the refrigerant liquid line between the Evaporator and the Condenser Screen and the Refrigerant level Control
Condenser, is used to control the refrigerant level in the Screen.
Condenser. It is modulated by an Actuator that is driven
by open and close output signals from Triacs on the I/O This Setpoint is programmed by a Service Technician at
Board. These control signals originate at the Microboard. chiller commissioning using the Refrigerant Level Con-
Automatic or Manual level control is allowed. If Auto- trol Screen. It is programmable over the range of 20% to
matic control is selected, the Program modulates the 80%.
Variable Orifice to maintain the Condenser refrigerant
to a programmable Setpoint level. If Manual control is AUTOMATIC OPERATION
selected, the Variable Orifice can be manually controlled
with the Keypad keys. This Manual control can also be While the chiller is shut down, an Open signal is applied to
used to place the Orifice in a fixed position. the Actuator, driving the Orifice to the fully open position.
This causes the Condenser refrigerant level to be approxi-
Since the Level Control feature is optional, the Pro- mately 0%. Elevated Evaporator pressure with respect to
gram operation described here must be ENABLED on Condenser pressure could cause the level to be higher.
those chillers so equipped and DISABLED on all other
chillers. This procedure, along with the programming of When a chiller start is initiated, there are two different
Setpoints described below, is performed on the Refrig- courses of action taken, depending on the Flash Memory
erant Level Control/Tuning Screen using instructions Card version as follows:
in the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset If equipped with Flash Memory Card version
Procedures Programming Procedures” section of this C.MLM.01.06.xxx and earlier or “P” compressors
book. with C.MLM.04.02.xxx and earlier: After the chiller
is started, when the Vane Motor Switch (VMS) opens
A Liquid Level Sensor (LLS) detects the Refrigerant after entering SYSTEM RUN, if the actual level is
Level in the condenser and outputs an analog voltage greater than the Level Setpoint, the Microboard begins
to the Microboard that represents this level. The level controlling the level to the Level Setpoint. However, if
is expressed as a percentage and is displayed on the the actual level is less than the Level Setpoint, a linearly
Condenser Screen and the Refrigerant Level Control increasing ramp is applied to the Level Setpoint. This
Screen as the “Refrigerant Level Position = xxx%”. The ramp causes the Setpoint to increase from the initial
Level Sensor is calibrated so that the refrigerant level is refrigerant level to the programmed Level Setpoint over
displayed as 0% when the level is at minimum; 100% a period of 15 minutes. While this ramp is in effect, the
when the level is at maximum. Levels between these ramp value is displayed as “REFRIGERANT LEVEL
extremes are linearly scaled. The level is at minimum TARGET = XX%” and replaces the Level Setpoint mes-
when the when the chiller is shutdown with the orifice sage on the Condenser Screen. While the ramp is in
in the fully open position. The level is at maximum effect, “RAMP UP TIME REMAINING = XX MIN” is
when the level is above the site glass, with the sensor displayed. After the 15 minute ramp period has elapsed,
fully covered. The Level Sensor analog output voltage the refrigerant level is controlled to the programmed
is rescaled by the Microboard. This rescaled voltage is Level Setpoint.
viewable as input 23 on the ANALOG I/O Diagnostic
Screen and is the voltage value that is used for the cali- If equipped with Flash Memory Card version
bration of the Level Sensor. The level will be displayed C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later: Upon entering chiller
as 0% when input 23 on the ANALOG I/O Diagnostic Prelube, the Refrigerant Level close output is ener-
Screen is 0.37VDC and 100% when it is 4.31VDC. The gized for the length of the programmable Valve Preset
Level Sensor is calibrated to output values that would Time Setpoint (0 to 100 seconds; default 50). After
produce these levels on the ANALOG I/O Diagnostic pre-positioning, the valve is held in this position until
Screen. the first 3 minutes of Chiller Run Time has elapsed
The desired refrigerant level to be maintained in the (Setting the Valve Preset Time to 0 seconds disables
YORK INTERNATIONAL 91
 Refrigerant Level Control
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

this pre-positioning feature). After the chiller has been The Program applies an open or close signal, as required,
running 3 minutes, if the level is greater than or equal from the Microboard to the actuator to maintain the level
to the Refrigerant Level Setpoint, it begins controlling to the Level Setpoint. The duration of the signal deter-
to the Setpoint. However, if it is less than the Refrig- mines the magnitude of change to the Orifice position.
erant Level Setpoint, a linearly increasing ramp limit, The duration of the signal and whether it is an open or
called the Refrigerant Level Target, is applied to the close signal depends upon the Proportion Error and the
Refrigerant Level Setpoint. This ramp limit allows Rate of Change of the actual level compared to the Level
the level to go from the present level to the Refrigrant Setpoint in a recurring period of time called a Level Con-
Level Setpoint over a period of time programmed as trol Period. At the end of each Level Control Period, the
the Ramp-Up Time setpoint (3 to 15 minutes; default Proportion error and Rate of Change are compared to
8). During this ramp-up period, the Refrigerant Level Programmable Setpoints Proportion Limit Close, Pro-
Target is used to control the refrigerant level in the portion Limit Open and Rate Limit Close and Rate
condenser and the Refrigerant Level Setpoint message Limit Open. The result of this comparison determines
on the Condenser Screen is replaced by “REFRIGER- the signal that will be applied to the Actuator at the end
ANT LEVEL TARGET = XX%”. While the ramp is in of the Level Control Period as follows:
effect, “RAMP UP TIME REMAINING = XX MIN”
is displayed. After the ramp period has elapsed, the The entire chiller run time is divided into Level Control
refrigerant level is controlled by the Refrigerant Level Periods. They occur consecutively and continuously. The
Setpoint for the remainder of chiller run. If the Valve first one begins upon entering SYSTEM RUN and when
Preset Time is set to 0 seconds and the Ramp-Up Time it ends the next one begins, etc. This repeats until the
Setpoint is set to 15 minutes, the control will operate chiller is shutdown. The duration of these periods are
the same as previous Flash Memory Card versions, as programmed as the Level Control Period Setpoint This
described above. period has different ranges, depending on Flash Memory
Card version as follows: 3.5 to 30.0 seconds (version
If equipped with Flash Memory Card C.MLM.01.05C.xxx C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx);
and earlier or “P” compressors with C.MLM.04.01B 1.0 to 5.0 seconds (all earlier versions). The Default
and earlier, a ramp function as described above, is also value varies depending upon the Flash Memory Card
executed anytime the Vane Motor Switch (VMS) transi- version and compressor application as follows: versions
tions from closed to open while the chiller is running. C.MLM.01.06.xxx and earlier (3.5 seconds); version
When the VMS opens, if the refrigerant level is less C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later (10.0 seconds “P” com-
than the Level Setpoint, a setpoint ramp is initiated as pressors; 3.5 seconds all other compressors). At the
previously described. If the refrigerant level is greater completion of each Level Control Period, the actual level is
than the Level Setpoint when the VMS opens, the level compared to the Level Setpoint. The result is the Proportion
is controlled to the Level Setpoint. Since this feature Error (+ 3% is considered zero). The Proportion Error is
can produce unstable operation under certain conditions, compared to Setpoints Proportion Limit Open (if level
it has been eliminated in Flash Memory Card version is above setpoint) and Proportion Limit Close (if level
C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx. is below setpoint). Both of these Setpoints are program-
mable over the range of 10% to 50%. If the Proportion
If the Liquid Level Sensor output ever increases to Error exceeds the Limit Setpoint, the Proportion Error
greater than 4.4VDC, indicating a level greater than influence in the response will be large. If the Proportion
100%, “WARNING - REFRIGERANT LEVEL OUT Error is less than the Limit Setpoint, the Proportion error
OF RANGE” is displayed and the Orifice Actuator influence in the response is determined by how close the
is driven open until the level has decreased to a level Proportion Error is to the Limit Setpoint; close yields
within range. When within range, the warning message larger influence, further yields smaller influence. To
is automatically cleared and normal control is resumed. establish the response to the rate of change, the amount
This feature can cause unstable operation under light of change in the Level within the Level Control Period
load conditions. Therefore, both the warning message (+1% is considered zero) is compared to the Rate Limit
and the associated open signal have been eliminated in Close (if level less than setpoint) and Rate Limit Open
Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later (if level greater than setpoint) Setpoints. Both are pro-
or C.MLM.04.02.xxx. grammable over the range of 10% to 50%. (5% to 50%
with Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx
and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx). If the result exceeds the
Setpoint, the rate influence in the response will be large; if

92 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

less than the Setpoint, the rate influence is determined by MANUAL OPERATION
how close the result is to the Setpoint; close yields larger
influence, further yields smaller influence. The Orifice Actuator can be manually controlled from the
Keypad using the Refrigerant Level Control Screen after
Therefore, per the above, the values programmed for Pro- logging in at SERVICE access level. Open, Close, Hold
portion Limit Open/Close and Rate Limit Open/Close de- and Auto keys are used to control the Variable Orifice. 14
termine the sensitivity of the level control. Smaller values Using the Open, Close and Hold keys, the Variable Ori-
generally yield greater response for the same level change fice can be placed in a fixed position. Pressing the Auto
in the Level control Period. Also, the smaller the value key returns Level Control to Automatic operation.
programmed for the Level Control Period, the more often
ACTUATORS
an output signal is applied to the Variable Orifice Actua-
tor. With Flash memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx New production units use a Belimo actuator that operates
and later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx, the duration of the open from 24VAC. If the OptiView Control Center is retrofit
and close pulse applied to the Valve Actuator is inde- to an existing chiller, the chiller could be equipped with
pendent of the selected Period Setpoint. It is a fixed per- a Barber-Coleman actuator that operates from 115VAC.
centage of 3.5 seconds. Previously, it was a percentage The interface for both actuators is shown in Fig. 52. The
of the Period Setpoint. Therefore, longer Periods would description of the operation of both actuators is in the
produce longer output pulses for the same error, resulting “I/O Board” section of this book.
in unstable operation under certain conditions.

The orifice valve movement is animated on the Refrigerant

Level Control Screen as follows: when 0-20% open, shown
fully closed; 20 - 40% open, shown as 20% open; 40 - 60%
open, shown as 40% open; 60 - 80% open, shown as 80%
open; 80 - 100% open, shown as 100% open.

LD04091

FIG. 51 – REFRIGERANT LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR

YORK INTERNATIONAL 93
 94
LIQUID LEVEL SENSOR
J8
LEVEL OUTPUT 3
13
GND 2
3
+12VDC 1
14

115VAC

MICRO
BOARD
Refrigerant Level Control

BELIMO ACTUATOR
J19 J1 TB1
CLOSE 3
28 28 163 CLO
S E
OPEN
29 29 1
I/O
BOARD N
161 2 OPE

1 2
162
IT ORIFICE VALVE
ACTUATOR
(REFER TO FIG. 16)
24
VAC 5
BARBER-COLEMAN
ACTUATOR
115VAC

FIELD
L1 L2
J1 TB1
CLOSE CLOSE
2 X
28 163
OPEN 3 OPE
N
29 I/O 161
BOARD 162
ORIFICE VALVE
ACTUATOR

(REFER TO FIG. 16) LD04092

FIG. 52 – REFRIGERANT LIQUID LEVEL CONTROL - INTERFACE

FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 15
OIL PUMP VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
(REFER TO FIG. 53 - 55)

On style D and later chillers, the oil pump is driven When the chiller is started, 13 seconds after the System
by a Variable Speed Drive (VSD) (Refer to Service Prelube is initiated, the Microboard (J20-3) starts the oil
Manual 160.52-M2 for details of this device). In normal pump by driving the EN (enable) input of the Oil Pump
operation, the oil pump speed is automatically controlled VSD to a Logic Low level (<1VDC). The Microboard
to maintain a desired oil pressure. The speed can be (J20-1) then applies a speed command signal to the
manually controlled with the Keypad keys using the Oil PWM input of the VSD that ramps the VSD output fre-
Sump Screen with Service access level. quency from 25 Hz (45 Hz on all “P” compressors. 45 Hz 15
on other compressor applications equipped with Flash
On those chillers equipped with the oil pump VSD, the Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later) to
VSD operation as described below must be ENABLED whatever frequency is required (up to a maximum of 60
by placing Microboard Program Switch SW1-2 in the Hz) to achieve the Target Oil Pressure. (If equipped
ON position. Those chillers not equipped with the oil with Flash Memory card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx
pump VSD must have this operation DISABLED by (and later), it is held at 45Hz for 8 seconds before re-
placing SW1-2 in the OFF position. Refer to Table 2, leasing to normal control). The Target Oil Pressure is
“Microboard Program Switches”. fixed at 45 PSID. The speed command is displayed on
the Oil Sump Screen as OIL PUMP DRIVE COM-
The programming of the Setpoints referred to below is MAND FREQUENCY = XX HZ. The speed command
performed on the Oil Sump Screen using instructions to the VSD is modulated as required to maintain the 45
in the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset PSID Target Oil Pressure for the remainder of System
Procedures” section of this book. These Setpoints should Prelube and the first 15 seconds of System Run. While
not be programmed by anyone other than a qualified Ser- this target is in effect, it is displayed on the Oil Sump
vice Technician. Variable speed oil pump chillers are not Screen as TARGET OIL PRESSURE = 45 PSID. The
equipped with the Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (2SOL), time remaining that the Target Oil Pressure is in effect is
or High Speed Thrust Solenoid Valve (4SOL). There- displayed as a countdown timer in the message PULL-
fore, when Oil Pump VSD operation is ENABLED with DOWN TIME REMAINING = XX SEC. After the
Program Switch SW1-2, the Program is configured to compressor has been running for 15 seconds, the speed
operate the chiller without these solenoid valves. Op- of the VSD is controlled to maintain the programmed Oil
eration Sequence Timing Diagrams in Fig. 4 and 5 depict Pressure Setpoint (20 to 45 PSID). This is displayed on
chiller operation with the Oil Pump VSD enabled or the Oil Sump Screen as SETPOINT OIL PRESSURE
disabled. Also, when equipped with the oil pump VSD, = XX PSID.
the Microboard, under Program control, controls the Oil
Heater to maintain a specific oil temperature as described During Oil Pump operation, the following minimum and
in the “Oil Heater” section below. maximum oil pressures are allowed:
1. During Automatic operation, if either of the fol-
AUTOMATIC OPERATION lowing conditions occur, a Safety shutdown is per-
formed and OIL - VARIABLE SPEED PUMP
Under Program control, a speed command signal from - PRESSURE SETPOINT NOT ACHIEVED
the Microboard controls the oil pump speed by varying is displayed. These conditions are not checked in
the VSD output frequency. The speed command is in MANUAL operation.
the form of a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Signal a. If the Oil Pressure is <35 PSID (25 PSID on
as explained below. During the System Prelube period “P” compressors) for 5 continuous seconds
and the first 15 seconds of System Run, the Program during the last 10 seconds of System Prelube
operates the oil pump VSD over the range of 25 Hz to 60 or during the first 15 seconds of System Run.
Hz to maintain the oil pressure to the target value of 45
b. If the Oil Pressure is < the programmed Oil
PSID. For the remainder of System Run and the Coast-
Pressure Setpoint and the speed command is
down period, it operates it over the same frequency
at 60 Hz for 5 continuous seconds, any
range to maintain the pressure to the programmed Oil
time after the first 30 seconds of SYSTEM
Pressure Setpoint.
RUN.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 95
 Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2. During Automatic operation, if the Oil Pressure To provide an operational status to the Microboard (via
decreases to < 15 PSID, a Safety shutdown is per- I/O Board TB3-70), the VSD contains a set of normally
formed and OIL - LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRES- open (N.O.) relay contacts that are driven closed as long
SURE is displayed. If it increases to >90 PSID, a as all the internal protection circuits are satisfied. They
Safety shutdown is performed and OIL - HIGH open anytime these circuits will not permit the VSD to
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE is displayed. operate. The opening of these contacts initiate a chiller
cycling shutdown, displaying OIL - VARI ABLE
The Microboard controls the VSD output frequency by SPEED PUMP - DRIVE CONTACTS OPEN. After
applying a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) speed the problem has cleared, the contacts automatically
command signal to the VSD. The signal is applied close, except if the VSD experiences a short circuit on
every 0.7 seconds. Within the 0.7 second period, the the output; this requires the VSD to be manually reset by
duration of time the signal is at logic low (<1VDC) and the removal and restoration of the VSD AC Power.
logic high (+12VDC) level determines the VSD output
frequency between 25 and 60 Hz. If it remains at a logic MANUAL OPERATION
high for the entire 0.7 second period, it is commanding
the VSD output frequency to be 25 Hz. If it is low for The oil pump can be manually operated using the Oil
the entire 0.7 second period, it is commanding the VSD Sump Screen when logged in with SERVICE AC-
output frequency to be 60 Hz. Frequencies between these CESS level. While the chiller is running, the speed can
extremes are achieved by driving the signal low for a be manually adjusted over the range of 25 to 60 Hz.
proportionate amount of time within the 0.7 second When the chiller is not running, manual on/off control,
period. For example, if the signal is low for 50% (0.35 as well as manual speed control is permitted. After the
seconds) of the 0.7 second period, it would be command- pump is manually turned on, it will automatically turn
ing the VSD to operate at a frequency that is halfway off after 10 minutes of operation, if not manually ter-
between 25 and 60 Hz, or 42.5 Hz. The resolution, or minated earlier.
smallest increment of change is 0.01 seconds. This al-
lows the output frequency to be changed in 0.5 Hz steps. The RAISE and LOWER keys are used to increase
The VSD output frequency for any PWM input can be and decrease the VSD output frequency in 0.5 Hz
calculated as follows: increments. Each time the RAISE key is pressed, the
frequency is increased 0.5 Hz. Each time the LOWER
Frequency in Hz = (On-Time in seconds / 0.02) + 25 key is pressed, the frequency is decreased 0.5 Hz. Re-
peated presses of these keys are required to increase or
The entire oil pump run time is divided into Oil Pressure decrease the frequency by greater amounts.
Control Periods. They run consecutively and continu-
ously; when the first one ends, the next one begins, etc. If the AUTO key is pressed, Automatic operation, as
This repeats until the oil pump is shutdown. The dura- described above, is resumed.
tion of the periods is determined by the Control Period
Setpoint. This Setpoint is programmed in multiples of If the SET key is pressed, the VSD is driven to a specific
0.3 seconds over the range of 0.3 to 2.7 seconds. At the predetermined frequency. This permits service analysis
end of each period, the actual oil pressure is compared of the oil pressure at various oil pump speeds. This fre-
to the Oil Pressure Setpoint and the speed command is quency is programmed using instructions in the “System
changed as required to invoke VSD frequency changes to Calibration, Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures”
increase or decrease the oil pressure. If the error between section of this book.
the Oil Pressure Setpoint and the actual oil pressure is <
+6 PSID, the frequency is increased or decreased 0.5 Hz During Manual operation, the Oil Sump Screen can be
to increase or decrease the oil pressure. However, if the used to monitor the actual oil pressure and the speed
error is > + 6 PSID, the value programmed for Control command.
Period Setpoint determines the relative magnitude of
correction applied to the VSD output frequency. The
larger the programmed value, the greater the amount of
correction above 0.5 Hz is applied.

96 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

OIL HEATER OPERATION When the oil pump is not operating, the heater is turned
on and off to maintain a target value of 50ºF above the
On chillers equipped with the oil pump VSD, the oil Condenser Saturation Temperature. If the calculated tar-
heater is controlled by the Microboard via I/O Board get value is > 160ºF, the target value defaults to 160ºF.
The connection to the I/O Board is determined by the If the calculated target value is < 110ºF, it defaults to
chiller style and compressor type as follows: 110ºF. When the temperature decreases to 4ºF below
the target value, the heater is turned on; it is turned off
• TB1-34 - Style D and E chillers with “G”, “H” or at 3ºF above the target.
“J” compressors
To prevent overheating the oil in the event of an
• TB1-64 - Style E chillers with “P” compressors and
OptiView Control Center failure, thermostat 1HTR
all Style F and later chillers.
opens at 180ºF.
15

OIL PUMP VSD

28782A

FIG. 53 – OIL PUMP VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE (VSD)

YORK INTERNATIONAL 97
 Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

I/O
BOARD

TB1
1HTR
34 IM
J1 35 OIL
HEATER
OIL HEATER
ON/OFF

J19 35
J20
1 SPEED COMMAND PWM
+12VDC
OIL
2 +V PUMP
MICRO
START / STOP EN VSD
BOARD 3

LD04093

FIG. 54 – OIL PUMP VSD / OIL HEATER CONTROL – INTERFACE

0.7 SEC

+12VDC
0VDC OFF
25.0 Hz
ON

+12VDC
0VDC OFF
0.17 SEC 33.5 Hz
ON

OFF
ON 0.35 SEC 42.5 Hz

OFF
0.52 SEC 51.0 Hz
ON

OFF 60.0 Hz
ON

+12VDC "OFF TIME"

0VDC "ON TIME"
LD04094

FIG. 55 – OIL PUMP VSD SPEED CONTROL SIGNAL

98 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 16
MICROGATEWAY
(REFER TO FIG. 56)

The complete description of the MicroGateway installation Current Limit Setpoint resets, the Control Source must
and operation is contained in YORK form 450.20-NOM1. be set to ISN on the OPERATIONS Screen. Otherwise,
communications will take place in any Control Source
The MicroGateway is an optional printed circuit board mode.
that provides an interface between the OptiView Control
Center and YORK ISN (Integrated Systems Network) or In operation, the Microboard provides chiller pressures,
other selected networks. It can be mounted on the upper temperatures and status to the MicroGateway in response
corner of the left wall of the OptiView Control Center to requests from the MicroGateway. Microboard status
or in its own enclosure in a remote location. LEDs illuminate when the Microboard transmits and
receives data on COM 4B. Green LED CR13 (RX4) 16
If installed in the OptiView Con trol Center, the illuminates when data is being received from the Micro-
MicroGateway is powered by +12VDC from the Gateway. Red LED CR12 (TX4) illuminates when data
Microboard. is being transmitted to the MicroGateway. Similar LEDs
on the MicroGateway annunciate data transfer to/from
The MicroGateway communicates with the Microboard the Microboard (refer to 450.20-NOM1).
COM 4B communications port via an RS-232 interface.
As shown in Figure 11, Microboard Program Jumper JP If there is a communications problem between the
27 must be placed on pins 2 and 3 to allow data to be Microboard and MicroGateway, use the LEDs described
received from the MicroGateway. above to analyze the problem. The COM 4B LoopBack
test can be used to verify operation of the Microboard
If the remote device that is connected to the MicroGate- COM 4B communications port. Refer to Diagnostics
way is going to provide remote Start/Stop signals, re- and Troubleshooting section of this book.
mote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and/or remote

MICROGATEWAY
J2 TB4
G TX TX
7 RX2
G RX RX
6 TX2
9 TB1
+
J21 J1 2 TO ISN
+ 12VDC RS-485 -
1 1 3 LAN
GND
2 2 4

LD06511

MICROBOARD

FIG. 56 – MICROGATEWAY INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM

YORK INTERNATIONAL 99
 Pressure Transducers
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 17
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
(REFER TO FIG. 57)

System pressures are sensed by Pressure Transducers. are compared to determine the offset between them.
The Evaporator, Condenser, Pump Oil (high side) and During this period, since both of the transducers are
Sump Oil (low side) pressures are sensed. There are sensing the same pressure, their outputs should indicate
different transducers used to sense the various system the same pressure. However, due to accuracy tolerances
pressures. The actual transducer used is determined by in transducer design, differences can exist. Therefore,
the required pressure range and refrigerant application. to compensate for differences between transducers and
The operation of the various transducers is identical. assure differential pressure accuracy, this offset is fac-
The difference between them is simply the pressure tored with the actual differential pressure to produce the
range over which they operate. Each of the different displayed PSID value. When the oil Pump is turned on
transducers has a different YORK part number. Fig. 55 following the Auto-zeroing period, the displayed dif-
lists the transducers and the application of each one. ferential value then becomes the actual differential plus
or minus the offset that existed during the Auto-Zeroing
The transducers output a 0.5 to 4.5VDC voltage that is period. For example, if the Pump transducer indicates
analogous to the pressure applied to the device. These 1.0 PSIG greater than the Sump transducer during the
outputs are applied to the Microboard, where this volt- Auto-Zeroing period, then 1.0 PSIG will subtracted from
age is interpreted as a pressure value in terms of PSIG the displayed PSID value while the pump is running.
(pounds per square inch gauge) in English mode or Similarly, if the Pump transducer indicates 1.0 PSIG
KpaG (Kilo Pascals) in Metric mode. The Program con- less than the sump transducer during this period, then
verts the transducer output voltage to a pressure value 1.0 PSIG would be subtracted from the displayed PSID
with the appropriate formula in Fig. 57. The pressures value while the pump is running. The Auto-zeroing will
are displayed and used for Chiller control and Safety not be performed if either transducer is out of range.
shutdowns.
The transducers operate from a +5VDC power source.
The Evaporator and Condenser pressures are converted This supply voltage is provided from the Power supply
to Saturation Temperatures per the appropriate refrig- via the Microboard. Each transducer is connected to
erant pressure/temperature conversion table contained the Microboard with three wires. Two wires provide
in the Program. These Saturation Temperatures are the +5VDC supply voltage and Ground (GND) and
displayed and used for Chiller control. the remaining wire connects the transducer output to
the Microboard. The voltage output of each transducer
The outputs of the Sump and Pump oil Pressure transducers can be measured with a Voltmeter at the Microboard.
are displayed individually as PSIG values. However, the Measurement should be made from the transducer out-
System Oil Pressure is displayed as a differential value put to Ground (GND). For example, the output of the
in terms of PSID (pounds per square inch differential in Condenser transducer would be read from Microboard
gauge). This PSID value is arrived at by subtracting the J8-21 (signal) to J8-22 (GND). To convert this output to
Sump Oil Pressure transducer value from the Pump Oil a pressure, refer to the appropriate formula in Fig. 57.
Pressure transducer value. During the System Prelube If the pressure is known, the transducer output can be
period, the outputs of the oil Pressure transducers are predicted with the appropriate formula in Fig. 57.
compared in a process called Auto-Zeroing. The dif-
ferential between the Sump and Pump Oil Pressure If any of the displayed pressures do not appear to be
transducer outputs during a 3 second period beginning correct, refer to the Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
10 seconds after the start of the System Prelube period section of this book.

100 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION

FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT
MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION
+100

FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT

+ 150
+ 88

(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 133 + 75

(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 116

+ 44
25.0 142.5 201.25 260
0.500 2.500 3.500 4.500
50 59.38 87.5 106.25 125
0.500 1.00 2.500 3.500 4.500 PRESSURE (PSIG)
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
PRESSURE (PSIG)
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

OIL PRESSURE (LOW SIDE)

EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER
(R22 WATER APPLICATIONS) (R22 WATER & BRINE APPLICATIONS)
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-102 YORK PART NO. 025-28678-004
025-28678-113

(P x 4) - 162.5 (75 x V) + 162.5 P + 4.375

V= P= V= P = (58.75 x V) - 4.375
75 4 58.75

V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG)

LD05534 LD04099
MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION
FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT

+ 150

MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION

FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT
+ 100
+ 130
17
(MILLIVOLTS)

+ 88

(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 110
+ 75

+ 44
0 150 225 300
25.0 43.7 62.5 81.25 100 0.500 2.500 3.500 4.500
0.500 1.500 2.500 3.500 4.500
PRESSURE (PSIG)
PRESSURE (PSIG) NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

(R22 BRINE APPLICATIONS) YORK PART NO. 025-28678-001
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-103 025-28678-006
025-28678-114
V = P + 37.5 P = (75 x V) - 37.5
V = P - 15.6 P = 18.75 x V + 15.6 75
18.75
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG)
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) LD05535 LD05536

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER APPLICATIONS CHART

MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION

+ 150
FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT

R22
TRANSDUCER
(MILLIVOLTS)

FUNCTION APPLICATION
PART NUMBER*
+ 30
WATER BRINE
025-28678-001 CONDENSER, HIGH OIL X X
6 31.5 74
025-28678-102 EVAPORATOR X
0.500 2.000 4.500
025-28678-113
PRESSURE (PSIG)
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 025-28678-103 EVAPORATOR X
025-28678-114
025-28678-004 LOW OIL X X
EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER
R134a WATER & BRINE APPLICATIONS R134a
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-112 025-28678-006 CONDENSER, HI & LO OIL X X
025-28678-112 EVAPORATOR X X
V = P + 2.5 P = (17 x V) - 2.5
17
*Note: Transducers 025-28678-001, -004, -102 and -103
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) have NPTF threads. Transducers 025-28678-006, -112, -113
LD04102
and -114 have straight threads with O-rings.
FIG. 57 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS

YORK INTERNATIONAL 101

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 18
TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS
(REFER TO FIG. 58 - 63)

System temperatures are sensed by Thermistors. There will flow through the thermistor and thus the voltage drop
are two different thermistor types used to sense the var- across it. The Program reads this voltage at the input to the
ious system temperatures. Each type has its own YORK Microboard and converts it to a temperature value.
part number. Part numbers are listed in YORK Renewal
Parts List 160.54-RP2. The Return and Leaving Chilled Each thermistor is connected to the Microboard with two
Liquid, Return and Leaving Condenser Liquid, Drop Leg wires. One wire supplies the +5VDC voltage and the other
Refrigerant and Evaporator Temperatures are sensed by is the output of the thermistor. This output voltage can be
3K Ohm thermistors. The Oil and Compressor Discharge measured with a Voltmeter. Measurement should be made
temperatures are sensed by 50K Ohm thermistors. from the thermistor output to Ground (Gnd). For example,
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature would be read
The 3K Ohm thermistors are defined by the charac- from Microboard J9-20 (output) to Microboard TP1 (Gnd).
teristic of being 3000 Ohms at 77ºF (25ºC). Similarly, To convert this voltage to a pressure, refer to the appropriate
the 50K Ohm thermistors are 50,000 Ohms at the same volts/temp chart as follows:
temperature. Both thermistor types vary their resistance • Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature – Fig. 58
as the sensed temperature varies. Both are negative tem- • Return Chilled Liquid Temperature – Fig. 59
perature coefficient devices. That is, as the temperature • Leaving and Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
increases, the resistance decreases. As the temperature – Fig. 60
decreases, the resistance increases.
• Oil and Discharge Temperature – Fig. 61
The thermistors are connected to the Microboard. A • Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature – Fig. 62
+5VDC supply voltage is applied to one side of the • Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature – Fig. 63
thermistor. The other side of the thermistor is connected
to Ground through a series resistor on the Microboard, If any of the displayed pressures do not appear to be
thus forming a voltage divider network. The temperature correct, refer to the “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting”
applied to the thermistor determines the resistance value. section of this book.
The resistance value determines the amount of current that

102 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
9.90 -12.28 1.4280 15.13 -9.37 1.5957 20.17 -6.57 1.7634
10.00 -12.22 1.4310 15.22 -9.32 1.5987 20.26 -6.52 1.7664
10.09 -12.17 1.4341 15.32 -9.27 1.6018 20.35 -6.47 1.7695
10.19 -12.12 1.4371 15.41 -9.22 1.6048 20.44 -6.42 1.7725
10.29 -12.06 1.4402 15.50 -9.17 1.6079 20.53 -6.37 1.7756
10.39 -12.01 1.4432 15.60 -9.11 1.6109 20.62 -6.32 1.7786
10.48 -11.96 1.4463 15.69 -9.06 1.6140 20.71 -6.27 1.7817
10.58 -11.90 1.4493 15.78 -9.01 1.6170 20.80 -6.22 1.7847
10.68 -11.85 1.4423 15.87 -8.96 1.6201 20.89 -6.17 1.7878
10.77 -11.80 1.4554 15.97 -8.91 1.6231 20.98 -6.12 1.7908
10.87 -11.74 1.4584 16.06 -8.86 1.6262 21.07 -6.07 1.7939
10.97 -11.68 1.4615 16.15 -8.81 1.6292 21.16 -6.02 1.7969
11.06 -11.63 1.4645 16.24 -8.76 1.6322 21.25 -5.97 1.8000
11.16 -11.58 1.4676 16.34 -8.70 1.6353 21.34 -5.92 1.8030
11.25 -11.53 1.4706 16.43 -8.65 1.6383 21.43 -5.87 1.8060
11.35 -11.47 1.4737 16.52 -8.60 1.6414 21.52 -5.82 1.8091
11.45 -11.42 1.4767 16.61 -8.55 1.6444 21.61 -5.77 1.8121
11.54 -11.37 1.4798 16.70 -8.50 1.6475 21.70 -5.72 1.8152
11.64 -11.31 1.4828 16.80 -8.45 1.6505 21.79 -5.67 1.8182
11.73 -11.26 1.4859 16.89 -8.40 1.6536 21.88 -5.62 1.8213
11.83 -11.21 1.4889 16.98 -8.35 1.6566 21.97 -5.57 1.8243
11.93 -11.15 1.4920 17.07 -8.30 1.6597 22.06 -5.52 1.8274
12.02 -11.10 1.4950 17.16 -8.25 1.6627 22.15 -5.47 1.8304
12.12 -11.05 1.4981 17.26 -8.19 1.6658 22.24 -5.42 1.8335 18
12.21 -11.00 1.5011 17.35 -8.14 1.6688 22.33 -5.37 1.8365
12.31 -10.94 1.5042 17.44 -8.09 1.6719 22.42 -5.32 1.8396
12.40 -10.89 1.5072 17.53 -8.04 1.6749 22.51 -5.27 1.8426
12.50 -10.83 1.5103 17.63 -7.98 1.6780 22.60 -5.22 1.8457
12.59 -10.78 1.5133 17.72 -7.93 1.6810 22.69 -5.17 1.8487
12.69 -10.73 1.5164 17.81 -7.88 1.6841 22.78 -5.12 1.8518
12.78 -10.68 1.5194 17.90 -7.83 1.6871 22.87 -5.07 1.8548
12.88 -10.62 1.5225 17.99 -7.78 1.6902 22.96 -5.02 1.8579
12.97 -10.57 1.5255 18.08 -7.73 1.6932 23.04 -4.98 1.8609
13.07 -10.52 1.5286 18.17 -7.68 1.6963 23.13 -4.93 1.8640
13.16 -10.47 1.5316 18.26 -7.63 1.6993 23.22 -4.88 1.8670
13.26 -10.41 1.5347 18.35 -7.58 1.7024 23.31 -4.83 1.8701
13.35 -10.36 1.5377 18.44 -7.53 1.7054 23.40 -4.78 1.8731
13.45 -10.31 1.5408 18.54 -7.48 1.7085 23.49 -4.73 1.8762
13.54 -10.26 1.5438 18.63 -7.43 1.7115 23.58 -4.68 1.8792
13.64 -10.20 1.5469 18.72 -7.38 1.7146 23.67 -4.63 1.8823
13.73 -10.15 1.5499 18.81 -7.33 1.7176 23.75 -4.58 1.8853
13.83 -10.10 1.5530 18.90 -7.28 1.7207 23.84 -4.53 1.8884
13.92 -10.05 1.5560 18.99 -7.23 1.7237 23.93 -4.48 1.8914
14.01 -10.00 1.5591 19.08 -7.18 1.7268 24.02 -4.43 1.8945
14.11 -9.94 1.5621 19.17 -7.13 1.7298 24.11 -4.38 1.8975
14.20 -9.89 1.5652 19.26 -7.08 1.7329 24.20 -4.33 1.9006
14.29 -9.84 1.5682 19.36 -7.02 1.7359 24.29 -4.28 1.9036
14.39 -9.78 1.5713 19.45 -6.97 1.7390 24.37 -4.24 1.9067
14.48 -9.73 1.5743 19.54 -6.92 1.7420 24.46 -4.19 1.9097
14.57 -9.68 1.5774 19.63 -6.87 1.7451 24.55 -4.14 1.9128
14.67 -9.63 1.5804 19.72 -6.82 1.7481 24.64 -4.09 1.9158
14.76 -9.58 1.5835 19.81 -6.77 1.7512 24.73 -4.04 1.9189
14.85 -9.53 1.5865 19.90 -6.72 1.7542 24.82 -3.99 1.9219
14.95 -9.47 1.5896 19.99 -6.67 1.7573 24.91 -3.94 1.9250
15.04 -9.42 1.5926 20.08 -6.62 1.7603 24.99 -3.89 1.9280

YORK INTERNATIONAL 103

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
25.08 -3.84 1.9311 29.92 -1.16 2.0988 34.73 1.52 2.2665
25.17 -3.79 1.9341 30.01 -1.11 2.1018 34.82 1.57 2.2695
25.26 -3.74 1.9372 30.10 -1.06 2.1049 34.91 1.62 2.2726
25.35 -3.69 1.9402 30.18 -1.01 2.1079 34.99 1.66 2.2756
25.43 -3.65 1.9433 30.27 -0.96 2.1110 35.08 1.71 2.2787
25.52 -3.60 1.9463 30.36 -0.91 2.1140 35.17 1.76 2.2817
25.61 -3.55 1.9494 30.45 -0.86 2.1171 35.26 1.81 2.2848
25.70 -3.50 1.9524 30.53 -0.82 2.1201 35.34 1.86 2.2878
25.79 -3.45 1.9555 30.62 -0.77 2.1232 35.43 1.91 2.2909
25.87 -3.41 1.9585 30.71 -0.72 2.1262 35.52 1.96 2.2939
25.96 -3.36 1.9616 30.79 -0.67 2.1293 35.51 1.95 2.2970
26.05 -3.31 1.9646 30.88 -0.62 2.1323 35.70 2.06 2.3000
26.14 -3.26 1.9677 30.97 -0.57 2.1354 35.78 2.10 2.3031
26.23 -3.21 1.9707 31.06 -0.52 2.1384 35.87 2.15 2.3061
26.31 -3.16 1.9738 31.14 -0.48 2.1415 35.96 2.20 2.3092
26.40 -3.11 1.9768 31.23 -0.43 2.1445 36.05 2.25 2.3122
26.49 -3.06 1.9798 31.32 -0.38 2.1476 36.13 2.29 2.3153
26.58 -3.01 1.9829 31.41 -0.33 2.1506 36.22 2.34 2.3183
26.67 -2.96 1.9859 31.49 -0.28 2.1536 36.31 2.39 2.3214
26.76 -2.91 1.9890 31.58 -0.23 2.1567 36.40 2.44 2.3244
26.84 -2.87 1.9920 31.67 -0.18 2.1597 36.48 2.49 2.3274
26.93 -2.82 1.9951 31.76 -0.13 2.1628 36.57 2.54 2.3305
27.02 -2.77 1.9981 31.84 -0.09 2.1658 36.66 2.59 2.3335
27.11 -2.72 2.0012 31.93 -0.04 2.1689 36.75 2.64 2.3366
27.20 -2.67 2.0042 32.02 0.01 2.1719 36.83 2.68 2.3396
27.28 -2.62 2.0073 32.10 0.06 2.1750 36.92 2.73 2.3427
27.37 -2.57 2.0103 32.19 0.11 2.1780 37.01 2.78 2.3457
27.46 -2.52 2.0134 32.28 0.16 2.1811 37.10 2.83 2.3488
27.55 -2.47 2.0164 32.37 0.21 2.1841 37.18 2.88 2.3518
27.64 -2.42 2.0195 32.45 0.25 2.1872 37.27 2.93 2.3549
27.73 -2.37 2.0225 32.54 0.30 2.1902 37.36 2.98 2.3579
27.81 -2.33 2.0256 32.63 0.35 2.1933 37.45 3.03 2.3610
27.90 -2.28 2.0286 32.72 0.40 2.1963 37.54 3.08 2.3640
27.99 -2.23 2.0317 32.81 0.45 2.1994 37.62 3.12 2.3671
28.08 -2.18 2.0347 32.89 0.49 2.2024 37.71 3.17 2.3701
28.17 -2.13 2.0378 32.98 0.54 2.2055 37.80 3.22 2.3732
28.25 -2.08 2.0408 33.07 0.59 2.2085 37.89 3.27 2.3762
28.34 -2.03 2.0439 33.16 0.64 2.2116 37.98 3.32 2.3793
28.43 -1.98 2.0469 33.24 0.69 2.2146 38.07 3.37 2.3823
28.52 -1.93 2.0500 33.33 0.74 2.2177 38.15 3.42 2.3854
28.61 -1.88 2.0530 33.42 0.79 2.2207 38.24 3.47 2.3884
28.69 -1.84 2.0561 33.51 0.84 2.2238 38.33 3.52 2.3915
28.78 -1.79 2.0591 33.59 0.88 2.2268 38.42 3.57 2.3945
28.87 -1.74 2.0622 33.68 0.93 2.2299 38.51 3.62 2.3976
28.96 -1.69 2.0652 33.77 0.98 2.2329 38.60 3.67 2.4006
29.04 -1.64 2.0683 33.86 1.03 2.2360 38.69 3.72 2.4037
29.13 -1.59 2.0713 33.94 1.08 2.2390 38.77 3.76 2.4067
29.22 -1.54 2.0744 34.03 1.13 2.2421 38.86 3.81 2.4098
29.31 -1.49 2.0774 34.12 1.18 2.2451 38.95 3.86 2.4128
29.39 -1.45 2.0805 34.21 1.23 2.2482 39.04 3.91 2.4159
29.48 -1.40 2.0835 34.29 1.27 2.2512 39.13 3.96 2.4189
29.57 1.35 2.0866 34.38 1.32 2.2543 39.22 4.01 2.4220
29.66 -1.30 2.0896 34.47 1.37 2.2573 39.30 4.06 2.4250
29.75 -1.25 2.0927 34.56 1.42 2.2604 39.39 4.11 2.4281
29.83 -1.21 2.0957 34.64 1.47 2.2634 39.48 4.16 2.4311
104 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
39.57 4.21 2.4342 44.46 6.92 2.6019 49.48 9.71 2.7696
39.66 4.26 2.4372 44.55 6.97 2.6049 49.57 9.76 2.7726
39.74 4.30 2.4403 44.64 7.02 2.6080 49.66 9.81 2.7757
39.83 4.35 2.4433 44.73 7.07 2.6110 49.75 9.86 2.7787
39.92 4.40 2.4464 44.82 7.12 2.6141 49.84 9.91 2.7818
40.01 4.45 2.4494 44.91 7.17 2.6171 49.94 9.97 2.7848
40.10 4.50 2.4525 45.00 7.22 2.6202 50.03 10.02 2.7879
40.19 4.55 2.4555 45.09 7.27 2.6232 50.12 10.07 2.7909
40.27 4.59 2.4586 45.18 7.32 2.6263 50.22 10.12 2.7940
40.36 4.64 2.4616 45.27 7.37 2.6293 50.31 10.17 2.7970
40.45 4.69 2.4647 45.36 7.42 2.6324 50.40 10.22 2.8001
40.54 4.74 2.4677 45.46 7.48 2.6354 50.50 10.28 2.8031
40.63 4.79 2.4708 45.55 7.53 2.6385 50.59 10.33 2.8062
40.71 4.84 2.4738 45.64 7.58 2.6415 50.68 10.38 2.8092
40.80 4.89 2.4769 45.73 7.63 2.6446 50.78 10.43 2.8123
40.89 4.94 2.4799 45.82 7.68 2.6476 50.87 10.48 2.8153
40.98 4.99 2.4830 45.91 7.73 2.6507 50.96 10.53 2.8184
41.07 5.04 2.4860 46.00 7.78 2.6537 51.06 10.59 2.8214
41.16 5.09 2.4891 46.09 7.83 2.6568 51.15 10.64 2.8245
41.24 5.13 2.4921 46.18 7.88 2.6598 51.24 10.69 2.8275
41.33 5.18 2.4952 46.27 7.93 2.6629 51.34 10.75 2.8306
41.42 5.23 2.4982 46.36 7.98 2.6659 51.43 10.80 2.8336
41.51 5.28 2.5012 46.45 8.03 2.6690 51.52 10.85 2.8367
41.60 5.33 2.5043 46.55 8.08 2.6720 51.62 10.90 2.8397 18
41.69 5.38 2.5073 46.64 8.13 2.6751 51.71 10.95 2.8428
41.78 5.43 2.5104 46.73 8.18 2.6781 51.80 11.00 2.8458
41.87 5.48 2.5134 46.82 8.23 2.6811 51.90 11.06 2.8458
41.96 5.53 2.5165 46.91 8.28 2.6842 51.99 11.11 2.8519
42.05 5.58 2.5195 47.00 8.33 2.6872 52.09 11.16 2.8549
42.14 5.63 2.5226 47.09 8.38 2.6903 52.18 11.21 2.8580
42.23 5.68 2.5256 47.18 8.43 2.6933 52.28 11.27 2.8610
42.31 5.73 2.5287 47.27 8.48 2.6964 52.37 11.32 2.8641
42.40 5.78 2.5317 47.36 8.53 2.6994 52.46 11.37 2.8671
42.49 5.83 2.5348 47.45 8.58 2.7025 52.56 11.42 2.8702
42.58 5.88 2.5378 47.55 8.64 2.7055 52.65 11.47 2.8732
42.67 5.93 2.5409 47.64 8.69 2.7086 52.75 11.53 2.8763
42.76 5.98 2.5439 47.73 8.74 2.7116 52.84 11.58 2.8793
42.85 6.03 2.5470 47.82 8.79 2.7147 52.94 11.63 2.8824
42.94 6.08 2.5500 47.91 8.84 2.7177 53.03 11.68 2.8854
43.03 6.13 2.5531 48.00 8.89 2.7208 53.13 11.74 2.8885
43.12 6.18 2.5561 48.09 8.94 2.7238 53.22 11.79 2.8915
43.21 6.23 2.5592 48.18 8.99 2.7269 53.32 11.85 2.8946
43.30 6.28 2.5622 48.27 9.04 2.7299 53.41 11.90 2.8976
43.39 6.33 2.5653 48.37 9.10 2.7330 53.51 11.95 2.9007
43.48 6.38 2.5683 48.46 9.15 2.7360 53.60 12.00 2.9037
43.57 6.43 2.5714 48.55 9.20 2.7391 53.70 12.06 2.9068
43.65 6.47 2.5744 48.64 9.25 2.7421 53.79 12.11 2.9098
43.74 6.52 2.5775 48.74 9.30 2.7452 53.89 12.16 2.9129
43.83 6.57 2.5805 48.83 9.35 2.7482 53.98 12.21 2.9159
43.92 6.62 2.5836 48.92 9.40 2.7513 54.08 12.27 2.9190
44.01 6.67 2.5866 49.01 9.45 2.7543 54.17 12.32 2.9220
44.10 6.72 2.5897 49.11 9.51 2.7574 54.27 12.37 2.9251
44.19 6.77 2.5927 49.20 9.56 2.7604 54.36 12.42 2.9281
44.28 6.82 2.5958 49.29 9.61 2.7635 54.46 12.48 2.9312
44.37 6.87 2.5988 49.38 9.66 2.7665 54.55 12.53 2.9342

YORK INTERNATIONAL 105

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
54.65 12.58 2.9373 60.05 15.58 3.1050 65.75 18.75 3.2727
54.74 12.63 2.9403 60.15 15.64 3.1080 65.85 18.81 3.2757
54.84 12.69 2.9403 60.25 15.70 3.1111 65.96 18.87 3.2788
54.93 12.74 2.9464 60.36 15.76 3.1141 66.06 18.92 3.2818
55.03 12.80 2.9495 60.46 15.81 3.1172 66.17 18.98 3.2849
55.12 12.85 2.9525 60.56 15.87 3.1202 66.28 19.05 3.2879
55.22 12.90 2.9556 60.66 15.92 3.1233 66.39 19.11 3.2910
55.32 12.96 2.9586 60.76 15.98 3.1263 66.49 19.16 3.2940
55.41 13.01 2.9617 60.86 16.03 3.1294 66.60 19.22 3.2971
55.51 13.06 2.9647 60.96 16.09 3.1324 66.71 19.28 3.3001
55.61 13.12 2.9678 61.06 16.15 3.1355 66.82 19.35 3.3032
55.70 13.17 2.9708 61.17 16.21 3.1385 66.93 19.41 3.3062
55.80 13.22 2.9739 61.27 16.26 3.1416 67.03 19.46 3.3093
55.90 13.28 2.9769 61.37 16.32 3.1446 67.14 19.52 3.3123
56.00 13.33 2.9800 61.47 16.37 3.1477 67.25 19.58 3.3154
56.09 13.38 2.9830 61.57 16.43 3.1507 67.36 19.65 3.3184
56.19 13.44 2.9861 61.67 16.48 3.1538 67.47 19.71 3.3215
56.29 13.50 2.9891 61.78 16.55 3.1568 67.58 19.77 3.3245
56.39 13.55 2.9922 61.88 16.60 3.1599 67.68 19.82 3.3276
56.48 13.60 2.9952 61.98 16.66 3.1629 67.79 19.88 3.3306
56.58 13.66 2.9983 62.08 16.71 3.1660 67.90 19.95 3.3337
56.68 13.71 3.0013 62.18 16.77 3.1690 68.01 20.01 3.3367
56.78 13.77 3.0044 62.28 16.82 3.1721 68.12 20.07 3.3398
56.87 13.82 3.0074 62.39 16.88 3.1751 68.23 20.13 3.3428
56.97 13.87 3.0105 62.49 16.94 3.1782 68.34 20.19 3.3459
57.07 13.93 3.0135 62.59 17.00 3.1812 68.45 20.25 3.3489
57.17 13.98 3.0166 62.69 17.05 3.1843 68.56 20.31 3.3520
57.26 14.03 3.0196 62.80 17.11 3.1873 68.67 20.37 3.3550
57.36 14.09 3.0227 62.90 17.17 3.1904 68.78 20.43 3.3581
57.46 14.15 3.0257 63.01 17.23 3.1934 68.90 20.50 3.3611
57.56 14.20 3.0287 63.11 17.28 3.1965 69.01 20.56 3.3642
57.66 14.26 3.0318 63.22 17.35 3.1995 69.12 20.62 3.3672
57.76 14.31 3.0348 63.32 17.40 3.2025 69.23 20.68 3.3703
57.86 14.37 3.0379 63.43 17.46 3.2056 69.34 20.75 3.3733
57.96 14.42 3.0409 63.53 17.52 3.2086 69.45 20.81 3.3763
58.06 14.48 3.0440 63.63 17.57 3.2117 69.56 20.87 3.3794
58.15 14.53 3.0470 63.74 17.63 3.2147 69.67 20.93 3.3824
58.25 14.58 3.0501 63.84 17.69 3.2178 69.78 20.99 3.3855
58.35 14.64 3.0531 63.95 17.75 3.2208 69.89 21.05 3.3885
58.45 14.70 3.0562 64.05 17.81 3.2239 70.01 21.12 3.3916
58.55 14.75 3.0592 64.16 17.87 3.2269 70.12 21.18 3.3946
58.65 14.81 3.0623 64.26 17.92 3.2300 70.24 21.25 3.3977
58.75 14.86 3.0653 64.37 17.98 3.2330 70.35 21.31 3.4007
58.85 14.92 3.0684 64.47 18.04 3.2361 70.46 21.37 3.4038
58.95 14.97 3.0714 64.58 18.10 3.2391 70.58 21.44 3.4068
59.05 15.03 3.0745 64.68 18.16 3.2422 70.69 21.50 3.4099
59.15 15.08 3.0775 64.79 18.22 3.2452 70.80 21.56 3.4129
59.25 15.14 3.0806 64.90 18.28 3.2483 70.92 21.62 3.4160
59.35 15.20 3.0836 65.00 18.33 3.2513 71.03 21.69 3.4190
59.45 15.25 3.0867 65.11 18.40 3.2544 71.15 21.75 3.4221
59.55 15.31 3.0897 65.21 18.45 3.2574 71.26 21.81 3.4251
59.65 15.36 3.0928 65.32 18.51 3.2605 71.37 21.87 3.4282
59.75 15.42 3.0958 65.43 18.57 3.2635 71.49 21.94 3.4312
59.85 15.47 3.0989 65.53 18.63 3.2666 71.60 22.00 3.4343
59.95 15.53 3.1019 65.64 18.69 3.2696 71.72 22.07 3.4373
106 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 58 – LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
71.83 22.13 3.4404 78.42 25.79 3.6081
71.95 22.20 3.4434 78.55 25.86 3.6111
72.06 22.26 3.4465 78.67 25.93 3.6142
72.18 22.32 3.4495 78.80 26.00 3.6172
72.29 22.39 3.4526 78.93 26.07 3.6203
72.41 22.45 3.4556 79.05 26.14 3.6233
72.52 22.51 3.4587 79.18 26.21 3.6264
72.64 22.58 3.4617 79.31 26.29 3.6294
72.75 22.64 3.4648 79.44 26.36 3.6325
72.87 22.71 3.4678 79.57 26.43 3.6355
72.98 22.77 3.4709 79.69 26.50 3.6386
73.10 22.84 3.4739 79.82 26.57 3.6416
73.21 22.90 3.4770 79.95 26.64 3.6447
73.33 22.96 3.4800 80.08 26.71 3.6477
73.44 23.02 3.4831 80.20 26.78 3.6508
73.56 23.09 3.4861 80.33 26.85 3.6538
73.68 23.16 3.4892 80.46 26.92 3.6569
73.80 23.22 3.4922 80.59 27.00 3.6599
73.92 23.29 3.4953 80.72 27.07 3.6630
74.04 23.36 3.4983 80.85 27.14 3.6660
74.16 23.42 3.5014 80.98 27.21 3.6691
74.28 23.49 3.5044 81.11 27.29 3.6721
74.40 23.56 3.0575 81.24 27.36 3.6752
74.52 23.62 3.5105 81.37 27.43 3.6782 18
74.64 23.69 3.5136 81.50 27.50 3.6813
74.75 23.75 3.5166 81.63 27.57 3.6843
74.87 23.82 3.5197 81.76 27.65 3.6874
74.99 23.89 3.5227 81.89 27.72 3.6904
75.11 23.95 3.5258 82.02 27.79 3.6935
75.23 24.02 3.5288 82.15 27.86 3.6965
75.35 24.09 3.5319 82.28 27.94 3.6996
75.47 24.15 3.5349 82.41 28.01 3.7026
75.60 24.22 3.5380
75.72 24.29 3.5410
75.84 24.36 3.5441
75.96 24.42 3.5471
76.08 24.49 3.5501
76.20 24.56 3.5532
76.32 24.62 3.5562
76.44 24.69 3.5593
76.57 24.76 3.5623
76.69 24.83 3.5654
76.81 24.90 3.5684
76.93 24.96 3.5715
77.05 25.03 3.5745
77.18 25.10 3.5776
77.30 25.17 3.5806
77.43 25.24 3.5837
77.55 25.31 3.5867
77.68 25.38 3.5898
77.80 25.45 3.5928
77.93 25.52 3.5959
78.05 25.59 3.5989
78.17 25.65 3.6020
78.30 25.72 3.6050

YORK INTERNATIONAL 107

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 59 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
15.01 -9.44 1.5918 23.03 -4.98 1.8604 30.78 -0.68 2.1289
15.16 -9.36 1.5967 23.17 -4.91 1.8652 30.92 -0.60 2.1338
15.31 -9.27 1.6016 23.31 -4.83 1.8701 31.06 -0.52 2.1387
15.46 -9.19 1.6064 23.45 -4.75 1.8750 31.20 -0.44 2.1436
15.61 -9.11 1.6113 23.60 -4.67 1.8799 31.34 -0.37 2.1484
15.76 -9.02 1.6162 23.74 -4.59 1.8848 31.48 -0.29 2.1533
15.91 -8.94 1.6211 23.88 -4.51 1.8896 31.62 -0.21 2.1582
16.05 -8.86 1.6260 24.02 -4.43 1.8945 31.76 -0.13 2.1631
16.20 -8.78 1.6309 24.16 -4.36 1.8994 31.90 -0.06 2.1680
16.35 -8.70 1.6357 24.31 -4.27 1.9043 32.04 0.02 2.1729
16.50 -8.61 1.6406 24.45 -4.19 1.9092 32.18 0.10 2.1777
16.64 -8.53 1.6455 24.59 -4.12 1.9141 32.32 0.18 2.1826
16.79 -8.45 1.6504 24.73 -4.04 1.9189 32.46 0.26 2.1875
16.94 -8.37 1.6553 24.87 -3.96 1.9238 32.60 0.33 2.1924
17.09 -8.28 1.6602 25.01 -3.88 1.9287 32.74 0.41 2.1973
17.23 -8.21 1.6650 25.16 -3.80 1.9336 32.88 0.49 2.2021
17.38 -8.12 1.6699 25.30 -3.72 1.9385 33.02 0.57 2.2070
17.53 -8.04 1.6748 25.44 -3.64 1.9434 33.16 0.64 2.2119
17.68 -7.96 1.6797 25.58 -3.57 1.9482 33.30 0.72 2.2168
17.82 -7.88 1.6846 25.72 -3.49 1.9531 33.44 0.80 2.2217
17.97 -7.80 1.6895 25.86 -3.41 1.9580 33.59 0.88 2.2266
18.11 -7.72 1.6943 26.00 -3.33 1.9629 33.73 0.96 2.2314
18.26 -7.63 1.6992 26.14 -3.26 1.9678 33.87 1.04 2.2363
18.41 -7.55 1.7041 26.28 -3.18 1.9727 34.01 1.12 2.2412
18.55 -7.47 1.7090 26.42 -3.10 1.9775 34.15 1.19 2.2461
18.70 -7.39 1.7139 26.56 -3.02 1.9824 34.29 1.27 2.2510
18.84 -7.31 1.7188 26.71 -2.94 1.9873 34.43 1.35 2.2559
18.99 -7.23 1.7236 26.85 -2.86 1.9922 34.57 1.43 2.2607
19.13 -7.15 1.7285 26.99 -2.78 1.9971 34.71 1.51 2.2656
19.28 -7.07 1.7334 27.13 -2.71 2.0020 34.85 1.58 2.2705
19.43 -6.98 1.7383 27.27 -2.63 2.0068 34.99 1.66 2.2754
19.57 -6.91 1.7432 27.41 -2.55 2.0117 35.13 1.74 2.2803
19.71 -6.83 1.7480 27.55 -2.47 2.0166 35.27 1.82 2.2852
19.86 -6.74 1.7529 27.70 -2.39 2.0215 35.41 1.89 2.2900
20.00 -6.67 1.7578 27.84 -2.31 2.0264 35.55 1.97 2.2949
20.15 -6.58 1.7627 27.98 -2.23 2.0313 35.69 2.05 2.2998
20.29 -6.51 1.7676 28.12 -2.16 2.0361 35.83 2.13 2.3047
20.44 -6.42 1.7725 28.26 -2.08 2.0410 35.97 2.21 2.3096
20.58 -6.34 1.7773 28.40 -2.00 2.0459 36.11 2.28 2.3145
20.73 -6.26 1.7822 28.54 -1.92 2.5058 36.25 2.36 2.3193
20.87 -6.18 1.7871 28.68 -1.84 2.0557 36.39 2.44 2.3242
21.01 -6.11 1.7920 28.82 -1.77 2.0605 36.53 2.52 2.3291
21.16 -6.02 1.7969 28.96 -1.69 2.0654 36.67 2.59 2.3340
21.30 -5.94 1.8018 29.10 -1.61 2.0703 36.81 2.67 2.3389
21.45 -5.86 1.8066 29.24 -1.53 2.0752 36.95 2.75 2.3438
21.59 -5.78 1.8115 29.38 -1.46 2.0801 37.09 2.83 2.3486
21.73 -5.71 1.8164 29.52 -1.38 2.0850 37.23 2.91 2.3535
21.88 -5.62 1.8213 29.66 -1.30 2.0898 37.37 2.98 2.3584
22.02 -5.54 1.8262 29.80 -1.22 2.0947 37.51 3.06 2.3633
22.17 -5.46 1.8311 29.94 -1.14 2.0996 37.66 3.14 2.3682
22.31 -5.38 1.8359 30.08 -1.07 2.1045 37.80 3.22 2.3730
22.45 -5.31 1.8408 30.22 -0.99 2.1094 37.94 3.30 2.3779
22.60 -5.22 1.8457 30.36 -0.91 2.1143 38.08 3.38 2.3828
22.74 -5.14 1.8506 30.50 -0.83 2.1191 38.22 3.46 2.3877
22.88 -5.07 1.8555 30.64 -0.76 2.1240 38.36 3.53 2.3926
108 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 59 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
38.51 3.62 2.3975 46.37 7.98 2.6660 54.56 12.53 2.9346
38.65 3.69 2.4023 46.51 8.06 2.6709 54.72 12.62 2.9395
38.79 3.77 2.4072 46.66 8.15 2.6758 54.87 12.71 2.9443
38.93 3.85 2.4121 46.80 8.22 2.6807 55.02 12.79 2.9492
39.07 3.93 2.4170 46.95 8.31 2.6855 55.17 12.87 2.9541
39.21 4.01 2.4219 47.09 8.38 2.6904 55.33 12.96 2.9590
39.35 4.08 2.4268 47.24 8.47 2.6953 55.48 13.05 2.9639
39.50 4.17 2.4316 47.39 8.55 2.7002 55.64 13.13 2.9688
39.64 4.24 2.4365 47.53 8.63 2.7051 55.79 13.22 2.9736
39.78 4.32 2.4414 47.68 8.71 2.7100 55.95 13.31 2.9785
39.92 4.40 2.4463 47.82 8.79 2.7148 56.11 13.40 2.9834
40.06 4.48 2.4512 47.97 8.87 2.7197 56.26 13.48 2.9983
40.20 4.56 2.4561 48.11 8.95 2.7246 56.42 13.57 2.9932
40.34 4.63 2.4609 48.26 9.03 2.7295 56.57 13.65 2.9980
40.48 4.71 2.4658 48.41 9.12 2.7344 56.73 13.74 3.0029
40.62 4.79 2.4707 48.56 9.20 2.7393 56.89 13.83 3.0078
40.76 4.87 2.4756 48.70 9.28 2.7441 57.04 13.91 3.0127
40.91 4.95 2.4805 48.85 9.36 2.7490 57.20 14.00 3.0176
41.05 5.03 2.4854 49.00 9.45 2.7539 57.36 14.09 3.0225
41.19 5.11 2.4902 49.15 9.53 2.7588 57.51 14.17 3.0273
41.33 5.18 2.4951 49.30 9.61 2.7637 57.67 14.26 3.0322
41.48 5.27 2.5000 49.44 9.69 2.7686 57.83 14.35 3.0371
41.62 5.34 2.5049 49.59 9.77 2.7734 57.99 14.44 3.0420
41.76 5.42 2.5098 49.74 9.86 2.7783 58.15 14.53 3.0469 18
41.90 5.50 2.5146 49.89 9.94 2.7832 58.31 14.62 3.0518
42.05 5.58 2.5195 50.04 10.02 2.7881 58.47 14.71 3.0566
42.19 5.66 2.5244 50.19 10.11 2.7930 58.62 14.79 3.0615
42.33 5.74 2.5293 50.34 10.19 2.7979 58.78 14.88 3.0664
42.48 5.82 2.5342 50.48 10.27 2.8027 58.94 14.97 3.0713
42.62 5.90 2.5391 50.63 10.35 2.8076 59.10 15.06 3.0762
42.76 5.98 2.5439 50.78 10.43 2.8125 59.26 15.15 3.0811
42.90 6.06 2.5488 50.93 10.52 2.8174 59.42 15.23 3.0859
43.05 6.14 2.5537 51.08 10.60 2.8223 59.59 15.33 3.0908
43.19 6.22 2.5586 51.23 10.68 2.8271 59.75 15.42 3.0957
43.33 6.29 2.5635 51.38 10.77 2.8320 59.91 15.51 3.1006
43.48 6.38 2.5684 51.53 10.85 2.8369 60.07 15.60 3.1055
43.62 6.46 2.5732 51.68 10.93 2.8418 60.23 15.68 3.1104
43.76 6.53 2.5781 51.83 11.02 2.8467 60.39 15.77 3.1152
43.91 6.62 2.5830 51.98 11.10 2.8516 60.55 15.86 3.1201
44.05 6.69 2.5879 52.13 11.18 2.8564 60.72 15.96 3.1250
44.19 6.77 2.5928 52.28 11.27 2.8613 60.88 16.05 3.1299
44.34 6.86 2.5977 52.44 11.36 2.8662 61.04 16.13 3.1348
44.48 6.93 2.6025 52.59 11.44 2.8711 61.20 16.22 3.1396
44.62 7.01 2.6074 52.74 11.52 2.8760 61.37 16.32 3.1445
44.77 7.10 2.6123 52.89 11.61 2.8809 61.53 16.41 3.1494
44.91 7.17 2.6172 53.04 11.69 2.8857 61.69 16.50 3.1543
45.06 7.26 2.6221 53.19 11.77 2.8906 61.85 16.58 3.1592
45.20 7.33 2.6270 53.34 11.86 2.8955 62.02 16.68 3.1641
45.35 7.42 2.6318 53.50 11.95 2.9004 62.18 16.77 3.1689
45.49 7.50 2.6367 53.65 12.03 2.9053 62.34 16.86 3.1738
45.64 7.58 2.6416 53.80 12.11 2.9102 62.51 16.95 3.1787
45.79 7.66 2.6465 53.95 12.20 2.0150 62.67 17.04 3.1836
45.93 7.74 2.6514 54.11 12.28 2.9199 62.84 17.13 3.1885
46.08 7.82 2.6563 54.26 12.37 2.9248 63.01 17.23 3.1934
46.22 7.90 2.6611 54.41 12.45 2.9297 63.17 17.32 3.1882

YORK INTERNATIONAL 109

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 59 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
63.34 17.41 3.2031 73.01 22.79 3.4717
63.51 17.51 3.2080 73.20 22.89 3.4766
63.68 17.60 3.2129 73.38 22.99 3.4814
63.84 17.69 3.2178 73.57 23.10 3.4863
64.01 17.78 3.2227 73.76 23.20 3.4912
64.18 17.88 3.2275 73.95 23.31 3.4961
64.34 17.97 3.2324 74.14 23.41 3.5010
64.51 18.06 3.2373 74.33 23.52 3.5059
64.68 18.16 3.2422 74.53 23.63 3.5107
64.85 18.25 3.2471 74.72 23.74 3.5156
65.02 18.35 3.2520 74.91 23.84 3.5205
65.19 18.44 3.2568 75.10 23.95 3.5254
65.36 18.53 3.2617 75.29 24.05 3.5303
65.53 18.63 3.2666 75.48 24.16 3.5352
65.70 18.72 3.2715 75.68 24.27 3.5400
65.87 18.82 3.2764 75.87 24.37 3.5449
66.04 18.91 3.2813 76.07 24.49 3.5498
66.21 19.01 3.2861 76.26 24.59 3.5547
66.39 19.11 3.2910 76.46 24.70 3.5596
66.56 19.20 3.2959 76.65 24.81 3.5645
66.73 19.30 3.3008 76.84 24.91 3.5693
66.91 19.40 3.3057 77.04 25.02 3.5742
67.08 19.49 3.3105 77.24 25.14 3.5791
67.25 19.58 3.3154 77.44 25.25 3.5840
67.43 19.68 3.3203 77.64 25.36 3.5889
67.60 19.78 3.3252 77.84 25.47 3.5938
67.77 19.87 3.3301 78.04 25.58 3.5986
67.95 19.97 3.3350 78.24 25.69 3.6035
68.12 20.07 3.3398 78.44 25.80 3.6084
68.30 20.17 3.3447 78.64 25.91 3.6133
68.48 20.27 3.3496 78.84 26.02 3.6182
68.66 20.37 3.3545 79.04 26.14 3.6230
68.83 20.46 3.3594 79.25 26.25 3.6279
69.01 20.56 3.3643 79.45 26.36 3.6328
69.19 20.66 3.3691 79.66 26.48 3.6377
69.36 20.76 3.3740 79.86 26.59 3.6426
69.54 20.86 3.3789 80.07 26.71 3.6475
69.72 20.96 3.3838 80.27 26.82 3.6523
69.90 21.06 3.3887 80.48 26.94 3.6572
70.08 21.16 3.3936 80.68 27.05 3.6621
70.26 21.26 3.3984 80.89 27.16 3.6670
70.45 21.36 3.4033 81.10 27.28 3.6719
70.63 21.46 3.4082 81.31 27.40 3.6768
70.81 21.56 3.4131 81.52 27.51 3.6816
70.99 21.66 3.4180 81.72 27.62 3.6865
71.17 21.76 3.4229 81.93 27.74 3.6914
71.36 21.87 3.4277 82.14 27.86 3.6963
71.54 21.97 3.4326 82.35 27.97 3.7012
71.72 22.07 3.4375 82.56 28.09 3.7061
71.91 22.17 3.4424
72.09 22.27 3.4473
72.28 22.38 3.4521
72.46 22.48 3.4570
72.64 22.58 3.4619
72.83 22.69 3.4668
110 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 60 – RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
40.12 4.51 1.8408 48.39 9.11 2.1094 56.61 13.67 2.3779
40.27 4.59 1.8457 48.54 9.19 2.1143 56.76 13.76 2.3828
40.42 4.68 1.8506 48.69 9.27 2.1191 56.91 13.84 2.3877
40.58 4.77 1.8555 48.84 9.36 2.1240 57.06 13.92 2.3926
40.73 4.85 1.8604 48.99 9.44 2.1289 57.21 14.01 2.3975
40.88 4.93 1.8652 49.14 9.52 2.1338 57.36 14.09 2.4023
41.03 5.02 1.8701 49.29 9.61 2.1387 57.51 14.17 2.4072
41.18 5.10 1.8750 49.44 9.69 2.1436 57.66 14.26 2.4121
41.33 5.18 1.8799 49.59 9.77 2.1484 57.81 14.34 2.4170
41.48 5.27 1.8848 49.74 9.86 2.1533 57.97 14.43 2.4219
41.64 5.36 1.8896 49.89 9.94 2.1582 58.12 14.51 2.4268
41.79 5.44 1.8945 50.03 10.02 2.1631 58.27 14.60 2.4316
41.94 5.52 1.8994 50.18 10.10 2.1680 58.42 14.68 2.4365
42.09 5.61 1.9043 50.33 10.18 2.1729 58.57 14.76 2.4414
42.24 5.69 1.9092 50.48 10.27 2.1777 58.72 14.85 2.4463
42.39 5.77 1.9141 50.63 10.35 2.1826 58.87 14.93 2.4512
42.54 5.86 1.9189 50.78 10.43 2.1875 59.02 15.01 2.4561
42.70 5.94 1.9238 50.93 10.52 2.1924 59.17 15.10 2.4609
42.85 6.03 1.9287 51.08 10.60 2.1973 59.33 15.18 2.4658
43.00 6.11 1.9336 51.23 10.68 2.2021 59.48 15.27 2.4707
43.15 6.19 1.9385 51.38 10.77 2.2070 59.63 15.35 2.4756
43.30 6.28 1.9434 51.53 10.85 2.2119 59.78 15.43 2.4805
43.45 6.36 1.9482 51.68 10.93 2.1268 59.93 15.52 2.4854
43.60 6.44 1.9531 51.83 11.02 2.2217 60.09 15.61 2.4902 18
43.75 6.53 1.9580 51.97 11.10 2.2266 60.24 15.69 2.4951
43.90 6.61 1.9629 52.12 11.18 2.2314 60.39 15.77 2.5000
44.05 6.69 1.9678 52.27 11.26 2.2363 60.54 15.86 2.5049
44.20 6.78 1.9727 52.42 11.35 2.2412 60.69 15.94 2.5098
44.35 6.86 1.9775 52.57 11.43 2.2461 60.85 16.03 2.5146
44.50 6.95 1.9824 52.72 11.51 2.2510 61.00 16.11 2.5195
44.65 7.03 1.9873 52.87 11.60 2.2559 61.15 16.20 2.5244
44.80 7.11 1.9922 53.02 11.68 2.2607 61.30 16.28 2.5293
44.95 7.20 1.9971 53.17 11.76 2.2656 61.45 16.36 2.5342
45.10 7.28 2.0020 53.32 11.85 2.2705 61.61 16.45 2.5391
45.25 7.36 2.0068 53.47 11.93 2.2754 61.76 16.53 2.5439
45.40 7.45 2.0117 53.62 12.01 2.2803 61.91 16.62 2.5488
45.55 7.53 2.0166 53.77 12.10 2.2852 62.06 16.70 2.5537
45.70 7.61 2.0215 53.92 12.18 2.2900 62.21 16.78 2.5586
45.85 7.70 2.0264 54.07 12.26 2.2949 62.36 16.87 2.5635
46.00 7.78 2.0313 54.21 12.34 2.2998 62.52 16.96 2.5684
46.15 7.86 2.0361 54.36 12.42 2.3047 62.67 17.04 2.5732
46.30 7.95 2.0410 54.51 12.51 2.3096 62.82 17.12 2.5781
46.45 8.03 2.0459 54.66 12.59 2.3145 62.98 17.21 2.5830
46.60 8.11 2.0508 54.81 12.67 2.3193 63.13 17.30 2.5879
46.75 8.20 2.0557 54.96 12.76 2.3242 63.29 17.38 2.5928
46.90 8.28 2.0605 55.11 12.84 2.3291 63.44 17.47 2.5977
47.05 8.36 2.0654 55.26 12.92 2.3340 63.59 17.55 2.6025
47.20 8.45 2.0703 55.41 13.01 2.3389 63.75 17.64 2.6074
47.35 8.53 2.0752 55.56 13.09 2.3438 63.90 17.72 2.6123
47.50 8.61 2.0801 55.71 13.17 2.3486 64.06 17.81 2.6172
47.65 8.70 2.0850 55.86 13.26 2.3535 64.21 17.90 2.6221
47.79 8.77 2.0898 56.01 13.34 2.3584 64.36 17.98 2.6270
47.94 8.86 2.0947 56.16 13.42 2.3633 64.52 18.07 2.6318
48.09 8.94 2.0996 56.31 13.51 2.3682 64.52 18.07 2.6367
48.24 9.02 2.1045 56.46 13.59 2.3730 64.83 18.24 2.6416
YORK INTERNATIONAL 111
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 60 – RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
64.98 18.32 2.6465 73.71 23.17 2.9150 83.04 28.36 3.1836
65.14 18.41 2.6514 73.87 23.26 2.9199 83.22 28.46 3.1885
65.29 18.50 2.6563 74.04 23.36 2.9248 83.39 28.55 3.1934
65.45 18.58 2.6611 74.20 23.45 2.9297 83.57 28.65 3.1982
65.60 18.67 2.6660 74.37 23.54 2.9346 83.75 28.75 3.2031
65.76 18.76 2.6709 74.53 23.63 2.9395 83.93 28.85 3.2080
65.91 18.84 2.6758 74.70 23.72 2.9443 84.10 28.95 3.2129
66.07 18.93 2.6807 74.86 23.81 2.9492 84.28 29.05 3.2178
66.22 19.01 2.6855 75.03 23.91 2.9541 84.46 29.15 3.2227
66.38 19.10 2.6904 75.19 24.00 2.9590 84.65 29.25 3.2275
66.54 19.19 2.6953 75.36 24.09 2.9639 84.83 29.35 3.2324
66.69 19.27 2.7002 75.52 24.18 2.9688 85.01 29.45 3.2373
66.85 19.36 2.7051 75.69 24.27 2.9736 85.19 29.55 3.2422
66.00 18.89 2.7100 75.85 24.36 2.9785 85.37 29.65 3.2471
67.16 19.53 2.7148 76.02 24.46 2.9834 85.55 29.75 3.2520
67.32 19.62 2.7197 76.19 24.55 2.9883 85.73 29.85 3.2568
67.47 19.71 2.7246 76.35 24.64 2.9932 85.92 29.96 3.2617
67.63 19.80 2.7295 76.52 24.74 2.9980 86.10 30.06 3.2666
67.78 19.88 2.7344 76.69 24.83 3.0029 86.28 30.16 3.2715
67.94 19.97 2.7393 76.85 24.92 3.0078 86.47 30.26 3.2764
68.10 20.06 2.7441 77.02 25.01 3.0127 86.65 30.36 3.2813
68.26 20.15 2.7490 77.19 25.11 3.0176 86.84 30.47 3.2861
68.41 20.23 2.7539 77.36 25.20 3.0225 87.02 30.57 3.2910
68.57 20.32 2.7588 77.53 25.30 3.0273 87.21 30.67 3.2959
68.73 20.41 2.7637 77.70 25.39 3.0322 87.39 30.77 3.3008
68.89 20.50 2.7686 77.86 25.48 3.0371 87.58 30.88 3.3057
69.05 20.58 2.7734 78.03 25.57 3.0420 87.76 30.98 3.3105
69.21 20.67 2.7783 78.20 25.67 3.0469 87.95 31.09 3.3154
69.36 20.76 2.7832 78.37 25.76 3.0518 88.13 31.19 3.3203
69.52 20.85 2.7881 78.54 25.86 3.0566 88.32 31.29 3.3252
69.68 20.94 2.7930 78.71 25.95 3.0615 88.51 31.40 3.3301
69.84 21.02 2.7979 78.88 26.05 3.0664 88.70 31.50 3.3350
70.00 21.11 2.8027 79.05 26.14 3.0713 88.88 31.60 3.3398
70.16 21.20 2.8076 79.22 26.24 3.0762 89.07 31.71 3.3447
70.32 21.29 2.8125 79.40 26.34 3.0811 89.26 31.81 3.3496
70.48 21.38 2.8174 79.57 26.43 3.0859 89.44 31.91 3.3545
70.64 21.47 2.8223 79.74 26.52 3.0908 89.63 32.02 3.3594
70.80 21.56 2.8271 79.91 26.62 3.0957 89.82 32.12 3.3643
70.96 21.65 2.8320 80.08 26.71 3.1006 90.01 32.23 3.3691
71.12 21.74 2.8369 80.26 26.81 3.1055 90.20 32.34 3.3740
71.28 21.82 2.8418 80.43 26.91 3.1104 90.39 32.44 3.3789
71.44 21.91 2.8467 80.60 27.00 3.1152 90.59 32.55 3.3838
71.61 22.01 2.8516 80.77 27.10 3.1201 90.78 32.66 3.3887
71.77 22.10 2.8564 80.95 27.20 3.1250 90.97 32.76 3.3936
71.93 22.19 2.8613 81.12 27.29 3.1299 91.16 32.87 3.3984
72.09 22.27 2.8662 81.29 27.39 3.1348 91.35 32.97 3.4033
72.25 22.36 2.8711 81.47 27.49 3.1396 91.54 33.08 3.4082
72.41 22.45 2.8760 81.64 27.58 3.1445 91.74 33.19 3.4131
72.57 22.54 2.8809 81.81 27.67 3.1494 91.93 33.30 3.4180
72.73 22.63 2.8857 81.99 27.77 3.1543 92.13 33.41 3.4229
72.89 22.72 2.8906 82.16 27.87 3.1592 92.32 33.51 3.4277
73.05 22.81 2.8955 82.33 27.96 3.1641 92.52 33.62 3.4326
73.22 22.90 2.9004 82.51 28.06 3.1689 92.72 33.74 3.4375
73.38 22.99 2.9053 82.69 28.16 3.1738 92.91 33.84 3.4424
73.54 23.08 2.9102 82.86 28.26 3.1787 93.11 33.95 3.4473
112 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 60 – RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
93.31 34.06 3.4521 105.04 40.58 3.7207
93.51 34.17 3.4570 105.27 40.71 3.7256
93.70 34.28 3.4619 105.50 40.84 3.7305
93.90 34.39 3.4668 105.73 40.96 3.7354
94.10 34.50 3.4717 105.96 41.09 3.7402
94.30 34.61 3.4766 106.20 41.23 3.7451
94.50 34.73 3.4814 106.44 41.36 3.7500
94.70 34.84 3.4863 106.67 41.49 3.7549
94.90 34.95 3.4912 106.91 41.62 3.7598
95.11 35.06 3.4961 107.14 41.75 3.7646
95.31 35.18 3.5010 107.38 41.88 3.7695
95.52 35.29 3.5059 107.62 42.01 3.7744
95.72 35.40 3.5107 107.86 42.15 3.7793
95.93 35.52 3.5156 108.11 42.29 3.7842
96.13 35.63 3.5205 108.35 42.42 3.7891
96.34 35.75 3.5254 108.59 42.55 3.7939
96.54 35.86 3.5303 108.84 42.69 3.7988
96.75 35.98 3.5352 109.08 42.83 3.8037
96.96 36.09 3.5400 109.32 42.96 3.8086
97.17 36.21 3.5449 109.57 43.10 3.8135
97.38 36.33 3.5498 109.82 43.24 3.8184
97.59 36.44 3.5547 110.06 43.37 3.8232
97.80 36.56 3.5596 110.31 43.51 3.8281
98.01 36.68 3.5645 110.56 43.65 3.8330 18
98.22 36.79 3.5693 110.81 43.79 3.8379
98.43 36.91 3.5742 111.05 43.92 3.8328
98.64 37.03 3.5791 111.31 44.06 3.8477
98.86 37.15 3.5840 111.36 44.09 3.8525
99.07 37.26 3.5889 111.82 44.35 3.8574
99.29 37.39 3.5938 112.08 44.49 3.8623
99.50 37.50 3.5986 112.34 44.64 3.8672
99.71 37.62 3.6035 112.59 44.78 3.8721
99.93 37.74 3.6084 112.85 44.92 3.8770
100.14 37.86 3.6133 113.11 45.06 3.8818
100.36 37.98 3.6182 113.37 45.21 3.8867
100.58 38.10 3.6230 113.63 45.35 3.8916
100.79 38.22 3.6279 113.88 45.49 3.8965
101.01 38.34 3.6328 114.14 45.64 3.9014
101.23 38.46 3.6377
101.45 38.59 3.6426
101.67 38.71 3.6475
101.89 38.83 3.6523
102.11 38.95 3.6572
102.33 39.08 3.6621
102.55 39.20 3.6670
102.78 39.33 3.6719
103.00 39.45 3.6768
103.22 39.57 3.6816
103.45 39.70 3.6865
103.67 39.82 3.6914
103.89 39.94 3.6963
104.12 40.07 3.7012
104.35 40.20 3.7061
104.58 40.33 3.7109
104.81 40.45 3.7158
YORK INTERNATIONAL 113
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
31.99 -0.01 0.2637 58.43 14.68 0.5322 75.98 24.44 0.8008
32.63 0.35 0.2686 58.81 14.90 0.5371 76.25 24.59 0.8057
33.27 0.71 0.2734
59.18 15.10 0.5420 76.53 24.74 0.8105
33.90 1.06 0.2783
59.54 15.30 0.5469 76.81 24.90 0.8154
34.51 1.39 0.2832
35.12 1.73 0.2881 59.90 15.50 0.5518 77.09 25.05 0.8203
35.73 2.07 0.2930 60.26 15.70 0.5566 77.36 25.20 0.8252
36.32 2.40 0.2979 60.63 15.91 0.5615 77.63 25.35 0.8301
36.91 2.73 0.3027 60.98 16.10 0.5664 77.90 25.50 0.8350
37.49 3.05 0.3076 61.33 16.30 0.5713 78.17 25.65 0.8398
38.05 3.36 0.3125 61.69 16.50 0.5762 78.44 25.80 0.8447
38.61 3.67 0.3174 62.04 16.69 0.5811 78.71 25.95 0.8496
39.18 3.99 0.3223 62.39 16.88 0.5859 78.98 26.10 0.8545
39.72 4.29 0.3271 62.73 17.07 0.5908 79.24 26.25 0.8594
40.26 4.59 0.3320
63.07 17.26 0.5957 79.50 26.39 0.8643
40.80 4.89 0.3369
41.33 5.18 0.3418
63.41 17.45 0.6006 79.77 26.54 0.8691
41.85 5.47 0.3467 63.75 17.64 0.6055 80.03 26.69 0.8740
42.37 5.76 0.3516 64.09 17.83 0.6104 80.30 26.84 0.8789
42.89 6.05 0.3564 64.43 18.02 0.6152 80.56 26.98 0.8838
43.39 6.33 0.3613 64.76 18.20 0.6201 80.82 27.12 0.8887
43.89 6.61 0.3662 65.09 18.38 0.6250 81.08 27.27 0.8936
44.39 6.88 0.3711 65.42 18.57 0.6299 81.33 27.41 0.8984
44.88 7.16 0.3760 65.75 18.75 0.6348 81.59 27.55 0.9033
45.36 7.42 0.3809 66.08 18.93 0.6396 81.85 27.70 0.9082
45.84 7.69 0.3857
66.40 19.11 0.6445 82.11 27.84 0.9131
46.32 7.96 0.3906
66.72 19.29 0.6494 82.37 27.99 0.9180
46.79 8.22 0.3955
47.25 8.47 0.4004 67.04 19.47 0.6543 82.62 28.12 0.9229
47.72 8.73 0.4053 67.36 19.65 0.6592 82.87 28.26 0.9277
48.18 8.99 0.4102 67.68 19.82 0.6641 83.12 28.40 0.9326
48.63 9.24 0.4150 68.00 20.00 0.6689 83.37 28.54 0.9375
49.07 9.48 0.4199 68.31 20.17 0.6738 83.62 28.68 0.9424
49.52 9.73 0.4248 68.62 20.35 0.6787 83.88 28.82 0.9473
49.97 9.98 0.4297 68.93 20.52 0.6836 84.13 28.96 0.9521
50.40 10.22 0.4346 69.24 20.69 0.6885 84.38 29.10 0.9570
50.83 10.46 0.4395 69.55 20.86 0.6934 84.62 29.24 0.9619
51.26 10.70 0.4443
69.86 21.04 0.6982 84.87 29.37 0.9668
51.69 10.94 0.4492
52.11 11.17 0.4541 70.17 21.21 0.7031 85.11 29.51 0.9717
52.53 11.41 0.4590 70.47 21.37 0.7080 85.36 29.65 0.9766
52.94 11.63 0.4639 70.77 21.54 0.7129 85.61 29.79 0.9814
53.36 11.87 0.4688 71.07 21.71 0.7178 85.85 29.92 0.9863
53.77 12.10 0.4736 71.37 21.87 0.7227 86.10 30.06 0.9912
54.17 12.32 0.4785 71.67 22.04 0.7275 86.34 30.19 0.9961
54.57 12.54 0.4834 71.96 22.20 0.7324 86.58 30.32 1.0010
54.97 12.76 0.4883 72.26 22.37 0.7373 86.82 30.46 1.0059
55.37 12.98 0.4932 72.55 22.53 0.7422 87.06 30.59 1.0107
55.76 13.20 0.4980
72.84 22.69 0.7471 87.30 30.72 1.0156
56.15 13.42 0.5029
56.54 13.63 0.5078
73.14 22.86 0.7520 87.54 30.86 1.0205
56.92 13.85 0.5127 73.43 23.02 0.7568 87.78 30.99 1.0254
57.31 14.06 0.5176 73.72 23.18 0.7617 88.02 31.12 1.0303
57.68 14.27 0.5225 74.00 23.34 0.7666 88.25 31.25 1.0352
58.06 14.48 0.5273 74.29 23.50 0.7715 88.49 31.39 1.0400
74.57 23.65 0.7764 88.72 31.51 1.0449
74.86 23.81 0.7813 88.96 31.65 1.0498
75.14 23.97 0.7861 89.20 31.78 1.0547
75.42 24.12 0.7910 89.43 31.91 1.0596
75.70 24.28 0.7959 89.67 32.04 1.0645
114 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
89.90 32.17 1.0693 101.92 38.85 1.3379 112.86 44.93 1.6064
90.13 32.30 1.0742 102.13 38.96 1.3428 113.06 45.04 1.6113
90.36 32.42 1.0791 102.33 39.08 1.3477 113.25 45.14 1.6162
90.59 32.55 1.0840 102.54 39.19 1.3525 113.44 45.25 1.6211
90.82 32.68 1.0889 102.74 39.30 1.3574 113.63 45.35 1.6260
91.05 32.81 1.0938 102.95 39.42 1.3623 113.82 45.46 1.6309
91.28 32.94 1.0986 103.15 39.53 1.3672 114.01 45.56 1.6357
91.51 33.06 1.1035 103.36 39.65 1.3721 114.20 45.67 1.6406
91.74 33.19 1.1084 103.56 39.76 1.3770 114.40 45.78 1.6455
91.96 33.31 1.1133 103.77 39.88 1.3818 114.59 45.89 1.6504
92.19 33.44 1.1182 103.97 39.99 1.3867 114.78 45.99 1.6553
92.42 33.57 1.1230 104.18 40.10 1.3916 114.97 46.10 1.6602
92.64 33.69 1.1279 104.38 40.21 1.3965 115.16 46.20 1.6650
92.87 33.82 1.1328 104.58 40.33 1.4014 115.35 46.31 1.6699
93.10 33.95 1.1377 104.78 40.44 1.4063 115.54 46.41 1.6748
93.32 34.07 1.1426 104.99 40.55 1.4111 115.73 46.52 1.6797
93.54 34.19 1.1475 105.19 40.66 1.4160 115.92 46.63 1.6846
93.77 34.32 1.1523 105.39 40.78 1.4209 116.11 46.73 1.6895
93.99 34.44 1.1572 105.59 40.89 1.4258 116.30 46.84 1.6943
94.21 34.56 1.1621 105.80 41.00 1.4307 116.49 46.94 1.6992
94.43 34.69 1.1670 105.99 41.11 1.4355 116.67 47.04 1.7041
94.65 34.81 1.1719 106.19 41.22 1.4404 116.86 47.15 1.7090
94.88 34.94 1.1768 106.39 41.33 1.4453 117.05 47.25 1.7139
95.10 35.06 1.1816 106.59 41.44 1.4502 117.24 47.36 1.7188 18
95.32 35.18 1.1865 106.79 41.55 1.4551 117.43 47.46 1.7236
95.53 35.30 1.1914 106.99 41.66 1.4600 117.62 47.57 1.7285
95.75 35.42 1.1963 107.19 41.78 1.4648 117.80 47.67 1.7334
95.97 35.54 1.2012 107.39 41.89 1.4697 117.99 47.78 1.7383
96.19 35.66 1.2061 107.59 42.00 1.4746 118.18 47.88 1.7432
96.41 35.79 1.2109 107.79 42.11 1.4795 118.37 47.99 1.7480
96.63 35.91 1.2158 107.99 42.22 1.4844 118.56 48.09 1.7529
96.84 36.03 1.2207 108.18 42.33 1.4893 118.74 48.19 1.7578
97.06 36.15 1.2256 108.38 42.44 1.4941 118.93 48.30 1.7627
97.27 36.26 1.2305 108.58 42.55 1.4990 119.12 48.40 1.7676
97.49 36.39 1.2354 108.78 42.66 1.5039 119.31 48.51 1.7725
97.70 36.50 1.2402 108.97 42.76 1.5088 119.49 48.61 1.7773
97.92 36.63 1.2451 109.17 42.88 1.5137 119.68 48.72 1.7822
98.13 36.74 1.2500 109.37 42.99 1.5186 119.87 48.82 1.7871
98.35 36.86 1.2549 109.56 43.09 1.5234 120.05 48.92 1.7920
98.56 36.98 1.2598 109.76 43.20 1.5283 120.24 49.03 1.7969
98.77 37.10 1.2646 109.95 43.31 1.5332 120.43 49.13 1.8018
98.98 37.21 1.2695 110.15 43.42 1.5381 120.61 49.23 1.8066
99.20 37.34 1.2744 110.34 43.53 1.5430 120.80 49.34 1.8115
99.41 37.45 1.2793 110.54 43.64 1.5479 120.98 49.44 1.8164
99.62 37.57 1.2842 110.73 43.74 1.5527 121.17 49.54 1.8213
99.83 37.69 1.2891 110.93 43.85 1.5576 121.35 49.64 1.8262
100.04 37.80 1.2939 111.12 43.96 1.5625 121.54 49.75 1.8311
100.25 37.92 1.2988 111.32 44.07 1.5674 121.72 49.85 1.8359
100.46 38.04 1.3037 111.51 44.18 1.5723 121.91 49.95 1.8408
100.67 38.15 1.3086 111.70 44.28 1.5771 122.10 50.06 1.8457
100.88 38.27 1.3135 111.90 44.39 1.5820 122.28 50.16 1.8506
101.09 38.39 1.3184 112.09 44.50 1.5869 122.47 50.27 1.8555
101.29 38.50 1.3232 112.28 44.60 1.5918 122.65 50.37 1.8604
101.50 38.61 1.3281 112.48 44.71 1.5967 122.84 50.47 1.8652
101.71 38.73 1.3330 112.67 44.82 1.6016 123.02 50.57 1.8701
YORK INTERNATIONAL 115
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
123.21 50.68 1.8750 133.27 56.27 2.1436 143.32 61.85 2.4121
123.39 50.78 1.8799 133.46 56.37 2.1484 143.51 61.95 2.4170
123.58 50.88 1.8848 133.64 56.47 2.1533 143.69 62.05 2.4219
123.76 50.98 1.8896 133.82 56.57 2.1582 143.87 62.15 2.4268
123.94 51.08 1.8945 134.00 56.67 2.1631 144.06 62.26 2.4316
124.13 51.19 1.8994 134.18 56.77 2.1680 144.24 62.36 2.4365
124.31 51.29 1.9043 134.37 56.88 2.1729 144.43 62.47 2.4414
124.50 51.39 1.9092 134.55 56.98 2.1777 144.61 62.57 2.4463
124.68 51.49 1.9141 134.73 57.08 2.1826 144.80 62.67 2.4512
124.86 51.59 1.9189 134.91 57.18 2.1875 144.98 62.77 2.4561
125.05 51.70 1.9238 135.09 57.28 2.1924 145.17 62.88 2.4609
125.23 51.80 1.9287 135.28 57.38 2.1973 145.35 62.98 2.4658
125.42 51.90 1.9336 135.46 57.48 2.2021 145.54 63.08 2.4707
125.60 52.00 1.9385 135.64 57.58 2.2070 145.72 63.18 2.4756
125.78 52.10 1.9434 135.82 57.68 2.2119 145.91 63.29 2.4805
125.97 52.21 1.9482 136.01 57.79 2.2168 146.09 63.39 2.4854
126.15 52.31 1.9531 136.19 57.89 2.2217 146.28 63.49 2.4902
126.33 52.41 1.9580 136.37 57.99 2.2266 146.46 63.59 2.4951
126.52 52.52 1.9629 136.55 58.09 2.2314 146.65 63.70 2.5000
126.70 52.62 1.9678 136.73 58.19 2.2363 146.84 63.81 2.5049
126.88 52.72 1.9727 136.92 58.29 2.2412 147.02 63.91 2.5098
127.07 52.82 1.9775 137.10 58.39 2.2461 147.21 64.01 2.5146
127.25 52.92 1.9824 137.28 58.49 2.2510 147.39 64.11 2.5195
127.43 53.02 1.9873 137.46 58.59 2.2559 147.58 64.22 2.5244
127.62 53.13 1.9922 137.65 58.70 2.2607 147.77 64.32 2.5293
127.80 53.23 1.9971 137.83 58.80 2.2656 147.95 64.42 2.5342
127.98 53.33 2.0020 138.01 58.90 2.2705 148.14 64.53 2.5391
128.17 53.43 2.0068 138.19 59.00 2.2754 148.32 64.63 2.5439
128.35 53.53 2.0117 138.37 59.10 2.2803 148.51 64.73 2.5488
128.53 53.63 2.0166 138.56 59.20 2.2852 148.70 64.84 2.5537
128.71 53.73 2.0215 138.74 59.30 2.2900 148.88 64.94 2.5586
128.90 53.84 2.0264 138.92 59.40 2.2949 149.07 65.04 2.5635
129.08 53.94 2.0313 139.11 59.51 2.2998 149.26 65.15 2.5684
129.26 54.04 2.0361 139.29 59.61 2.3047 149.45 65.26 2.5732
129.44 54.14 2.0410 139.47 59.71 2.3096 149.63 65.36 2.5781
129.63 54.24 2.0459 139.65 59.81 2.3145 149.82 65.46 2.5830
129.81 54.34 2.0508 139.84 59.92 2.3193 150.01 65.57 2.5879
129.99 54.44 2.0557 140.02 60.02 2.3242 150.20 65.67 2.5928
130.17 54.54 2.0605 140.20 60.12 2.3291 150.38 65.77 2.5977
130.36 54.65 2.0654 140.39 60.22 2.3340 150.57 65.88 2.6025
130.54 54.75 2.0703 140.57 60.32 2.3389 150.76 65.98 2.6074
130.72 54.85 2.0752 140.75 60.42 2.3438 150.95 66.09 2.6123
130.90 54.95 2.0801 140.94 60.53 2.3486 151.14 66.19 2.6172
131.09 55.05 2.0850 141.12 60.63 2.3535 151.33 66.30 2.6221
131.27 55.15 2.0898 141.30 60.73 2.3584 151.51 66.40 2.6270
131.45 55.25 2.0947 141.49 60.83 2.3633 151.70 66.51 2.6318
131.63 55.35 2.0996 141.67 60.93 2.3682 151.89 66.61 2.6367
131.82 55.46 2.1045 141.85 61.03 2.3730 152.08 66.72 2.6416
132.00 55.56 2.1094 142.04 61.14 2.3779 152.27 66.82 2.6465
132.18 55.66 2.1143 142.22 61.24 2.3828 152.46 66.93 2.6514
132.36 55.76 2.1191 142.40 61.34 2.3877 152.65 67.03 2.6563
132.54 55.86 2.1240 142.59 61.44 2.3926 152.84 67.14 2.6611
132.73 55.97 2.1289 142.77 61.54 2.3975 153.03 67.24 2.6660
132.91 56.07 2.1338 142.95 61.64 2.4023 153.22 67.35 2.6709
133.09 56.17 2.1387 143.14 61.75 2.4072 153.41 67.46 2.6758
116 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
153.60 67.56 2.6807 164.36 73.54 2.9492 175.92 79.96 3.2178
153.79 67.67 2.6855 164.56 73.65 2.9541 176.14 80.08 3.2227
153.98 67.77 2.6904 164.76 73.76 2.9590 176.36 80.21 3.2275
154.17 67.88 2.6953 164.96 73.87 2.9639 176.58 80.33 3.2324
154.36 67.98 2.7002 165.17 73.99 2.9688 176.80 80.45 3.2373
154.55 68.09 2.7051 165.37 74.10 2.9736 177.02 80.57 3.2422
154.74 68.19 2.7100 165.57 74.21 2.9785 177.25 80.70 3.2471
154.94 68.31 2.7148 165.78 74.33 2.9834 177.47 80.82 3.2520
155.13 68.41 2.7197 165.98 74.44 2.9883 177.69 80.95 3.2568
155.32 68.52 2.7246 166.19 74.56 2.9932 177.91 81.07 3.2617
155.51 68.62 2.7295 166.39 74.67 2.9980 178.14 81.20 3.2666
155.70 68.73 2.7344 166.60 74.78 3.0029 178.36 81.32 3.2715
155.90 68.84 2.7393 166.80 74.89 3.0078 178.59 81.45 3.2764
156.09 68.94 2.7441 167.00 75.01 3.0127 178.81 81.57 3.2813
156.28 69.05 2.7490 167.21 75.12 3.0176 179.04 81.70 3.2861
156.47 69.16 2.7539 167.42 75.24 3.0225 179.26 81.82 3.2910
156.67 69.27 2.7588 167.62 75.35 3.0273 179.49 81.95 3.2959
156.86 69.37 2.7637 167.83 75.47 3.0322 179.72 82.07 3.3008
157.05 69.48 2.7686 168.04 75.58 3.0371 179.94 82.20 3.3057
157.25 69.59 2.7734 168.24 75.69 3.0420 180.17 82.32 3.3105
157.44 69.69 2.7783 168.45 75.81 3.0469 180.40 82.45 3.3154
157.64 69.81 2.7832 168.66 75.93 3.0518 180.63 82.58 3.3203
157.83 69.91 2.7881 168.87 76.04 3.0566 180.86 82.71 3.3252
158.02 70.02 2.7930 169.07 76.16 3.0615 181.09 82.83 3.3301 18
158.22 70.13 2.7979 169.28 76.27 3.0664 181.32 82.96 3.3350
158.41 70.23 2.8027 169.49 76.39 3.0713 181.55 83.09 3.3398
158.61 70.34 2.8076 169.70 76.51 3.0762 181.78 83.22 3.3447
158.80 70.45 2.8125 169.91 76.62 3.0811 182.01 83.35 3.3496
159.00 70.56 2.8174 170.12 76.74 3.0859 182.24 83.47 3.3545
159.19 70.67 2.8223 170.33 76.86 3.0908 182.48 83.61 3.3594
159.39 70.78 2.8271 170.54 76.97 3.0957 182.71 83.73 3.3643
159.59 70.89 2.8320 170.75 77.09 3.1006 182.94 83.86 3.3691
159.78 70.99 2.8369 170.96 77.21 3.1055 183.17 83.99 3.3740
159.98 71.11 2.8418 171.18 77.33 3.1104 183.41 84.12 3.3789
160.18 71.22 2.8467 171.39 77.45 3.1152 183.65 84.26 3.3838
160.37 71.32 2.8516 171.60 77.56 3.1201 183.88 84.38 3.3887
160.57 71.43 2.8564 171.81 77.68 3.1250 184.12 84.52 3.3936
160.77 71.54 2.8613 172.02 77.80 3.1299 184.36 84.65 3.3984
160.97 71.66 2.8662 172.24 77.92 3.1348 184.59 84.78 3.4033
161.16 71.76 2.8711 172.45 78.03 3.1396 184.83 84.91 3.4082
161.36 71.87 2.8760 172.66 78.15 3.1445 185.07 85.05 3.4131
161.56 71.98 2.8809 172.88 78.27 3.1494 185.31 85.18 3.4180
161.76 72.09 2.8857 173.10 78.40 3.1543 185.55 85.31 3.4229
161.96 72.21 2.8906 173.31 78.51 3.1592 185.79 85.45 3.4277
162.15 72.31 2.8955 173.53 78.63 3.1641 186.03 85.58 3.4326
162.35 72.42 2.9004 173.74 78.75 3.1689 186.27 85.71 3.4375
162.55 72.53 2.9053 173.96 78.87 3.1738 186.51 85.85 3.4424
162.75 72.64 2.9102 174.17 78.99 3.1787 186.75 85.98 3.4473
162.95 72.76 2.9150 174.39 79.11 3.1836 186.99 86.11 3.4521
163.15 72.87 2.9199 174.61 79.23 3.1885 187.24 86.25 3.4570
163.35 72.98 2.9248 174.83 79.36 3.1934 187.48 86.38 3.4619
163.55 73.09 2.9297 175.04 79.47 3.1982 187.73 86.52 3.4668
163.75 73.20 2.9346 175.26 79.60 3.2031 187.97 86.66 3.4717
163.96 73.32 2.9395 175.48 79.72 3.2080 188.22 86.80 3.4766
164.16 73.43 2.9443 175.70 79.84 3.2129 188.46 86.93 3.4814

YORK INTERNATIONAL 117

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 61 – OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE (CONT’D.)

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
188.71 87.07 3.4863 203.40 95.23 3.7549
188.96 87.21 3.4912 203.69 95.39 3.7598
189.21 87.35 3.4961 203.99 95.56 3.7646
189.46 87.48 3.5010 204.28 95.72 3.7695
189.71 87.62 3.5059 204.57 95.88 3.7744
189.96 87.76 3.5107 204.86 96.04 3.7793
190.21 87.90 3.5156 205.16 96.21 3.7842
190.46 88.04 3.5205 205.46 96.37 3.7891
190.71 88.18 3.5254 205.76 96.54 3.7939
190.96 88.32 3.5303 206.05 96.70 3.7988
191.22 88.46 3.5352 206.35 96.87 3.8037
191.47 88.60 3.5400 206.65 97.04 3.8086
191.73 88.75 3.5449 206.96 97.21 3.8135
191.98 88.88 3.5498 207.26 97.37 3.8184
192.23 89.02 3.5547 207.57 97.55 3.8232
192.49 89.17 3.5596 207.87 97.71 3.8281
192.75 89.31 3.5645 208.17 97.88 3.8330
193.01 89.46 3.5693 208.48 98.05 3.8379
193.27 89.60 3.5742 208.79 98.22 3.8428
193.53 89.75 3.5791 209.10 98.40 3.8477
193.79 89.89 3.5840 209.42 98.57 3.8525
194.05 90.03 3.5889 209.73 98.75 3.8574
194.31 90.18 3.5938 210.04 98.92 3.8623
194.57 90.32 3.5986 210.35 99.09 3.8672
194.84 90.47 3.6035 210.67 99.27 3.8721
195.10 90.62 3.6084 210.99 99.45 3.8770
195.37 90.77 3.6133 211.31 99.62 3.8818
195.63 90.91 3.6182 211.62 99.80 3.8867
195.90 91.06 3.6230 211.94 99.97 3.8916
196.16 91.21 3.6279 212.27 100.16 3.8965
196.43 91.36 3.6328 212.59 100.34 3.9014
196.70 91.51 3.6377 212.92 100.52 3.9063
196.97 91.66 3.6426 213.24 100.70 3.9111
197.24 91.81 3.6475 213.57 100.88 3.9160
197.51 91.96 3.6523 213.90 101.06 3.9209
197.78 92.11 3.6572 214.23 101.25 3.9258
198.06 92.26 3.6621 214.56 101.43 3.9307
198.33 92.41 3.6670 214.89 101.61 3.9355
198.61 92.57 3.6719 215.23 101.80 3.9404
198.88 92.72 3.6768 215.56 101.99 3.9453
199.15 92.87 3.6816 215.90 102.17 3.9502
199.43 93.02 3.6865 216.24 102.36 3.9551
199.71 93.18 3.6914 216.58 102.55 3.9600
199.99 93.34 3.6963 216.92 102.74 3.9648
200.27 93.49 3.7012 217.26 102.93 3.9697
200.55 93.65 3.7061 217.60 103.12 3.9746
200.83 93.80 3.7109 217.95 103.31 3.9795
201.11 93.96 3.7158 218.30 103.51 3.9844
201.39 94.11 3.7207 218.65 103.70 3.9893
201.68 94.27 3.7256 219.00 103.90 3.9941
201.97 94.44 3.7305 219.35 104.09 3.9990
202.25 94.59 3.7354 219.70 104.29 4.0039
202.54 94.75 3.7402 220.06 104.49 4.0088
202.82 94.91 3.7451
203.11 95.07 3.7500

118 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 Temperature Thermistors
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FIG. 62 – DROP LEG REFRIGERANT SENSOR FIG. 63 – EVAPORATOR REFRIGERANT SENSOR

Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin Temp (°F) Temp (°C) Vin
0.01 -17.77 0.753 0.04 -17.76 1.135
3.72 -15.71 0.831 2.79 -16.23 1.214
7.21 -13.77 0.909 5.44 -14.76 1.292
10.51 -11.94 0.987 8.02 -13.32 1.370
13.65 -10.20 1.066 10.53 -11.93 1.448
16.65 -8.53 1.144 12.98 -10.57 1.526
19.56 -6.91 1.222 15.39 -9.23 1.604
22.36 -5.36 1.300 17.75 -7.92 1.683
25.09 -3.84 1.378 20.08 -6.62 1.761
27.74 -2.37 1.456 22.38 -5.34 1.839
30.34 -0.92 1.534 24.66 -4.08 1.917
32.89 0.49 1.613 26.92 -2.82 1.995
35.40 1.89 1.691 29.17 -1.57 2.073
37.87 3.26 1.769 31.41 -0.33 2.151
40.31 4.62 1.847 33.66 0.92 2.230
42.73 5.96 1.925 35.90 2.17 2.308
45.14 7.30 2.003 38.15 3.42 2.386
47.53 8.63 2.081 40.41 4.67 2.464
49.92 9.96 2.160 42.69 5.94 2.542
52.31 11.28 2.238 44.99 7.72 2.620
54.70 12.61 2.316 47.31 8.51 2.698
57.10 13.95 2.394 49.67 9.82 2.777
59.52 15.29 2.472 52.06 11.15 2.855
61.95
64.40
16.64
18.00
2.550
2.628
54.49 12.50 2.933 18
56.96 13.87 3.011
66.89 19.38 2.707 59.50 15.28 3.089
69.40 20.78 2.785 62.10 16.72 3.167
71.97 22.21 2.863 64.77 18.21 3.245
74.57 23.65 2.941 67.51 19.73 3.324
77.23 25.13 3.019 70.35 21.31 3.402
79.96 26.65 3.097 73.29 22.94 3.480
82.73 28.19 3.175 76.36 24.65 3.558
85.60 29.78 3.254 79.55 26.42 3.636
88.56 31.42 3.332 82.89 28.27 3.714
91.59 33.11 3.410 86.41 30.23 3.792
94.75 34.86 3.488 90.12 32.29 3.871
98.06 36.70 3.566 94.07 34.49 3.949
101.50 38.61 3.644 98.31 36.84 4.027
105.10 40.61 3.722 102.87 39.38 4.105
108.90 42.73 3.801 107.81 42.12 4.183
112.92 44.96 3.879 113.26 45.15 4.261
117.17 47.32 3.957 119.30 48.50 4.339
121.76 49.87 4.035 126.10 52.28 4.418

YORK INTERNATIONAL 119

 Remote Setpoints
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 19
REMOTE SETPOINTS
(See Figs. 12, 14 & 17)

There are three different Remote operating Modes that Center enclosure. The MicroGateway receives Setpoints
can be selected at the Keypad: Analog Remote mode, from remote external devices and transfers them to the
Digital Remote Mode or ISN Remote Mode. Microboard.

The OptiView Control Center can receive a remote CURRENT LIMIT

Current Limit and/or a Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature Setpoint via the following: REMOTE CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINT with
0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA or Pulse
Analog Remote Mode Width Modulation Signal – The Remote Current
• 0-10VDC Analog Input Limit setpoint can be reset over the range of 100% to
30% Full Load Amps (FLA) by supplying (by others)
• 2-10VDC Analog Input
a 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 1 to 11
• 0-20mA Analog Input second Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the
• 4-20mA Analog Input OptiView Control Center. The OptiView Control Center
must be configured appropriately to accept the desired
signal type as follows:
Digital Remote Mode
• Pulse width Modulation (PWM) Input • The appropriate Remote Mode must be selected:
ANALOG Remote Mode must be selected when
ISN Remote Mode using a voltage or current signal input. DIGITAL
• RS-232 Serial Port via MicroGateway Remote Mode must be selected when using a PWM
input.
The Analog inputs are connected to the Microboard • If ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE-
J22 as shown in Figure 12 and described below. MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint must
Microboard Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24 must be be set to “0-10VDC” or “2-10VDC” as detailed be-
positioned appropriately to receive either a 0-10VDC, low, regardless of whether the signal is a voltage or
2-10VDC, 0-20mA or a 4-20mA signal. Refer to Table 1 current input signal type.
“Microboard Program Jumpers” and explanation below • Microboard Program Jumper JP23 must be posi-
for required configurations. tioned appropriately per the input signal type as
detailed below. It is recommended that a qualified
The PWM inputs are in the form of a 1 to 11 second Re- Service Technician position this jumper.
lay contact closure that applies 115VAC to the I/O Board
TB4-19 (Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp) and TB4-20
(Remote Current Limit) for 1 to 11 seconds. Refer to Fig- IMPORTANT! - The signal type used
ure 14. The source of 115VAC is I/O Board TB4-1. The for Remote Current Limit setpoint re-
PWM input must be received at a frequency of at least set and the signal type used for Remote
once every 30 minutes. If not received within this time Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
interval, the Program assumes the remote device is de- setpoint reset must be the same. For
fective and defaults the Current Limit Setpoint to 100% example, if a 0-10VDC signal is be-
and the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint to ing used for Remote Leaving Chilled
the locally programmed Local BASE value. Liq uid Tem per a ture Reset, then a
The Microboard COM 4B RS-232 Serial Port (J2) 0-10VDC signal must be used for Re-
receives the Setpoints in serial data form from the mote Current Limit Reset.
MicroGateway located inside the OptiView Control

120 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

0-10VDC For example, if the input is 8mA, the setpoint would be

As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard set to 72% as follows:
J22-1 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The setpoint varies
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (8 x 3.5)
linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the input varies
from 0 to l0VDC. This input will only be accepted = 100 – 28
when ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE- = 72%
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for
“0-10 Volts” and Microboard Program Jumper JP23 has 4-20mA
been removed. Calculate the setpoint for various inputs As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-2
as follows: (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The setpoint varies linearly
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (VDC x 7) from 100% to 30% FLA as the input varies from 4mA to
20mA. This input will only be accepted when ANALOG
For example, if the input is 5VDC, the setpoint would
remote mode is selected, the REMOTE ANALOG
be set to 65% as follows:
INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for “2-10 Volts” and
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (5 x 7) Microboard Program Jumper JP23 has been placed on
pins 1 and 2. Calculate the setpoint for various inputs
= 100 – 35
as follows:
= 65%
Setpoint (%)100 – [(mA – 4) x 4.3 75]
2-10VDC
For example, if the input is 8mA, the setpoint would be
As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard
set to 83% as follows:
J22-1 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The setpoint varies
linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the input varies Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(8–4) x 4.375]
from 2 to 10VDC. This input will only be accepted = 100 – (4 x 4.375)
when ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE-
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for = 100 – 17.5
“2-10 Volts” and Microboard Program Jumper JP23 has = 82.5
been removed. Calculate the setpoint for various inputs
as follows: = 83%
19
Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(VDC – 2) x 8.75] PWM
For example, if the input is 5VDC, the setpoint would The Pulse Width Modulation input is in the form of a 1
be set to 74% as follows: to 11 second relay contact closure that applies 115VAC
to the I/O Board TB4-20 for 1 to 11 seconds. As shown
Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(5 - 2) x 8.75]
in Fig. 14, connect dry closure relay contacts between
= 100 – [3 x 8.75] I/O Board TB4-20 (signal) and TB4-l (115Vac). The
= 100 – 26.25 setpoint varies linearly from 100% to 30% as the relay
contact closure time changes from 1 to 11 seconds. The
= 74% relay contacts should close for 1 to 11 seconds at least
once every 30 minutes to maintain the setpoint to the
0-20mA desired value. If a 1 to 11 second closure is not received
As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-2 within 30 minutes of the last closure, the setpoint is de-
(signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The setpoint varies linearly faulted to 100%. A closure is only accepted at rates not
from 100% to 30% FLA as the input varies from 0mA to to exceed once every 70 seconds. This input will only
20mA. This input will only be accepted when ANALOG be accepted in DIGITAL remote mode. Calculate the
remote mode is selected, the REMOTE ANALOG setpoint for various pulse widths as follows:
INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for “0-10 Volts” and
Microboard Program Jumper JP23 has been placed on Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(pulse width in seconds – 1) x 7]
pins 1 and 2. Calculate the setpoint for various inputs
as follows: For example, if the relay contacts close for 3 seconds,
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (mA x 3.5) the setpoint would be set to 86% as follows:

YORK INTERNATIONAL 121

 Remote Setpoints
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(3 –1) x 7] • If ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE-
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint must
= 100 – (2 x 7)
be set to “0-10VDC” or “2-10VDC” as detailed be-
= 100 – 14 low, regardless of whether the signal is a voltage or
= 86% current signal type.
• Microboard Program Jumper JP24 must be posi-
tioned appropriately per the input signal type as de-
RS-232 tailed below. It is recommended a qualified Service
As shown in Fig.11, a setpoint can be received in serial Technician position this jumper.
data form at Microboard J2 from the GPIC.
IMPORTANT! - The signal type used
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
for Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature setpoint reset and the
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEM-
PERATURE SETPOINT with 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, signal type used for Remote Current
0-20mA, 4-20mA or Pulse Width Modulation Signal Limit setpoint reset must be the same.
– Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint For example, if a 0-10VDC signal is
reset can be accomplished by supplying (by others) a being used for Remote Current Limit
0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 1 to 11 setpoint reset, then a 0-10VDC signal
second Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the must be used for Leaving Chilled Liq-
OptiView Control Center. The LEAVING CHILLED uid Temperature reset.
LIQUID TEMPERATURE setpoint is programmable
over the range of 38°F to 70°F (water applications); 36°F 0-10VDC
to 70°F (water applications with Smart Freeze protec- As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-3
tion enabled); or 10°F to 70°F (brine applications). The (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). A 0VDC signal produces a
Remote input signal changes the setpoint by creating an 0°F offset. A 10VDC signal produces the maximum
offset above the locally programmed Leaving Chilled offset (10 or 20°F above the Local Setpoint value).
Liquid Temperature Base setpoint value. The setpoint The setpoint is changed linearly between these ex-
can be remotely changed over the range of 10 or 20°F (as tremes as the input varies linearly over the range of
per the locally programmed REMOTE RESET TEM- 0VDC to 10VDC. This input will only be accepted
PERATURE RANGE setpoint) above the Local Leav- when ANALOG Remote mode is selected, the RE-
ing Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint. For example, MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for
if the Local setpoint is 40°F and the REMOTE RESET “0-10VDC” and Microboard Program Jumper JP24 has
TEMPERATURE RANGE setpoint is programmed for been removed. Calculate the setpoint for various inputs
10°F, the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint as follows:
can be remotely reset over the range of 40°F to 50°F.
The setpoint received through the COM 4B RS-232 Offset (°F) = (VDC)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
serial port is not an offset that is applied to the locally 10
programmed BASE value as described above. Rather, Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset
it is an actual Setpoint value. The locally programmed
value is not used as a BASE in this application. For example, if the input is 5VDC and the Remote Reset
Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and the
The OptiView Control Center must be configured appro- Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint is
priately to accept the desired signal type as follows: programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to 45°F
as follows:
• The appropriate Remote Mode must be selected:
Offset (°F) = 5 x 10
ANALOG Remote Mode must be selected when
10
using a voltage or current signal input. DIGITAL
Remote Mode must be selected when using a PWM = 50
input. 10
= 5°F

122 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Setpoint = 40 + 5
= 45°F Offset (°F) = (mA)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
20
2-10VDC
As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-3 Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset
(signal) and J2-5 (Gnd). A 2VDC signal produces a 0°F
offset. A 10VDC signal produces the maximum allowed For example, if the input is 8mA, the Remote Reset
offset (10°F or 20°F above the Local Setpoint value). The Temp Range Setpoint is programmed for 10°F and the
setpoint is changed linearly between these extremes as the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint is
input varies over the range of 2VDC to 10VDC. This input programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to 44°F
will only be accepted when ANALOG remote mode is as follows:
selected, the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE
setpoint is set for “2-10VDC” and the Microboard Offset (°F) = (8)(10)
Program Jumper JP24 has been removed. Calculate the 20
setpoint for various inputs as follows:
= 80
20
Offset (°F) = (VDC – 2)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
8 = 4°F

Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 4

= 44°F
For example, if the input is 5VDC and the Remote Re-
set Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and 4-20mA
the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-4
is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). A 4mA signal produces a 0°F
43.8°F. offset. A 20mA signal produces the maximum allowed
offset (10 or 20°F above the Local Setpoint value). The
Offset (°F) = (5 – 2)(10) setpoint is changed linearly between these extremes as
8 the input varies over the range of 4-20mA. This input
will only be accepted when ANALOG Remote mode 19
= (3)(10)
is selected, the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE
8
setpoint is set for “2-10VDC” and Microboard Program
= 30 Jumper JP24 has been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate
8 the setpoint for various inputs as follows:
= 3.8°F
Offset (°F) = (mA–4)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 3.8 16
= 43.8°F
Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset
0-20mA
As shown in Fig. 12, connect input to Microboard J22-4 For example, if the input is 8mA, and the Remote Reset
(signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). A 0mA signal produces a 0°F Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and the
offset. A 20mA signal produces the maximum allowed Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint
offset (10 or 20°F above the Local setpoint value). The is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to
setpoint is changed linearly between these extremes as 42.5°F as follows:
the input varies over the range of 0-20mA. This input
will only be accepted when ANALOG remote mode is Offset (°F) = (8–4)(10)
selected, the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE 16
setpoint is set for “0-10VDC” and Microboard Program = (4)(10)
Jumper J24 has been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate 16
the setpoint for various inputs as follows:

YORK INTERNATIONAL 123

 Remote Setpoints
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

= 40 Setpoint (F°) = Local Setpoint + Offset

16
For example, if the relay contacts close for 5 seconds and
= 2.5°F
the Remote Reset Temp Range setpoint is programmed
to 10°F and the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 2.5
ture setpoint is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would
= 42.5
be set to 44°F as follows:
PWM
Offset (°F) = (5 – 1)(10)
The Pulse Width Modulation input is in the form of a 1 to
10
11 second relay contact closure that applies 115VAC to
the I/O Board TB4-19 for 1 to 11 seconds. As shown in = (4)(10)
Fig. 14, connect dry closure relay contacts between I/O 10
Board TB4-19 (input) and TB4-1 (115VAC). A contact
= 40
closure time (pulse width) of 1 second produces a 0°F
10
offset. An 11 second closure produces the maximum al-
lowed offset (10 or 20°F above the Local Setpoint value). = 4°F
The relay contacts should close for 1 to 11 seconds at
least once every 30 minutes to maintain the setpoint to Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 4
the desired value. If a 1 to 11 second
= 44°F
closure is not received within 30 minutes of the last
closure, the setpoint is defaulted to the Local setpoint
RS-232
value. A closure is only accepted at rates not to exceed
As shown in Fig. 11, a Setpoint can be received in serial
once every 70 seconds. This input will only be accepted
data form at the Microboard COM 4B serial port (J2)
in DIGITAL Remote mode. Calculate the setpoint for
from the MicroGateway.
various pulse widths as follows:

Offset (°F) =
(pulse width in seconds – 1)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
10

124 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 20
HOT GAS BYPASS
(REFER TO FIG. 64)

With the optional Hot Gas Bypass feature, the Con- The Evaporator and Condenser pressure transducers
trol Center modulates a valve located in the Hot Gas provide these pressure values to the Microboard. The
Bypass connection between the condenser and the Microboard uses these values to calculate the DELTA
evaporator to control the flow of gas to the evapo- P/P parameter as follows: [(condenser pressure – evap-
rator. The valve is modulated in response to load and orator pressure) / evaporator pressure]. Although this
surging conditions. parameter is not used in the Hot Gas Control, it repre-
sents compressor “Head” and is displayed on the Hot
A Hot Gas Bypass Screen, accessed from the COM- Gas Bypass Screen for reference only. These pressures
PRESSOR Screen displays all the applicable parameters are also used to detect when a surge occurs.
and allows a Service Technician to program the appli-
cable setpoints and manually control the Hot Gas valve. The Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature thermistor pro-
If the chiller is equipped with the optional Hot Gas By- vides the temperature to the Microboard. This value is
pass control, it must be Enabled from the OPERATIONS subtracted from the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
Screen using a procedure in the “System Calibration Setpoint to produce the TEMPERATURE DIFFER-
Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this ENTIAL parameter. This parameter is indicative of
book. If Disabled, the valve is driven to the fully closed chiller load.
position.
When a surge is detected, the SURGE DETECTED
The Microboard controls the Hot Gas valve by send- LED illuminates for 5 seconds and the TOTAL SURGE
ing a positioning command over the COM 3 RS-485 COUNT is incremented. This count is the accumulated
serial commumications link to the optional Analog surge events that have been detected over the lifetime
I/O Board that is mounted inside the control Center. of the chiller. This value can be reset to zero using the
The Analog I/O Board converts this command into a procedure detailed in the “System Calibration, Service
2-10VDC signal and applies it to the Hot Gas Valve Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this book.
Actuator. A 2VDC signal drives the valve fully closed This should not be arbitrarily performed. The SURGE
(0% position); a 10VDC signal drives the valve fully SENSITIVITY setpoint can be used to make the de-
open (100% position). Positions between these extremes tection more or less sensitive.
are linearly scaled. For example, 50% position would be
achieved with a 6VDC signal. The actual valve position SETPOINTS
is displayed on the HOT GAS BYPASS Screen as 0% 20
to 100%. • Surge Sensitivity (0.3 to 1.3; default 0.3) – Deter-
mines the surge detection sensitivity. The smaller the
A 2.5K Ohm PRV Potentiometer mounted on the Pre- number, the greater the sensitivity. Programmable
rotation Vanes (PRV) assembly provides the PRV po- in 0.1 increments. This setpoint is programmed on
sition (0 to 100%) to the Analog I/O Board. A +12VDC the Surge Protection Screen and is common to the
source is applied to the potentiometer. This position Surge Protection feature.
value is sent over the RS-485 serial communications link
to the Microboard, where it is displayed on the COM- • Hold Period (30 to 120 minutes; default 30) – This
PRESSOR Screen. When the PRV are fully closed, the is the period of time after no more surges are de-
position is display as 0%; fully open displayed as 100%. tected that the Hot Gas valve closing will begin. It
Positions between these extremes are linearly scaled. will be driven toward the closed position in incre-
To assure accuracy, a PRV Calibration procedure must ments equal to the Close Percentage setpoint at 10
be performed as detailed in the “System Calibration, minute intervals until fully closed. Programmable
Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this in 1 minute increments.
book. The PRV position is displayed as XX on the COM- • Close Percentage (5 to 15%; default 5%) – This is
PRESSOR Screen and “Warning – Vanes Uncalibrated” the incremental amount that the Hot Gas valve will
is displayed on the System Details line of the display be closed at 10 minute intervals after the HOLD
until the calibration is performed. PERIOD has elapsed. Refer to HOLD PERIOD
above.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 125
 Hot Gas Bypass
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

• Minimum Load (0ºF to 4ºF; default 0ºF) – This sets fully closed position and “Override” is displayed as the
the Minimum Load override threshold. It is the off- Hot gas Bypass Control Mode.
set below the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
Setpoint at which the Hot Gas Bypass valve will be If none of the above conditions are in effect, the Hot Gas
opened to the position allowed per the MAXIMUM Bypass valve is driven to the fully closed position, until
OPEN setpoint (25% to 100%). If “0” is entered for a surge condition is detected. When a surge is detected,
this value, this feature is disabled. the Hot Gas valve is opened a certain percentage every
• Maximum Open (25% to 100%; default 100%) few minutes until the surging stops or the valve is fully
– This is the maximum allowed position for the opened as follows:
Hot Gas valve during a Minimum Load override • If Hot Gas valve is fully closed, it is driven to the
condition. Allows the user to adjust the quantity of 50% position. There will be no valve response to
Hot Gas for the local requirements. surge events for the next 5 minutes.
• If Hot Gas valve position is < 35%, it is driven to
OPERATION the 50% position. There will be no valve response
to surge events for the next 3.5 minutes.
While the chiller is shutdown, the Hot Gas valve is • If Hot Gas valve position is > 35% but < 50%, it is
driven to the fully closed position. While the chiller is driven to the 50% position. There will be no valve
running, the valve is modulated in response to low load, response to surge events in the next 2 minutes.
high load or surge conditions. However, manual control
• If Hot Gas valve position is >50%, it is driven open
can override this operation.
another 10%. There will be no valve response to
surge events in the next 2 minutes.
If the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature decreases
to less than the Minimum Load setpoint, the valve
After the chiller has not surged for the period of time
is opened to the maximum allowed by the Maximum
programmed as the HOLD PERIOD setpoint, the
Open setpoint and “Override” is displayed as the Hot
valve is driven toward the closed position at 10 minute
Gas Bypass Control mode on the Hot Gas Bypass
intervals by incremental amounts determined by the
Screen. For example, if the Minimum Load is set for
CLOSE PERCENTAGE setpoint. After it is fully
4ºF and the Maximum Open is set for 80%, the valve will
closed, it remains there until another surge is detected.
be positioned to 80% open when the Leaving Chilled
Liquid Temperature decreases to more than 4ºF below
Whenever the Hot Gas valve is partially or fully open,
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint. After
the existing safety check that subtracts the evaporator
this Minimum Load Override is initiated, as the Leaving
saturation temperature from the leaving chilled liquid
Chilled Liquid Temperature rises to the Leaving Chilled
temperature changes the range from standard range of
Liquid Temperature setpoint, the valve is closed by an
(-2.5ºF to +25ºF) to (-5.0ºF to +25ºF). Whenever the
amount proportional to the difference between the tem-
Hot Gas Bypass valve is closed or not used, this safety
perature delta and the minimum Load setpoint. In this
check uses the standard values.
example, when the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
ture increases to 2ºF below the Leaving Chilled Liquid
If RS-485 serial communications between the
Temperature setpoint, the valve will be positioned to
Microboard and the Analog I/O Board are lost continu-
40% open. The valve is closed accordingly until the
ously for 20 seconds, “Warning – External I/O – Serial
temperature delta is 0ºF.
Communications” is displayed on the System Details
line of the Display and the Hot Gas valve will remain
If the Pre-Rotation Vanes are more than 95% open and
at the position when communications were lost.
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature is at least 5ºF
above the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint,
the valve is set to one-half of its present position for 10 MANUAL CONTROL
minutes. After the 10 minutes have elapsed, the valve
is driven fully closed. The Hot Gas Bypass valve can be manually controlled
from the Hot Gas Bypass Screen in Service access
If the chiller is equipped with a Variable Speed Drive lev el. Manual control has priority over Minimum
(VSD), whenever the VSD is running at < full speed Load Override, Variable Speed Drive Override and
(50/60 Hz), the Hot gas Bypass valve is driven to the Automatic control.

126 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

When the OPEN or CLOSE key is pressed, the valve position is displayed on the COMPRESSOR Screen
position will be increased or decreased by 5% to a max- as 0 (closed) to 100% (fully open). Positions between
imum of 100% or minimum of 0%. Each time either key these extremes are linearly scaled. To assure position
is pressed, the LED in the respective key will illuminate accuracy, a calibration procedure must be performed as
for 2 seconds. The Hot Gas Bypass Control Mode will detailed in the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints
display “Manual”. and Reset Procedures” section of this book. The PRV
position is transmitted to the Microboard via the RS-485
ANALOG I/O BOARD serial communications link.

The optional Analog I/O Board mounts inside the Con- The Analog I/O Board must be configured properly for
trol Center, on the upper right hand side of the Control the Hot Gas control. The on-board Program Jumpers
Center. It receives the Hot gas valve positioning com- must be configured as follows:
mand from the Microboard over the RS-485 serial
communications link and converts this digital value to JUMPER POSITION
a 2-10VDC analog control signal that is applied to the J1 Pins 2 & 3
valve actuator. The scaling of this signal is as described J26 Pins 2 & 3
above. Valve position is displayed on the HOT GAS J39 Pins 1 & 2
BYPASS Screen as 0% (closed) to 100% (fully open).
Positions between these extremes are linearly scaled. There must be a 499 Ohm, 1%, ½ watt resistor con-
nected between P10-2 and P10-5. This converts the
The Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV) potentiometer (2.5K normal 4-20mA Analog I/O Board output to a 2-10VDC
Ohms) is connected to P1, providing a 0 to 5VDC volt- valve positioning output, required by the Hot Gas valve
age from a +12VDC source that represents PRV positon. actuator.
Potentiometer rotation is limited to 37 degrees. PRV

20

YORK INTERNATIONAL 127

 128
Hot Gas Bypass

ACTUATOR OPTIONAL
MICRO POSITIONING ANALOG
BOARD J12 J9 I/O BOARD
(–)
2 12
RS-485
(+)
COM 3 3 11
P10 OPTIONAL
VANE
2-10 VDC HOT GAS
POSITION 2 3
BYPASS
POSITIONING ACTUATOR
J8 P1 SIGNAL
18 21 3 2 1

EVAP. VANE
PRESSURE COND. POSITION
OPEN
PRESSURE 0 - 100%

EVAPORATOR 2.5 K
TRANSDUCER PRV
POTENTIOMETER

CONDENSER LD04563
TRANSDUCER

FIG. 64 – INTERFACE, HOT GAS BYPASS

FORM 160.54-M1(503)

YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 21
SMART FREEZE PROTECTION

The Smart Freeze feature prevents nuisance chiller SMART FREEZE protection is activated only when
shutdowns due to brief periods of chilled liquid flow the feature is enabled AND the Leaving Chilled Liquid
fluctuations or other brief operating conditions that Temperature Setpoint is < 38ºF. Once activated, the
would normally cause Low Evaporator Pressure Safety total number of seconds that the evaporator refrigerant
shutdowns. With this feature enabled and activated, the temperature is below the freeze threshold is counted.
chiller is permitted to ride through these temporary con- The freeze threshold is 32.8ºF (refrigerant temp. sen-
ditions. Also, this feature allows the Leaving Chilled sor RT7) or 34.0º (evaporator saturation temp. See
Liquid temperature Setpoint to be set as low as 36.0ºF. Note 1 below.). The count is incremented once for every
Smart Freeze protection can be enabled or disabled at second the evaporator refrigerant temperature is below the
the Keypad, by a Service Technician, using a procedure freeze threshold and decremented once for every second
detailed in the “System Calibration, Service Setpoints it is above the freeze threshold (but is never decremented
and Reset Procedures” section of this book. It cannot below zero). Thus if the evaporator refrigerant temperature
be used in Brine cooling mode. goes below the freeze threshold for 30 seconds, then goes
above it for 10 seconds, then goes below the threshold for 5
The basis of this feature is that the chilled liquid contains seconds, the total number of seconds the evaporator refrig-
an amount of heat, which cannot be eliminated imme- erant temperature was below the freeze threshold was 25
diately. Therefore, it requires a certain amount of time seconds. If Smart Freeze is no longer activated due to the
for the liquid to change to a solid. During this period Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint being raised
of time, those parameters that determine when solidif- to > 38.0ºF, the total number of seconds being tracked
ication will occur, are evaluated and the appropriate Low is set to zero.
Evaporator Temperature shutdown threshold is applied.
This threshold could be lower, but not higher than the The number of seconds it will take the chilled liquid to
normal Safety threshold. freeze is based on how far the evaporator refrigerant
temperature is below the freeze threshold as follows:
Smart Freeze protection uses the Evaporator Refrig-
erant Temperature as one of the variables to determine Number of seconds to freezing =
when freezing is imminent. If the chiller is equipped with 4053.7
the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature Sensor (RT7), (freeze threshold–evaporator refrigerant temperature)
and the sensor is enabled using the “System Calibration,
Service Setpoints and Reset Procedures” section of this Thus, if the Evaporator Saturation Temperature is being
book, this value is used as the refrigerant temperature. used as the evaporator refrigerant temperature and that
Otherwise, the Evaporator Saturation Temperature (as temperature is 26.0ºF, it would take 8 minutes and 26
derived from the output of the Evaporator Pressure seconds for the chilled liquid to freeze.
Transducer. The pressure is converted to a temperature
via the appropriate refrigerant “pressure/temperature When the total number of seconds the evaporator
lookup table”) is used as the refrigerant temperature. refrigerant temperature is below the freeze threshold
21
exceeds the “Number of seconds to freezing”, a safety
When Smart Freeze protection is Enabled, the Leaving shutdown is performed and “EVAPORATOR – LOW
Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint can be set as low PRESSURE – SMART FREEZE” is displayed on the
as 36.0ºF. If set to < 38.0ºF, the LEAVING CHILLED System details line of the display.
LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown
threshold becomes a minimum of 34.0ºF. Even though Smart Freeze protection is enabled and
activated, the Pre-rotation Vanes Load inhibit still occurs
Unless Smart Freeze protection is activated, the fixed at the same thresholds as with normal operation; inhibit
Low Evaporator Pressure Safety thresholds (R22 – 54.3 at 56.2 PSIG (R22) and 27.0 (R134a). As in normal
PSIG, 29.6ºF) (R134a – 25.0 PSIG, 28.7ºF) are used. operation, loading will be allowed when the pressure
increases to 57.5 PSIG (R22) and 28.0 PSIG (R134a).

YORK INTERNATIONAL 129

 Smart Freeze Protection
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

The following is a summary of the operation with Smart 2. The Low Evaporator Pressure Safety shutdown
Freeze enabled and disabled: threshold is the same as Smart Freeze Disabled
above.
SMART FREEZE DISABLED: • If the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint
• Minimum Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint: is <38.0ºF:
38.0ºF 1. The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
• Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown thresh- Cycling shutdown threshold: 1 to 3.0ºF below the
old: 1º to 34.0ºF below the Leaving Chilled Liquid Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint, as
temp Setpoint, as programmed, or a minimum of programmed, or a minimum of 34.0ºF.
36.0ºF. 2. Low Evaporator Pressure shutdown threshold:
• Low Evaporator Pressure safety shutdown thresh- Determined by how far the evaporator refrigerant
old: R22 - 54.3 PSIG (29.6ºF); R134a – 25.0 PSIG temperature is below the freeze threshold of 32.8ºF
(28.7ºF) (refrigerant temperature sensor RT7) or 34.0ºF
• PRV Load Inhibit: R22 – 56.2 PSIG; R134a – 27.0 (Evaporator Saturation Temperature. See Note 1
PSIG below.) and the total number of seconds it remains
there. Refer to explanation above.
Load Inhibit disable: R22 – 57.5 PSIG; R134a – 28.0
PSIG • PRV Load Inhibit: same as Smart Freeze Disabled
above.
• Load Inhibit Disable: same as Smart Freeze Dis-
SMART FREEZE ENABLED:
able above.
• Minimum Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint: 36.0ºF
• If the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint
is >38.0ºF:
1. The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Note 1: The freeze threshold evaporation saturation
Cycling shutdown threshold: 1 to 34.0ºF below the temperature is 32.0ºF on Flash Memory Card version
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint, as C.MLM.01.01 and earlier.
programmed, or a minimum of 36.0ºF.

130 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 22
SURGE PROTECTION
This feature applies to all compressor codes. However, Each time a surge event is detected, the SURGE DE-
if compressor code other than “P”, applies to Flash TECTED LED indicator on the SURGE PROTECTION
Memory Card versions C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later. Screen illuminates for 5 seconds and the TOTAL SURGE
COUNT increments 1 count.
The SURGE PROTECTION feature detects surge
events and provides a running count of the events that The TOTAL SURGE COUNT can be reset to zero us-
occur over the lifetime of the chiller (up to a maximum ing the CLEAR SURGE COUNT key with the ADMIN
of 65535). If excess surging is detected, it can be con- access level.
figured to shutdown the chiller or initiate a special surge
correction/avoidance mode or simply display a warning
EXCESS SURGE DETECTION
message.
An excess surge condition is detected by comparing the
The SURGE PROTECTION Screen, accessible from the
number of surge events that occur in a selectable time
COMPRESSOR Screen, displays all parameters relevant
period to a selectable threshold.
to this feature. All setpoints relating to this feature are
maintained on this screen.
If the number of surge events (Surge Window Count)
detected in the time period programmed as the COUNT
SURGE DETECTION WINDOW setpoint (1 to 5 minutes; default 5) exceed the
threshold programmed as the COUNT LIMIT setpoint
Surge events are detected by monitoring the relationship (4 to 20; default 4) an excess surge condition has been
between the Condenser pressure and Evaporator pres- detected.
sure while the chiller is running. When the difference
between these pressures decreases transiently and re- Unless the SHUTDOWN or EXTENDED RUN features
mains so for a period of time described below, and then have been enabled, as explained below, the chiller will
makes a positive transition within 7 seconds, a surge continue to run under the same conditions displaying
event has been detected. “Warning – Excess Surge Detected”. This message will
be displayed until manually reset with the Warning Reset
The surge detection sensitivity can be adjusted with key in Operator access level.
the SURGE SENSITIVITY setpoint. It is adjustable
over the range of 0.3 to 1.3 in 0.1 increments. Default
SURGE PROTECTION
value is 0.3. The smaller the number, the greater the
sensitivity.
The Control Center can be configured to take the fol-
lowing courses of action when an excess surge condition
The Evaporator pressure transducer output is subtracted
has been detected. The SHUTDOWN setpoint is used
from the Condenser pressure output to determine the
to invoke a safety shutdown. The EXTENDED RUN
differential. If either of the following negative transi-
setpoint is used to invoke a special 10 minute surge
tions occur in the differential followed by a 0.061VDC
correction/avoidance mode that temporarily eliminates
positive differential transition within 7 seconds, a surge
the conditions causing the surging, while allowing
event is detected:
the chiller to continue to run. However, if the Hot
• If the differential decreases > 0.6VDC for > 0.260
seconds.
Gas Bypass control is Enabled, the Hot Gas Bypass 22
Valve position must be 100% before the Extended Run
• If the differential decreases > x.xVDC for > 0.390 mode is implemented. If the chiller is equipped with
seconds. a compressor motor Variable Speed Drive, the output
frequency must be at full speed (50 Hz/60 Hz) before the
x.xVDC calculated as [(surge sensi- the Extended Run mode is implemented. If the chiller
tivity setpoint x 300) x 1.22] ÷ 1000 is equipped with Hot Gas Bypass and compressor mo-
tor Variable Speed Drive, both conditions must be met
before Extended Run is implemented.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 131

 Surge Protection
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

• If the SHUTDOWN setpoint is Enabled, and the reset with the Warning Reset key in OPERATOR
EXTENDED RUN setpoint is Disabled, a safety access level. During the 10-minute period, a count-
shutdown will be performed and “Surge Protection down timer on the Surge Protection Screen displays
- Excess Surge” is displayed. the time remaining in the period. See Hot Gas By-
• If the SHUTDOWN setpoint is Disabled and the pass and compressor motor Variable Speed Drive
EXTENDED RUN setpoint is Enabled, the Pre-ro- exception above.
tation Vanes are driven closed for 10 minutes and • If both the SHUTDOWN and EXTENDED RUN
“Warning – Surge Protection – Excess surge Limit” setpoints are Enabled, the 10 minute Extended Run
is displayed. When the 10 minutes have elapsed, if period is invoked as above. However, if the SURGE
the Surge Window Count is < the Count Limit, this WINDOW COUNT exceeds the COUNT LIMIT at
message and load inhibit are automatically cleared, the end of the 10 minute Extended Run period, a
otherwise another 10 minute period is initiated. Al- safety shutdown is performed and “Surge Protection
ternating with this message is “Warning – Excess – Excess Surge” is displayed.
Surge Detected” that is displayed until manually

132 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 23
SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES

The chiller is supplied from the YORK Factory with all procedures require SERVICE access level and should not
factory mounted components fully calibrated. The fol- be performed by anyone other than a Service Technician.
lowing procedures are used to verify these calibrations or Each of these procedures is described below.
calibrate a component after it has been field replaced.
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER AP PLI CA -
Programmable Service Setpoints are used by the Program TIONS
to control critical chiller operation. Also, some of these
Setpoints can be used to enable or disable certain features. If the Compressor Motor is driven by an Electro-
Although they have been entered at the YORK Factory, Mechanical Starter, the OptiView Control Center is
they can be changed by a field Service Technician that equipped with a CM-2 Current Module along with
has logged in at SERVICE access level. If the BRAM supporting components Diode Bridge (DB) and Cal-
battery backed memory device (U52) is field replaced, ibration Resistors (RES), as described in a previous
all of the programmed setpoints will be lost. They will chapter of this book. The following procedures can be
have to be re-entered into the new BRAM. Each of these used to verify the calibration and perform the calibra-
Setpoints is described below. Programming procedures tion if necessary. In addition to the calibration, Switch
and OptiView Control Center Keypad operation required S1 and Potentiometer R16 have to be set appropriately
in the procedures below are detailed in YORK Operation on the CM-2 Module. If the CM-2 and/or RES are field
Manual 160.54-O1. In general, the following procedure is replaced, field calibration is necessary.
used to enter Setpoints in this section:
1. Unless noted otherwise in procedures below, log CM-2 Settings:
in at SERVICE access level using Access Code
1. Place Switch S1 in the appropriate position per the
1380.
Starter type:
2. Select the appropriate Display Screen.
UP: Y-Delta or Auto-transformer Starter
3. Press the desired Setpoint key.
Down: All others
A dialog box appears, giving the minimum and
2. Calculate LRA/FLA ratio by dividing the Motor
maximum allowed values, Default value and pres-
Lock Rotor Amps by the chiller Full Load Amps
ent value. The dialog box can be canceled at any
(LRA/FLA = ratio) and then adjust Potentiometer
time by pressing the CANCEL (X) key.
R16 to the ratio value.
4. If the dialog box begins with the word “Enter”, use
the numeric keys to enter the desired value. Leading Calibration Verification:
zeroes are not necessary. Press the • key to place
a decimal point at the appropriate place. Pressing 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
the ▲ key displays the Default value. Pressing the using access code 1 3 8 0 .
▼ key clears the entry. The W key is a backspace 2. Select MOTOR Screen and set Current Limit and
key and causes the entry point to move back one Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoints to 100% FLA.
space. If the dialog box begins with “Select”or “En- 3. Run chiller. Read compressor motor current in
able”, use the W and X keys to select the desired Phase A, B, and C using a clamp-on Ammeter.
value. The W key decreases the value. The X key Apply ammeter to highest Phase.
increases the value.
4. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
5. Press the ENTER (✔) key. If the value is within
range, it is accepted and the dialog box disappears. 5. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by press-
The chiller will begin to operate based on the new ing the OPEN and CLOSE Keypad keys as required
value. If out of range, the value is not accepted and to achieve a motor current equivalent to 100% FLA 23
a message describing why it is not acceptable is as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. The motor
displayed momentarily. current value on the Display should indicate 100%
FLA.
Some Safety shutdowns will not permit the chiller to start 6. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by press-
until a special reset procedure is performed. These reset ing the OPEN and CLOSE keys as required to

YORK INTERNATIONAL 133

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

achieve a motor current equivalent to 105% FLA SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS
as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. The 105%
LED on the CM-2 Module should illuminate. The chiller could be equipped with either of two different
YORK Solid State Starters. Later production chillers are
If the calibration verification does not perform as equipped with the Mod “B” serial data interface Liquid
above, the following Calibration procedure will have Cooled Solid State Starter (LCSSS). Earlier vintage chill-
to be performed: ers are equipped with the Style “A” multiplexed data inter-
face LCSSS. Microboard Program Jumper JP39 must be
Calibration: positioned to invoke the appropriate Microboard/Program
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level operation for the starter applied (Refer to Table 1). A
using access code 1 3 8 0 . description of these starters is contained in the Solid State
Starter section of this book. The procedures for both start-
2. Select MOTOR Screen and set Current Limit and
ers are listed below.
Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoints to 100% FLA.
3. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
MOD “B” SERIAL DATA INTERFACE LIQUID COOLED
4. Run chiller and read compressor motor current in SOLID STATE STARTER
Phase A, B and C using a clamp-on Ammeter. Ap-
ply Ammeter to highest Phase. Complete details of the operation of this starter are con-
5. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by pressing tained in YORK Service Manual 160.00-O2.
the OPEN and CLOSE Keypad keys as required 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE Access level
to achieve a motor current equivalent to 100% FLA using Password 1 3 8 0 .
as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. The voltage 2. Select MOTOR Screen.
across Variable Resistors (RES) should be 0.90 to
3. Enter the following setpoints using the procedures
1.05VDC. Measure this voltage by connecting a
below:
Voltmeter at CM-2 Board J1-2 (+) to J1-1(-). If
necessary, adjust RES to achieve this value. Figure
38 contains formulas to calculate the resistance of Full Load Amps:
RES required to achieve this voltage. Adjust both This is the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller as listed
resistors equally such that the combined resistance on the Sales Order Screen. The Microboard uses the pro-
equals the calculated value. grammed value to perform Current Limit functions and
6. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by press- display compressor motor current in terms of %FLA.
ing the OPEN, CLOSE and HOLD Keypad keys, 1. Press FULL LOAD AMPS key.
as required, to achieve a motor current equivalent to 2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
105% FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter.
3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
Loosen locking nut on Potentiometer R8 on CM-2 and
adjust until the CM-2 Module 105% LED illuminates.
Counterclockwise increases signal level; Clockwise Start Current:
decreases signal level. Tighten locking nut. The Logic/Trigger Board will limit compressor motor
6. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by current to this value during starting. The correct value
pressing the OPEN and CLOSE Keypad keys, as is (0.45 x Delta Locked Rotor amps), as listed on the
required, to achieve a motor current equivalent to SALES ORDER Screen.
100% FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. 1. Press STARTING CURRENT key.
Loose locking nut on Potentiometer R34 on CM- 2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
2 and adjust until the motor current value on the
Display indicates 100% FLA. Clockwise increases 3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
the signal level; Counterclockwise decreases the
signal level. Tighten locking nut.

134 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Voltage Range: 600V - Place over pins 1 & 2 for 380/400/415, 440/460/
This is the compressor motor AC power line application. 480 or 550/575/600 VAC applications.
Selections are 200-208, 220-240, 380, 400, 415, 440- 300V - Place over pins 2 & 3 for 200/208 or 220/230/240
480, 550-600 and Disabled. The Microboard uses the VAC applications.
programmed value to determine the overvoltage and
undervoltage shutdown thresholds for “LCSSS – HIGH Setpoints:
SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE” and “LCSSS – LOW SUP-
PLY LINE VOLTAGE” cycling shutdowns as described 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
in Operation Manual 160.54-O1. If DISABLED is se- using access code 1 3 8 0 .
lected, the shutdown thresholds will be ignored. This 2. Select MOTOR Screen.
check should not be arbitrarily disabled. 3. Enter the following Setpoints using procedures
1. Press VOLTAGE RANGE key. below:
2. Use ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value.
Full Load Amps :
3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
This is the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller as listed
Open SCR Enable/Disable: on the Sales Order Screen. The Microboard uses the pro-
grammed value to perform Current Limit functions and
This allows the Open SCR safety check, performed
display compressor motor current in terms of % FLA.
by the Logic/Trigger Board, to be disabled. This must
NEVER be disabled unless advised by the YORK 1. Press FULL LOAD AMPS key.
factory. 2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
1. Press OPEN SCR key. 3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
2. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Disable.
Voltage Range:
3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
This is the AC Power line voltage applied to the Com-
Kilowatt Hours (KWH) Reset: pressor Motor. Selections are: 380, 400, 415, 440-480,
This allows the KWH to be set to a desired starting value 550-600 and Supply Voltage Range Disabled. The
in the event the BRAM has to be field replaced. This Microboard uses the programmed selection to determine
must never be arbitrarily performed. the overvoltage and undervoltage thresholds for Starter
High Supply Line Voltage and Starter Low Supply Line
1. Press KWH RESET key. Voltage. Cycling shutdowns as described in Operator
2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter desired value. Manual 160.54-O1. If Supply Voltage Range
3. Press ENTER (✔) key. Disabled is selected, the thresholds will be ignored and
these shutdowns will not occur. This check should not
MOD “A” MULTIPLEXED DATA INTERFACE LIQUID be arbitrarily disabled.
COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER 1. Press VOLTAGE RANGE key.
2. Use ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value.
If the chiller is equipped with this model starter the
3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
starter Logic Board is located in the OptiView Control
Center. Operation of this board and overall starter op-
Current Unbalance Check Enable/Disable:
eration is contained in YORK Service Manual 160.46-
OM3.1. The following procedures can be used to verify While the chiller is running, if the compressor Motor
the calibration and perform the calibration if necessary. current in phase A, B and C becomes unbalanced, a
If the Logic Board is field replaced, field calibration is Safety shutdown is performed. Refer to Operator Manual
necessary. Logic Board Program Jumper JP5 (300V/ 160.54-O1 for complete description of this check. This
600V) must be placed in the appropriate position per Setpoint allows the check to be enabled or disabled. If
enabled, the check is performed; if disabled, the check
the compressor motor AC power line.
is not performed.
23
Logic Board Program Jumper: 1. Press CURRENT UNBALANCE key.
Place Jumper J5 (300V/600V) in appropriate position 2. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Dis-
per the Compressor Motor AC Power Line application able.
as follows: 3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 135
 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Calibration Verification: d. While chiller is starting, adjust START CUR-

At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level using RENT potentiometer (R38) on Solid State Starter
access code 1 3 8 0 . Logic Board to achieve the proper starting cur-
rent of (0.45 x Delta Locked rotor Amps) on the
1. Compressor Motor current display accuracy -
highest phase. Turning R38 Clockwise increases
a. Run chiller. current; Counterclockwise decreases current.
b. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. Multiple starts could be required to achieve the
c. Use the Pre-rotation Vanes HOLD keypad key correct calibration. Tighten locking nut.
to stabilize the Compressor Motor current. 2. Overload -
d. Measure phase A, B and C Compressor Motor a. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
current with a clamp-on ammeter. Compare the b. Run Chiller and monitor Compressor Motor
Ammeter values with displayed motor current current on the COMPRESSOR Screen.
values. If displayed values are not within +5%
c. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by
of Ammeter values, refer to Solid State Starter
pressing the OPEN, CLOSE and HOLD keypad
Service Manual 160.46-OM3.1 to troubleshoot
keys, as required, until the highest phase indi-
Starter.
cates a current equivalent to 105% FLA. Adjust
2. Start Current - Proper starting current is (45% x OVERLOAD potentiometer (R44) on Solid
Delta locked Rotor amps). State Starter Logic Board until the 105% FLA
a. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. LED illuminates. Clockwise increases signal
b. Start chiller and monitor Compressor Motor level; Counterclockwise decreases signal level.
starting current in phase A, B and C on the Tighten locking nut.
COMPRESSOR Screen.
Highest phase should be equivalent to (45% x COMPRESSOR MOTOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
APPLICATIONS
Delta Locked rotor amps).
3. Overload - If the Compressor Motor is driven by the YORK Vari-
a. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. able Speed Drive (VSD), the OptiView Control Center
b. Run chiller and monitor Compressor Motor cur- is equipped with an Adaptive Capacity Control (ACC)
rent on the COMPRESSOR Screen. Board. Operation of this board and overall VSD operation
c. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by is detailed in YORK Form 160.00-M1. There are two cali-
brations that have to be performed; VSD Full Load Amps
pressing the OPEN, CLOSE and HOLD keys,
and Pre-rotation Vanes position Potentiometer.
as required, until the highest phase indicates a
current equivalent to 105% FLA.
The VSD Full Load Amps value is the chiller full load
The Display should indicate 105% and the 105% amps value as listed on the Sales Order. It is used by the
LED on the Solid State Starter Logic Board Program to initiate Current Limit at 100% and 104%
should illuminate when the 105% FLA value is FLA.
reached.
The PRV Calibration establishes the voltage feedback
If the calibration verification does not perform as above,
to the ACC Board at the fully closed and fully open
one or both of the following Calibration procedures will
positions. Since the feedback between these extremes
have to be performed:
is linear, the ACC Board will then know the actual PRV
Calibration: position at all times. PRV position is required for the
At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level using speed control and surge prevention. If this procedure is
access code 1 3 8 0. not performed or not performed successfully, variable
speed control is inhibited.
1. Start Current -
a. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. There are two setpoints that affect VSD operation; Surge
b. Loosen locking nut on Solid State Starter Logic Margin and Stability Limit. They should never be changed
Board Potentiometer R38. unless advised by YORK Factory Service. The Surge
c. Start chiller and monitor Compressor Motor Margin Setpoint allows the entire surge map to be adjusted
starting current in Phase A, B and C on the up by a fixed offset value. It is programmable over the
COMPRESSOR Screen. range of 0 to 25.0 Hz. The Stability Limit Setpoint deter-
136 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

mines whether a surge event is stored in the compressor 1. Place Compressor Start/stop Switch in the Stop-
map. When the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature is Reset (O) position and wait until the “Coastdown”
within +0.3 and -0.8ºF of the Setpoint and the rate of is complete.
change of this liquid exceeds the programmed Stability 2. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
Limit index, the system is considered unstable and a surge using access code 1 3 8 0.
event that occurs under these conditions is not stored. The
3. Select the PRV CALIBRATE Screen from the
index is programmable over the range of 1000 to 7000,
COMPRESSOR Screen.
with the Default or nominal being 4500. The procedure
to change these is described below. 4. On the PRV CALIBRATE Screen, press the START
CALIB key to initiate the calibration.
The ACC Surge Map can be printed. By connecting a The CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS LED will
Printer and performing the procedure below, all previ- illuminate, the PRV opening LED will illuminate
ously established surge points can be printed. Also, while and an open signal is applied to the PRV. When the
leaving a Printer connected, all new surge Points can be feedback voltage from the PRV potentiometer stops
printed as they are established. The Map can be cleared increasing, the ACC Board assumes this is the full
using the procedure below. However, it should never be open position and logs this value as 100% open. It
cleared unless advised by the YORK Factory. then applies a close signal to the PRV and illuminates
the PRV Opening LED. When the feedback voltage
If required, an operating point can be established as a stops decreasing, the ACC Board assumes this is the
Surge Point by pressing the Manual surge Point key and fully closed position and logs it as 0% open. These
then pressing a switch on the ACC Board. The operating endpoint voltages are stored in the BRAM as the
conditions at that instant will be captured and stored as fully closed and fully open positions.
a surge point. This is known as a Manual Surge Point.
Refer to procedure below. The calibration procedure can be ter-
minated at any during the procedure
The Kilowatt Hour (KWH) accumulation can be cleared
by pressing the CANCEL CALIB key.
or set to a value using the KWH RESET key as described
below. This should not be performed unless advised by If the PRV were previously calibrated
the YORK Factory. successfully, it will revert to using the
previous calibration values. If they
Full Load Amps Calibration: were not previously calibrated suc-
1. Place Compressor Start/Stop Switch in the Stop- cessfully, Variable Speed control will
Reset (O) position. be inhibited and the VSD will operate
2. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level at fixed speed.
using access code 1 3 8 0.
3. Select VSD DETAILS Screen from the MOTOR 5. If the difference between the endpoint voltages is
Screen. not greater then 0.49VDC, or if an endpoint is not
4. In the VSD, locate the small trimpot located in the detected within 8 minutes, the calibration is con-
upper-middle area of the VSD Logic Board. sidered “unsuccessful”.
5. While monitoring the VSD Full Load Amps 000.0
Setpoints:
A message on the VSD DETAILS Screen, adjust
this trimpot until the correct Full Load Amps value The following are the Setpoints and range of program-
is displayed. Clockwise will increase the value. mable values. The Default value is shown in parenthesis.
It is the recommended value and should provide proper
Pre-rotation Vanes Position Potentiometer: operation in most applications. Never change these val-
ues unless advised by YORK Factory Service.
When initially installed, the Potentiometer should be
set so that the feedback voltage, as measured between
a. Surge Margin – 0.0 to 25.0 Hz. (0.0) 23
the wiper (white wire) and common (black wire) is 0.3 b. Stability Limit – 1000 to 7000 (4500)
to 0.7VDC. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 137

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2. Select ACC DETAILS Screen from the MOTOR 4. Use numeric keypad keys to enter desired value.
screen. 5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
3. On the ACC DETAILS Screen, press the appro-
priate Setpoints key above. VSD Frequency Control:
4. Use the numeric keypad keys to enter the desired The VSD Frequency can be manually controlled as
value. follows:
Press ENTER (✔) key. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0.
ACC Surge Map: 2. Select VSD TUNING Screen from the COM-
To perform any of the following ACC Surge Map func- PRESSOR Screen.
tions, proceed as follows: 3. On the VSD Tuning Screen, press the appropriate
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level key as follows:
using access code 1 3 8 0. a. Set – Places Frequency Control in Manual Mode.
2. Select ACC DETAILS Screen from the MOTOR Sets the VSD speed at a specific frequency be-
Screen. tween 1.0 and 60 (50) Hz.
3. On the ACC DETAILS Screen, press the appro- b. Auto – Places the VSD in automatic frequency
priate key as follows: control. The frequency is determined by the ACC
Board to achieve slowest speed possible while
a. Surge Map Clear – Clears all of the previously
avoiding surge.
established surge points that are stored in mem-
ory. When this key is pressed, a dialog box c. Fixed – Sets the VSD frequency at maximum:
appears requesting the special ACC Map Clear 60 (50) Hz.
Password. Enter 0 3 6 8 and press the Enter (✔) d. Raise – Places Frequency Control in Manual
key. A message is displayed advising the clear- Mode. Increases the VSD frequency by 0.1 to
ing is in progress. Press switch SW1 on ACC 10.0 Hz, as programmed with the INCR AMT
Board, within 15 seconds of pressing the (✔) (increment amount) key.
key. Another message is displayed when clearing Each press of this key increases the frequency
is completed. IMPORTANT! - This should never by the programmed Amount (0.1 to 10.0 Hz)
be performed unless advised by YORK Factory e. Lower – Places frequency Control in Manual
Service. Mode. Decreases the VSD frequency by ?? to
b. Surge Map Print – Prints the entire array of stored 10.0 Hz, as programmed with the INCR AMT
surge points to a printer connected to COM1 (increment amount) key.
Serial Port. Press key again to stop print. Each press of this key decreases the frequency
c. Auto Print enable/disable – Prints new surge the programmed amount (0.1 to 10.0 Hz).
points, as they are established, to a printer con- f. Incr Amt - Programmable Setpoint (0.1 to 10.0
nected to COM1 Serial Port. Press key again to Hz) that determines the amount of increase or
stop print. decrease in VSD frequency that occurs with
d. Manual Surge Point – Within 15 seconds of press- each press of the INC or DEC key in Manual
ing this key, press SW1 on the ACC Board for frequency control mode.
at least 1 second. The ACC Board will confirm
recognition of this point by illuminating red PROXIMITY PROBE
SURGE LED CR9 for 2 seconds. The operating
conditions at that instant are captured and stored The following applies to all applications except “P” com-
as a surge point. pressors and Style F and later chillers equipped with “G”
or “H5-8” compressors: When the Probe is installed at
Kilowatt Hours: the time of manufacture or after the compressor is rebuilt
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level in the field, a Reference Position is established. This
using access code 1 3 8 0. remains the Reference Position until the Compressor is
2. Select MOTOR Screen. rebuilt. It is the distance (in mils) between the tip of the
3. Press KWH RESET key. Probe and the surface of the High Speed Thrust Collar
with a minimum of 25 PSID oil pressure. Any distance

138 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

between 37 and 79 mils is acceptable. This Reference Reference Position Entry:

Position is written on a label that is adhered to the inside Perform this procedure if the Reference Position had
of the OptiView Control Center door. It is also stored in been previously established, but lost from memory due
the BRAM memory device (U52) on the Microboard; if to replacement of the BRAM (U52) or other event.
the BRAM is replaced, the original Reference Position
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us-
value must be programmed using the procedure below.
ing access code 1 3 8 0.
A complete description of the Proximity Probe and the
Reference Position is contained in the “Proximity Probe” 2. Place the Compressor Start/Stop Switch in the
section of this book. Stop-Reset (O) position.
3. Select PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATE Screen
In the procedures below, the Reference Position can be from COMPRESSOR Screen.
established through a calibration procedure or a previ- 4. On PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATE Screen,
ously established Reference Position can be entered, press the ENTER REFERENCE key.
without performing the calibration procedure. 5. Locate previously established Reference Position
that has been logged on label adhered to inside
Anytime the chiller shuts down on a Thrust Bearing of OptiView Control Center door. Using numeric
Safety shutdown, there is the potential that Compressor keypad keys, enter this value. Only values between
damage has occurred. Therefore, the shutdown must 37 and 79 mils will be accepted.
be evaluated by a qualified Service Technician prior to
6. Press ENTER (✔) key.
restarting the chiller. Depending upon the actual shut-
down message, the evaluation could require a bearing
inspection. To prevent the chiller from restarting without Safety Shutdown Reset/Inspection Proce-
the proper evaluation, restart is inhibited until a special dure:
reset procedure is performed. This procedure is listed As explained above, to prevent possible compressor
below and must not be performed by anyone other than damage, the chiller should not be restarted after a Thrust
a qualified Service Technician. Bearing safety shutdown until the shutdown has been
evaluated. Therefore, to prevent the chiller from being
Calibration: restarted by anyone other than a qualified Service Tech-
Perform this procedure at the time of manufacture or if nician, the chiller cannot be restarted until the special
the compressor is rebuilt in the field. reset procedure below is performed. The evaluation that
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us- has to be performed after each shutdown depends on the
ing access code 1 3 8 0. actual message displayed and the circumstances of the
shutdown (refer to HISTORY Screen) as follows:
2. Place Compressor Start/Stop Switch in the Stop-
Reset (O) position. a. THRUST BEARING - PROXIMITY PROBE
CLEARANCE - If the shutdown was caused by
3. Select PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATE Screen
the gap increasing to > +10 mils from the Ref-
from COMPRESSOR Screen.
erence Position, perform a Bearing inspection. If
4. On PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATE Screen, there is damage, repair compressor. Otherwise,
press START CALIB key to initiate the calibration. perform reset procedure below and restart chiller.
The CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS LED will il- If shutdown was caused by gap decreasing to > -
luminate and the oil pump will start automatically. 25 mils from the Reference Position, perform the
The oil pressure is displayed on the Screen. If the reset procedure below and restart the chiller.
CANCEL CALIB key is pressed during the proce-
dure, the oil pump is turned off and the calibration b. THRUST BEARING - PROXIMITY PROBE
is terminated. OUT OF RANGE - Perform reset procedure
below and restart chiller.
5. When the oil pressure has reached 25 PSID, the
Program reads the proximity gap and the START c. THRUST BEARING - HIGH OIL TEMPERA-
CALIB key label changes to ACCEPT CALIB. TURE (Not applicable to chillers equipped with 23
Program version C.MLM.01.03 or higher) - If
6. Press the ACCEPT CALIB key. The measured gap
there have been two consecutive shutdowns, per-
is entered as the Reference Position. Log this value
form a Bearing inspection. Otherwise, perform
on the Label adhered to the inside of the OptiView
reset procedure below and restart chiller.
Control Center door. This remains the Reference
Position until the Compressor is rebuilt. d. THRUST BEARING - OIL TEMPERATURE

YORK INTERNATIONAL 139

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SENSOR (Not applicable to chillers equipped REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL

with Program version C.MLM.01.03 or higher)
A complete description of the Condenser refrigerant
- Perform reset procedure below and restart
level control and the Setpoints that affect this control
chiller.
are provided in the “Refrigerant Level Control” sec-
tion of this book. These setpoints are listed below. The
Reset Procedure:
Program uses these setpoints to control the refrigerant
In order for the following procedure to be successful, to the desired level. If the chiller is equipped with this
the Proximity clearance must be between +10 and –25 feature, the Program control must be ENABLED and the
mils of the Reference Position and the High Speed Drain Setpoints programmed using the procedure below.
Temperature must be >50.0°F and < 179°F.
1. Place the Keypad Rocker Switch in the Stop-Reset The refrigerant level can be manually controlled through
(O) position. manual control of the Variable Orifice using the pro-
cedure below.
2. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us-
ing access code 1 3 8 0 .
The refrigerant Level Sensor, located in the Condenser,
3. After Coastdown is complete, select PROXIMITY must be properly calibrated to accurately detect the re-
PROBE CALIBRATE Screen from COMPRESSOR frigerant level in the Condenser. The procedure below
Screen. is used to perform this calibration.
4. Press FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE key. ENTER
PASSWORD TO CLEAR FAULT is displayed in Enable/Disable:
a dialog box.
If the chiller is equipped with the Refrigerant Level
5. Enter 1 3 9 7 and press the ENTER (✔) key. Control, Level control operation must be “Enabled”.
This clears the fault and allows the chiller to be Otherwise, it must be “Disabled”. Use following pro-
started. cedure:
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level,
HIGH SPEED THRUST BEARING LIMIT SWITCH using access code 1 3 8 0 .
2. Select SETPOINTS Screen. From SETPOINTS
The following is only applicable to chillers equipped Screen select SETUP Screen. From SETUP Screen
with “P” compressors and style F and later chillers select OPERATIONS Screen.
with “G” or “H5-8” compressors: Anytime the chiller 3. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Disable.
shuts down on a High Speed Thrust Bearing safety shut-
4. Press ENTER (✔) key.
down, displaying
the message “THRUST BEARING - LIMIT SWITCH Setpoints:
OPEN”, there is the potential that compressor damage
The following are the Setpoints and range of pro-
has occurred. Therefore, a bearing inspection must be
grammable values. The DEFAULT value is shown in
performed by a qualified Service Technician prior to
parenthesis. The DEFAULT value is the recommended
restarting the chiller. To prevent the chiller from re-
value and should provide proper operation in most ap-
starting without the proper bearing evaluation, restart
plications. However, the Setpoint can be programmed
is inhibited until a special reset procedure is performed,
to other values to compensate for local operating con-
as detailed below.
ditions. Enter Setpoints with procedure below:
1. Place the COMPRESSOR Switch in the Stop-reset
a. Level Setpoint - 20% to 80% (50%)
position.
b. Level Control Period - 1.0 to 5.0 seconds.
2. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us-
3.5 to 30 seconds (Flash Memory Card
ing access code 1 3 8 0.
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later and “P”
3. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. compressors with C.MLM.04.02.xxx).
4. After Coastdown is complete, press FAULT AC- The Default value varies depending upon the
KNOWLEDGE Key. “Enter Password to Clear Flash Memory Card version and compressor
Fault” is displayed in a dialog box. application: versions C.MLM.01.06.xxx and
5. Enter 1 3 9 7 and press the ENTER (✔) key. If the earlier (3.5 seconds); version C.MLM.01.07.xxx
Limit Switch is closed, this clears the fault and al- and later (10.0 seconds “P” compressors; 3.5 sec-
lows the chiller to be started. onds all other compressors)
140 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

c. Proportion Limit Open - 10% to 50% (15%) calibration might not be correct. The calibration can
d. Proportion Limit Close - 10% to 50% (45%) be verified or performed per the procedure below. In
this procedure, the Service Technician will alternate
e.Rate Limit Open - 10% to 50% (10%) 5%
between the REFRIGERANT LEVEL CON TROL
to 50% (10%) (Flash Memory Card ver-
Screen and the ANALOG I/O Diagnostics screen. The
sion C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL Screen is used to
C.MLM.04.02.xxx).
manually control the Orifice and the refrigerant level is
f.Rate Limit Close - 10% to 50% (10%). displayed there. Input 23 on the ANALOG I/O Screen
5% to 50% (10%) (Flash Memory Card represents the Refrigerant Level Sensor output voltage.
version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or Although it represents this value, it is different than that
C.MLM.04.02.xxx) which is measured with a Voltmeter at the output of
g. Valve Preset Time – 0 to 100 seconds (50 seconds) the Level Sensor because it is rescaled by Microboard
(Flash memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx components. The displayed value will be used for the
and later) calibration.
h. Ramp-up Time – 3 to 15 minutes (8 minutes)
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx 1. Remove the cover plate on the Refrigerant Level
and later) Sensor to expose the “S” (Span) and “Z” (Zero)
calibration screws (Refer to Fig. 51).
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access Level 2. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us-
using access code 1 3 8 0. ing access code 1 3 8 0.
2. Select REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL 3. Shutdown the chiller. After the Pre-rotation Vanes
Screen from the CONDENSER Screen. have fully closed and the Vane Motor Switch (VMS)
3. On the REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL has closed, the Variable Orifice will be driven to the
Screen, select the setpoint to be programmed or fully open position, causing the refrigerant level in
press the SETPOINTS key for more setpoints the condenser to be at minimum. With the level at
minimum, adjust the “Z” (zero) calibration screw
4. Using the numeric keypad keys, enter desired
to achieve 0.37VDC on input 23 of the ANALOG
value.
I/O Screen.
5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
4. With the level at minimum, select the REFRIG-
ERANT LEVEL CONTROL Screen and observe
Manual Control: the displayed Refrigerant Level Position. If not 0%,
The Variable Orifice can be manually controlled as finely adjust the “Z” screw until 0% is displayed.
follows: Do not over-adjust! Due to sample averaging to
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level provide display stability during chiller operation,
using access code 1 3 8 0. there is approximately a 10 second delay between
incremental percentage updates after adjustment.
2. Select REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL Wait a minimum of 20 seconds between adjust-
Screen from the CONDENSER Screen. ments. Multiple 10-second in ter vals could be
3. On the REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL required to display the final value.
Screen, press the OPEN, CLOSE or HOLD key as 5. Start the chiller.
required to control the Variable Orifice to achieve
the desired refrigerant level. Pressing the AUTO 6. With the chiller running, select the REFRIGERANT
key invokes automatic operation. LEVEL CONTROL Screen and manually control
the orifice using the OPEN, CLOSE and HOLD
Level Sensor Calibration: keypad keys to place the refrigerant level above
the site glass. This places the refrigerant level at
The refrigerant level in the condenser is displayed on maximum. With the level at maximum, adjust the
the CONDENSER Screen and REFRIGERANT LEVEL “S” (span) calibration screw to achieve 4.31VDC 23
CONTROL Screen. It should be 0% when the level is at on input 23 of the ANALOG I/O Screen.
minimum (Refrigerant Level Sensor uncovered); 100% 7. With the level at maximum, select the REFRIG-
when the level is at maximum (Refrigerant Level Sen- ERANT LEVEL CONTROL Screen and observe
sor completely covered). If the correct percentage is not
displayed for these levels, the Refrigerant Level Sensor
YORK INTERNATIONAL 141
 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

the displayed Refrigerant Level Position. If not use the numeric keypad keys to enter the desired
100%, finely adjust the “S” (span) screw until value. If it begins with “Select”, use the ◄ and ►
100% is displayed. Do not over-adjust! Observe keys to select desired value.
display update delay as described in step 4. 5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
8. Due to possible interaction of “Z” and “S” adjust-
ments, recheck level percentage display on the Manual Control:
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL Screen at
The Oil Pump speed can be manually controlled between
minimum and maximum refrigerant levels.
25 and 60(50) Hz as follows:
9. Seal the Level Sensor calibration screws with a
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
small amount of sealant.
using access code 1 3 8 0.
10. Replace the Level Sensor cover plate.
2. Select OIL SUMP Screen.
11. On the REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL
3. The speed can be increased and decreased in 0.5
Screen, select AUTO Level Control operation.
Hz increments using the RAISE and LOWER
keys. Each time the key is pressed, the frequency
OIL PUMP VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE is changed 0.5 Hz.
On certain model chillers, the oil pump is driven by a OR
small Variable Speed Drive. A complete description of The speed can be set to a specific frequency, as pro-
the Drive operation and the Setpoints that affect this grammed by the SET key as follows:
control are provided in the “Oil Pump Variable Speed 1. Press SET key.
Drive” section of this book. The Setpoints are listed be- 2. Use the numeric keys to enter the desired value.
low. The Program Variable Speed Drive operation must
3. Press ENTER (✔) key.
be ENABLED and the Setpoints programmed using the
procedures below. Also, the Oil Pump Speed can be 4. If the AUTO key is pressed, automatic speed control
manually controlled using the procedure below. is invoked.

Enable/Disable: STANDBY LUBRICATION

The Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive Program operation To maintain oil seal integrity while the chiller is shut-
must be enabled with Microboard Program Switch SW1- down, a feature can be enabled that turns on the Oil
2 as follows: Pump for 2 minutes every 24 hours if the chiller has
SW1-2 ON - Enabled not been run in the past 24 hours. While the Oil Pump
OFF - Disabled is running, STANDBY LUBE IN PROCESS, along
with a countdown timer displaying the time remain-
Setpoints: ing in the lube cycle is displayed. If the chiller is style
“D” equipped with an Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive,
The following are the Setpoints and range of pro- the operating oil pressure will be the programmed Oil
grammable values. The DEFAULT values (shown in Pressure Setpoint.
parenthesis) are the recommended values and should
provide proper operation in most applications. However, If at least 15 PSID of oil pressure is not achieved within
the Setpoints can be programmed to other values as re- 30 seconds of turning on the Oil Pump, the cycle is termi-
quired. Enter Setpoints using procedure below: nated and WARNING - STANDBY LUBE - LOW OIL
PRESSURE is displayed and no more standby lubrica-
a. Oil Pressure Setpoint - 20 to 45 PSID (35)
tions will occur until a.) the FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE
b. Control Period – 0.3 to 2.7 seconds in 0.3 second keypad key is pressed after login at SERVICE access
increments. (0.3) level, at which point another lube cycle will be attempted
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access Level or b.) the chiller is started.
using access code 1 3 8 0. Standby lubrication cycles will not be performed if either
2. Select OIL SUMP Screen. oil pressure transducer is reading a pressure out of its
range (HOP < 6.8 PSIG; LOP < 0 PSIG). This assures
3. On the OIL SUMP Screen, press the appropriate
that the oil pump will not be turned on with the shells
key to select the Setpoint to be programmed.
at atmospheric pressure, as they would be during main-
4. If the Dialog box begins with the word “Enter”, tenance.
142 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

When logged in at SERVICE access level, the time 2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen.
remaining until the next Standby lubrication cycle is 3. On the EVAPORATOR Screen, press the BRINE
displayed as NEXT OIL SEAL LUBRICATION = XX LOW EVAPORATOR CUTOUT key.
HRS on the OIL SUMP Screen.
4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value.
To Enable or Disable the Standby lubrication cycles, 5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
proceed as follows:
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
1. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
CONTROL SENSITIVITY
using access code 1 3 8 0 .
2. Select OIL SUMP Screen. This Setpoint adjusts the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tem-
3. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Disable. perature control sensitivity. It determines the magnitude
4. Press ENTER (✔) key. of Pre-rotation Vanes (PRV) response to correct the er-
ror between the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
Setpoint and the actual liquid temperature leaving the
HIGH CONDENSER PRESSURE WARNING
THRESHOLD chiller. There are three selections as follows:
Normal - Provides standard control operation. PRV
The condenser pressure at which a High Pressure warn- open and close pulses are standard durations
ing message is displayed and the Pre-rotation Vanes are for any given error. Longest allowed pulse
inhibited from further opening, is programmable over is 18 seconds in duration. This selection
the range of 44.9 to 162.5 PSIG (R134a), or 84.0 to will provide proper operation in most ap-
246.3 PSIG (R22). The Default value for R134a is 162.5 plications.
PSIG. The Default for R22 is 246.3 PSIG. The Warning 50% - Provides less sensitivity than the NORMAL
message will clear and the PRV inhibit is removed when selection. The longest allowed open or close
the pressure decreases to 5 PSIG below the programmed pulse is limited to 50% of the maximum al-
value. Proceed as follows to enter this value: lowed with the NORMAL selection. This
provides less overall PRV movement than
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level the NORMAL selection. This selection will
using access code 1 3 8 0. reduce PRV instability in short chilled liquid
2. Select CONDENSER Screen. loops, multi-pass chillers , parallel chiller
configurations and other applications that
3. On the Condenser Screen, press HIGH PRESSURE cause PRV instability.
WARNING THRESHOLD key.
30% - Provides less sensitivity than the 50% se-
4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value. lection. The longest allowed open or close
5. Press ENTER (✔) key. pulse is limited to 30% of the maximum
allowed with the NORMAL selection. This
BRINE LOW EVAPORATOR PRESSURE CUTOUT provides less overall PRV movement than
the 50% selection. It’s beneficial in the
On Brine cooling applications, the Low Evaporator Pres- same applications as the 50% selection,
sure safety shutdown threshold is programmable over the but that require greater stability. This se-
range of 25.0 to 54.3 PSIG (Default 54.3 PSIG) for R22 lection available with Flash Memory Card
Refrigerant and 6.0 to 25.0 PSIG (Default 25.0 PSIG) ver sion C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later or
for R134a Refrigerant. The actual percentage of Brine C.MLM.04.02.xxx).
solution determines this threshold. It is calculated at the
YORK Factory and programmed at the time of manu- Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and later
facture. If the BRAM memory device on the Microboard or C.MLM.04.02.xxx have special variable speed low
is replaced, the threshold will have to be programmed in load operation as follows: If the chiller is equipped with
the field. The threshold is logged on an adhesive label the YORK compressor motor Variable Speed Drive and 23
attached to the inside of the OptiView Control Center the 50% or 30% Sensitivity is selected, the Pre-rotation
door. Proceed as follows to enter this value: Vane (PRV) movement is reduced further than described
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level above when the chiller is operating at low load. When the
using access code 1 3 8 0. PRV position is < 25% and the Leaving Chilled Liquid
Temperature is within + 2.5 ºF of Setpoint, the maximum
YORK INTERNATIONAL 143
 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

allowed vane pulse is limited to 3.5 seconds at the 25% EVAPORATOR REFRIGERANT TEMPERATURE
PRV position and 0.9 seconds at 0% position. PRV posi-
tions in between have linearly scaled maximums. If the chiller is equipped with an Evaporator Refrigerant
Temperature sensor, the feature must be Enabled with
Proceed as follows to select this value: the procedure below. If not equipped with this sensor,
it must be Disabled. If enabled, this temperature is dis-
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
played on the EVAPORATOR Screen, and is also used
using access code 1 3 8 0.
in the Smart Freeze Protection Low Evaporator Pressure
2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen. Safety Shutdown threshold calculation, as explained in
3. Press SENSITIVITY key. the “Smart Freeze Protection” section of this book.
4. Use ◄ and ► keys to select desired value. Use the following procedure to Enable or Disable this
5. Press ENTER (✔) key. feature:
1. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
DROP LEG REFRIGERANT TEMPERATURE
using access code 1 3 8 0.
The chiller can be equipped with a refrigerant tempera- 2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen.
ture sensor in the drop leg between the condenser and 3. Press REFRIGERANT key.
evaporator. If “Enabled” with the procedure below, this
4. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enabled or Dis-
temperature is displayed on the CONDENSER Screen
abled.
as the “Drop Leg Temperature”. It is subtracted from
the Condenser Saturation Temperature to produce “Sub 5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
Cooling Temperature”, also displayed on the Condenser
Screen. If the chiller is equipped with the Drop Leg Re- HOT GAS BYPASS CONTROL
frigerant Temperature sensor, the values are displayed
on the CONDENSER Screen only if enabled with the A complete description of the optional Hot Gas Bypass
following procedure. Control and the Setpoints that affect this control are
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access Level provided in the “Hot Gas Bypass” section of this book.
using access code 1 3 8 0. The Setpoints are listed below. If the chiller is equipped
2. Select CONDENSER Screen. with this feature, it must be “Enabled” and the setpoints
programmed using the procedure below. Otherwise, it
3. Press DROP LEG key. must be “Disabled”. The Hot Gas valve can be manually
4. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Disable. controlled using the procedure below. The total lifetime
5. Press ENTER (✔) key. Surge Count can be cleared. However, this should NOT
be arbitrarily performed! Since the Pre-Rotation Vanes
SMART FREEZE PROTECTION (PRV) position is used in the Hot Gas control, the PRV
position feedback potentiometer must be calibrated with
This feature is described in the “Smart Freeze Pro-
the procedure below.
tection” section of this book. When turned on, it allows
the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint to be
Enable/Disable:
as low as 36ºF for water cooling applications. Along
with this feature is a correspondingly lower Low Water If the chiller is equipped with the optional Hot Gas Bypass
Temperature Cycling Shutdown threshold and Low control, operation must be “enabled”. Otherwise, it must
Evaporator Pressure Safety Shutdown threshold. The be “disabled”. Use the following procedure:
Smart Freeze Protection feature can be turned ON or 1. Shutdown chiller and place COMPRESSOR Start/
OFF using the following procedure: stop Switch in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
1. Shutdown the chiller and wait for completion of
2. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level,
COASTDOWN.
using password 1 3 8 0.
2. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0. 3. Select SETPOINTS Screen. From SETPOINTS
Screen, select SETUP Screen. From SETUP Screen,
3. Select EVAPORATOR Screen.
select OPERATIONS Screen.
4. Press SMART FREEZE key.
4. Use ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Disable.
5. Use ◄ and ► keys to select ON or OFF.
5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
6. Press ENTER (✔) key.
144 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Setpoints: 4. On the PRE-ROTATION VANES CALIBRATE

Screen, press the START CALIBRATION key to
The following are the Setpoints and range of program-
initiate the calibration. The CALIBRATION IN
mable values. The DEFAULT value is shown in paren-
PROGRESS and PRV OPENING LED will illu-
theses. The Default value is the recommended value and
minate and an open signal is applied the PRV. When
should provide proper operation in most applications.
the feedback voltage from the Analog I/O Board,
However, the Setpoint can be programmed to other val-
via the RS-485 serial communications link, stops
ues to compensate for local operating conditions. Enter
increasing for 25 seconds, the Microboard assumes
Setpoints with procedure that follows:
this is the fully open position and logs this value as
a. Hold Period - 30 to 120 minutes (30) the 100% position. It then applies a close signal to
b. Close Percentage - 5% to 15% (5%) the PRV and illuminates the PRV CLOSING LED.
c. Minimum Load - 0°F to 4°F (0°F) When the feedback voltage stops decreasing for 25
seconds, the Microboard assumes this is the fully
d. Maximum Open – 25% to 100% (100%) (If com-
closed position and logs it as the 0% position. These
pressor code other than “P”, applies to Flash
endpoint voltages are stored in BRAM as the fully
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and
closed and fully open positions.
later)
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us- The calibration can be terminated
ing password 1 3 8 0.
at any time during the procedure by
2. Select HOT GAS BYPASS Screen from the COM- pressing the CANCEL CALIB key. If
PRESSOR Screen.
the PRV were previously calibrated
3. On the HOT GAS BYPASS Screen, press the successfully, it will revert to using the
appropriate key to select the Setpoint to be pro- previous calibration values. If they
grammed.
were not previously calibrated success-
4. Using the numeric Keypad keys, enter the desired fully, they will remain uncalibrated.
value.
5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
5. If the difference between the endpoint voltages is
not greater than 0.49VDC, “PRV CALIBRATION
Manual Control: FAILED” is displayed on the Hot Gas Bypass
The Hot Gas Valve can be manually controlled as Screen.
follows:
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level CHILLER STARTS AND OPERATING HOURS
using password 1 3 8 0. RESET
2. Select HOT GAS BYPASS Screen from the COM-
PRESSOR Screen. The Number of Starts and the Operating Hours can be
3. On the HOT GAS BYPASS Screen, press the reset to zero or preset to a desired number. However,
OPEN or CLOSE keys as desired. Each time the this should never be arbitrarily performed. Use the fol-
key is pressed, the valve position will be increased lowing procedure:
or decreased 5%. Pressing the AUTO key invokes
1. At the keypad, login at ADMIN access level. This
automatic operation.
password changes daily. Contact your local YORK
Service Office.
Pre-rotation Vanes Position Potentiometer
Calibration: 2. Select OPERATIONS screen.
1. Place COMPRESSOR START/STOP switch in 3. Press NUMBER of STARTS or OPERATING
the STOP-RESET position (O) and wait until the HOURS key as appropriate.
SYSTEM COASTDOWN is complete. 4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired num-
2. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level using ber. 23
password 1 3 8 0. 5. Press ENTER key (✔) key.
3. Select the PRE-ROTATION VANES CALIBRATE
Screen from the COMPRESSOR Screen.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 145

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SERVICE PHONE NUMBERS SURGE PROTECTION

(Applies to Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx (Applies to Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx
and later) and later)

Two service phone numbers (Regional and Local), with A complete description of the Surge Protection feature
labels, can be displayed on the OPERATIONS Screen. and setpoints that affect this control are provided in the
The Default value for the Regional number is the “North “Surge Protection” section of this book. Although most
American Toll Free Number” (1-800-861-1001). How- setpoints are entered with Operator access level, the
ever, the label and number can be changed to any desired Surge Sensitivity setpoint and Total Surge Count clear-
value. The Default value for the Local label and number ing require Service access level or higher.
is blank. The Service Technician enters the Local phone
number and label. Surge Sensitivity:
1. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level,
The entry format consists of 4 fields (rows), vertically using 1 3 8 0.
from the top. Up to 40 characters/numbers can be
entered for each field. 2. Select SURGE PROTECTION Screen from COM-
PRESSOR Screen.
3. Press SURGE SENSITIVITY key.
Field 1 – Regional phone number label. Default val-
ue is “York Intl North American Toll Free 4. Using numeric and decimal point keypad keys,
Number” enter desired value. Programmable over range of
0.3 to 1.3. Default value is 0.3. Use leading zeroes
Field 2 – Regional phone number. Default value is where necessary and place decimal point between
1-800-861-1001. first and second digit (ie; 0.3, 1.2, etc.)
Field 3 – Local service phone number label. Default 5. Press ENTER (✔) key.
value is blank.
Field 4 – Local service phone number. Default value Clear Surge Count:
is blank.
This should not be arbitrarily
Use the following procedure to change any of the performed.
fields:
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us-
ing access code 1 3 8 0.
2. Select OPERATIONS Screen.
1. At the keypad, log in at ADMIN access level. Ob-
3. Press EDIT PHONE NUMBERS Key.
tain ADMIN password from local service office.
4. Use S and T keys to move green selection box This password changes daily.
to the desired field to be changed.
2. Select SURGE PROTECTION Screen from COM-
5. Press the ENTER (✔) key. PRESSOR Screen.
6. In the Dialog box that appears, a red box appears 3. Press CLEAR SURGE COUNT key.
over the first changeable value. Use the ◄ and
► keys to position the red box over the number SALES ORDER DATA
character to be changed or entered. Use the
S and T keys to scroll sequentially through num- All of the Sales Order Data, except the “Chiller Commis-
bers, alphabet characters and punctuation marks to sioning Date” is entered at the YORK Factory at the time
select the desired value. When the desired value of chiller manufacture. The Service Technician must
displayed, use the ◄ and ► keys to move the red enter the Chiller Commissioning Date and modify the
box to the next value to be changed. The numeric Job Name or Job Location if necessary at the completion
keypad keys can also be used to enter numbers. of commissioning. Normally, the remainder of the Sales
Continue this process until all desired values have Order Data should never be modified. However, if there
been entered. is a change to the chiller design, in the field, this data
7. After all desired values have been entered in pre- can be modified. If the BRAM battery-backed memory
vious step, press ENTER (✔) key.

146 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

device (U52) fails and requires field replacement, all 4. Press CHANGE key. The first changeable area in
of the data will be lost and will have to be manually the selected category will be outlined in a green
programmed. selection box. The procedure can be terminated
anytime after this by pressing the CANCEL (X)
There are three different Passwords used, depending key.
on the circumstances, to change the Sales Order Data
as follows: 5. Use the S and T keys to move the green selection
box to the desired value to be changed, within the
• Chiller Commissioning - Service Technician must category selected.
use password 1 3 8 0 to enter the Commissioning
Date and modify Job Name and Job Location if 6. Press ENTER (✔) key.
necessary. 7. Enter the appropriate data. Use the numeric keypad
• Modifying Sales Order Data - Service Technician keys to enter numbers. Use the • key to enter a decimal
must use the ADMIN password. This password point. Use the S and T keys to scroll sequentially
changes daily. Contact your local YORK Service up and down through the alphabet to enter letters or
Office. a comma (,), slash (/) or minus sign (-). Each time
the S key is pressed, the next higher sequential
• BRAM Replacement - If the BRAM (U52) is field alphabet letter is displayed. Each time the T key
replaced, the Service Technician must use password is pressed, the next lower alphabet letter is dis-
0 2 2 8 to enter all Sales Order Data into a new blank played. The comma, slash and minus sign can be
BRAM. When logged in at this level, the ACCESS selected after scrolling through the entire alphabet.
LEVEL shown will be TEST OP. This password During the entry process, the ◄ key can be used to
only works with a blank BRAM and is only appli- backspace and the ► key can be used to forward
cable to chillers equipped with Flash Memory Card space.
Version C.MLM.01.01 and later.
8. Press ENTER (✔) key.
9. Use S and T keys to select another value to be
When using this password to enter data changed within the same category or press CAN-
into a new blank BRAM, the FINISH CEL (X) key to exit and allow selection of another
PANEL SETUP procedure (listed at category.
the end of the entry procedure below) 10. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT! If the procedure
must be performed after all data has above was performed using password 0 2 2 8 to
been entered. Failure to perform this enter data into a new blank BRAM, the following
procedure will result in unreliable procedure must be performed after all the desired
OptiView Control Center operation! data is entered. If the following procedure is per-
If this procedure is performed prior formed prior to entering all of the data, the ability to
to entering all data, the ability to enter enter more data will be terminated. Failure to per-
more data will be terminated. form this procedure after all data has been entered
will result in unreliable OptiView Control Center
Use the following procedure to enter data: Operation!
1. At the keypad, log in at the appropriate Access a. On SALES ORDER screen, press FINISH
Level to change the desired values. PANEL SETUP key.
2. From the SETPOINTS Screen, select SETUP b. Use ◄ and ► key to select YES.
SCREEN. From the SETUP Screen, select SALES
ORDER Screen. c. Press ENTER (✔) key.
3. If logged in at SERVICE Access level, press SET CUSTOM USER ID AND PASSWORDS
ORDER INFO key to enter Commissioning date, Job
Name or Location and proceed to step 4. If logged When logging in, the user is requested to enter a User
in at ADMIN or TEST OP level, Press SELECT ID, followed by a Password. The universal and Default 23
key to select the data category (ORDER, DESIGN, User ID is zero (0). The universal Password to log in
NAMEPLATE, SYSTEM) to be entered. at OPERATOR access level is 9 6 7 5. The universal
Password to log in at SERVICE access level is 1 3 8 0.
No log in is required for VIEW access level. However,
if desired, the service technician can establish up to four

YORK INTERNATIONAL 147

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

custom User ID’s and Passwords that can be used by list. If it is desired to view the details of a particular
Operations personnel to log in at VIEW, OPERATOR, Setpoint change, select the Setpoint change number
or SERVICE level. with the LOG ENTRY key and then press the VIEW
Up to four Custom Users can be established with DETAILS key. This moves to the SECURITY LOG
User ID’s from 1 to 9999. Each user can be assigned DETAILS Screen.
a Password of 0 to 9999 and an access level of VIEW,
OPERATOR or SERVICE. The SECURITY LOG DETAILS Screen displays the
following Setpoint change details. The Setpoint is se-
Use the following procedure to establish Custom lected from the list on the SECURITY LOG Screen as
Users: explained in the previous paragraph.
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level • Setpoint Category
using 1 3 8 0. • Setpoint
2. From the SETPOINTS Screen, select SETUP
• Date and time of change
Screen. From SETUP Screen, select USER
Screen. • Access Level and User ID used to make the
change
3. Press CHANGE USER ATTRIBUTES key. The
first changeable area is outlined in a green selection • Old Value
box. • New Value
4. Use the W , X , S or T keys to move the green
The following Setpoint changes are not logged:
selection box to the desired value to be changed.
• Clock Mode
5. Press the ENTER (✔) key.
• Custom Screen Slot Numbers
6. Using numeric Keypad keys, enter desired pa-
rameter as follows: • Advanced Diagnostics Communication Port Tests
User ID – 1 to 9999 (numbers cannot be duplicated • Advanced Diagnostics Secondary Multiplexer
for more than one user) Freeze
Password – 0 to 9999 • Soft Shutdown Initiated by Operator
Access Level – 0 = View, 1 = Operator, 2 = Service • System Language
7. Press ENTER (✔) key. • Display Units
8. After all values have been entered, press CANCEL • Any Print Report
key (X) to exit. • Cancel any Print Report
• Schedule Clear
RECORD SETPOINT CHANGES
• Schedule Repeat Exception Days
(Flash memory Card version C.MLM.01.06.xxx and
later or C.MLM.04.02.xxx) • Schedule Start and Stop Times
• Log In/Log Out
This feature provides a record of the last 75 Setpoint • User Attributes for ID, Password and Level
changes. The date and time the Setpoint was changed, • Trend Start/Stop
the new Setpoint value and the Access Level and User
• Trend Slot Numbers, Minimums and Maximums
ID used to make the change are stored. The SECURITY
LOG Screen and the SECURITY LOG DETAILS Screen • Trend Trigger Data
display levels of this information. • Trend Print Mode
• Trend View Mode
On the SECURITY LOG Screen, accessible from the
HISTORY Screen, the Setpoint, Setpoint Category and
new Setpoint value are listed and numbered in reverse
order in which they were changed. The most recent is
listed as number 1; the next most recent as number 2,
etc. A PRINT key allows printing this entire list. Since
15 changes can be displayed at one time, multiple pages
could be necessary to display all the changes. PAGE-UP
and PAGE-DOWN keys are provided to view the entire

148 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

View the Setpoint changes as follows: Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE Access Level later are applicable and backward compatible to all
using access code 1 3 8 0. YK chiller style/compressor combinations. They
contain all control variables for all combinations. For
2. From the HISTORY Screen, select SECURITY
correct chiller control, the correct CHILLER STYLE/
LOG Screen to view the complete list of setpoint
COMPRESSOR combination must be entered. Once the
changes.
applicable Chiller/Compressor combination is entered,
3. To view the details of a particular setpoint change, the program automatically bundles the functionality and
select it with the LOG ENTRY key, then press chiller control per the tables below.
VIEW DETAILS key. This causes a jump to the
SECURITY LOG DETAILS Screen where the For example, if equipped with C.MLM.01.08.105A
setpoint change details are displayed. (or later):

CHILLER STYLE/COMPRESSOR Example 1:

(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and If the chiller is a style F and equipped with a J or H3
later) compressor, enter “Style F/J,H3 Compr”. The program
will read the Proximity Probe input at Microboard J8-
If equipped with Flash memory Card version 15, control the Oil Heater from TB1-64, make the Level
C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later, the Chiller Style/ Control Period Default 3.5 seconds, the Oil Pressure
Compressor combination must be entered. safety threshold below is 35 PSID and will read the
Flow Sensor inputs at either I/O Board TB4-11/12 or
The various YK chiller style/compressor combinations Microboard J7-14/16 as programmed with the FLOW
are equipped differently and have different control re- SWITCH Setpoint.
quirements. Variables include the following:
• High Speed Thrust bearing proximity sensing Example 2:
– Proximity Probe input at Microboard J8-15 or If the chiller is a style E and equipped with a P compres-
Limit Switch input at I/O Board TB3-81. sor, enter “Style E/P Compr”. The program then reads the
Proximity Limit Switch at I/O Board TB3-81, controls
• Flow Sensor – Paddle type or Factory Mounted
the Oil Heater from TB1-64, makes the Level Control
Thermal Type. The paddle type applies 115Vac to
Period Default 10.0 seconds, the Oil Pressure safety
the I/O Board DIGITAL inputs TB4-12 (evapora-
threshold below would be 25 PSID and reads the Flow
tor) and TB4-11 (condenser). The factory mounted
Sensor input at I/O Board TB4-11/12.
thermal type (available with style F chillers), ap-
plies +5Vdc to the microboard ANALOG inputs
at J7-14 (evaporator) and J7-16 (condenser). Flash
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
C.MLM.01.07A.xxx automatically selects the
Flow Sensor input, either Analog or Digital per the
Chiller Style/Compressor Setpoint selection. Flash
Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx (and
later), allows the use of either the Thermal type
(Analog) or Paddle-type (Digital) flow sensors in
the style F chillers. With these versions, the actual
Flow Sensor type present must be entered using the
Flow Switch Setpoint.
• Oil Heater Outputs – Either TB1-34 or TB1-64 on
I/O Board
• Refrigerant Level Control Default Period – Either 23
3.5 seconds or 10.0 seconds
• “Oil – Variable Speed Pump-Pressure Setpoint Not
Achieved” safety shutdown threshold – Either 25
PSID or 35 PSID

YORK INTERNATIONAL 149

 System Calibration
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.07.XXX AND C.MLM.01.07A.XXX

Level
Oil “Oil-Variable Speed Pump
Proxmity Control Flow
Chiller Style/Compressor Heater Pressure Setpoint
Sense Period Switch
Output* Not Achieved” Threshold*
Default
Digital
“Style CDE/GHJ Compr” Probe TB1-34 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(Paddle Type)
Limit Digital
“Style E/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (Paddle Type)

Limit Analog
“Style F/GH Compr” TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
Switch (thermal type)

Analog
“Style F/J Compr” Probe TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(thermal type)

Limit Analog
“Style F/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (thermal type)

* Not applicable to Style C and earlier chillers.

FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.08.XXX

Level
Oil “Oil-Variable Speed Pump
Proxmity Control Flow
Chiller Style/Compressor Heater Pressure Setpoint
Sense Period Switch
Output* Not Achieved” Threshold*
Default
Digital
“Style CDE/GHJ Compr” Probe TB1-34 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(Paddle Type)
Limit Digital
“Style E/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (Paddle Type)

Limit Programmable
“Style F/GH Compr” TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
Switch (Analog or Digital)

Programmable
“Style F/J Compr” Probe TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(Analog or Digital)

Limit Programmable
“Style F/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (Analog or Digital)

* Not applicable to Style C and earlier chillers

150 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

FLASH MEMORY CARD VERSION C.MLM.01.08.105A AND C.MLM.01.08.206A (AND LATER)

Level
Oil “Oil-Variable Speed Pump
Proxmity Control Flow
Chiller Style/Compressor Heater Pressure Setpoint
Sense Period Switch
Output* Not Achieved” Threshold*
Default
Digital
“Style CDE/GHJ Compr” Probe TB1-34 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(Paddle Type)
Limit Digital
“Style E/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (Paddle Type)

Limit Programmable
“Style F/G, H5-8 Compr” TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
Switch (Analog or Digital)

Programmable
“Style F/J, H3 Compr” Probe TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
(Analog or Digital)

Limit Programmable
“Style F/P Compr” TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Switch (Analog or Digital)

* Not applicable to Style C and earlier chillers

Enter the appropriate chiller/compressor combination If the chiller style in the Chiller Style/Compressor
as follows: setpoint on the OPERATIONS Screen is set to “F” (any
1 At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level us- compressor), the “FLOW SWITCH” key appears on the
ing password 1 3 8 0. OPERATIONS Screen allowing the flow sensor type to
be entered. The selections are “Analog” (thermal-type)
2 Select SETPOINTS/SETUP/OPERATIONS
or “Digital” (paddle-type). If Analog is selected, the
Screen.
program reads the thermal-type flow sensor inputs at
3 Press the CHILLER STYLE/COMPRESSOR Microboard analog inputs J7-14 (evaporator) and J7-16
key. (condenser) and ignores the Digital inputs. If Digital is
4 Use W or Xkeys to select the appropriate chiller selected, the program reads the paddle-type sensor inputs
style/compressor combination. Default is “Style at the I/O Board digital inputs TB4-12 (evaporator) and
F/G,H5-8 Compr”. TB4-11 (condenser) and ignores the Analog inputs.
5 Press ENTER (✔) key.
Enter the applicable flow sensor type as follows:
FLOW SWITCH 1. Select SETPOINTS/SETUP/OPERATIONS
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.08.xxx and Screen.
later) 2. Press FLOW SWITCH key.
3. Use W or X keys to select flow sensor type. Each
Style F chillers (and later) are provided with factory time the key is pressed, Analog or Digital is alter-
mounted thermal-type flow sensors for the evapora- nately displayed.
tor and condenser. Flash Memory Card version
4. Press ENTER (✔) key.
C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later allow these chillers to use
either the thermal-type or field installed paddle-type
flow sensor. The thermal-type sensors interface to
Microboard +5Vdc analog inputs at J7-14 (evaporator)
and J7-16 (condenser). The paddle-type sensors inter-
face to the I/O board 115Vac digital inputs at TB4-12
(evaporator) and TB4-11 (condenser). In order for the
program to read the appropriate inputs for the flow sen- 23
sor status, the actual sensor type used must be entered
at the keypad OPERATIONS Screen using Service
Access Level.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 151

 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 24
DIAGNOSTICS & TROUBLESHOOTING

The problems that could be encountered in the OptiView There are two versions of the Diagnostics screens avail-
Control Center are in the following categories: able as follows:
• Keypad 1. Shown in figures 65 through 72. These screens are
• Display used during the Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
process. They allow output states to be changed.
• Serial Input/Output (I/O)
Access the Diagnostics Main Screen as follows:
• Digital Input/Output (I/O)
1. The chiller must be stopped.
• Analog Inputs
2. Place Compressor Start/Stop switch in the
Stop-Reset position (O).
There is a Diagnostic and associated Troubleshooting
procedure for each category. They are described on the 3. Ensure the Compressor motor current is 0%
following pages. Each Diagnostic is accessed from the FLA.
Diagnostics Main Screen, which is entered using the 4. Log in at SERVICE access level using access
procedure below. If there is an OptiView Control Center code 1 3 8 0.
problem, determine the category of the problem. Then 5. Move Microboard Program Switch SW1-4 to
perform the applicable Diagnostic. If the Diagnostic the ON position. A Watchdog reset will occur
reveals a malfunction, perform the Troubleshooting and the Boot-up process will commence. At
procedure to locate the defective component. the completion of the Boot-up process, the
Diagnostics Main Screen will appear. (Note:
There are several documents that must be referred to If SWI-4 is moved to the ON position before
while performing the Diagnostics and Troubleshoot- step 4 above is performed, the “LOG IN” key
ing procedures. Each procedure references the Section will be displayed and Logging in at SERVICE
and figures of this book that describe the operation access level must be performed before the Main
of the component being tested. Also, the applicable Screen is displayed.
OptiView Control Center wiring diagram must be used
2. Not shown. Available when logged in at SER-
as follows:
VICE access level, whether the chiller is running
or not. Accessed from the SETUP screen via the
Chillers through style E (except “P” compressors):
SETPOINTS screen. There are two screens avail-
• 160.54-PW1 (Electro-mechanical Starter) able that allow the Analog Inputs voltage levels and
• 160.54-PW2 (Mod “A” Solid State Starter) Digital I/O states to be monitored. These screens
• 160.54-PW2.1 (Mod “B” Solid State Starter) are preceded by a general screen that provides the
installed software versions.
• 160.54-PW3 (Variable Speed Drive).
SOFTWARE VERSION
Chillers through style E (“P” compressors):
Controls - FLASH Memory Card on Microboard
• 160.54-PW8 – Chillers (Electro-mechanical Start- BIOS - BIOS Eprom on Microboard
er),
Kernel - Software that is part of FLASH Memory
• 160.54-PW9 (Mod “B” Solid State Starter) Card
• 160.54-PW10 (Variable Speed Drive) GUI - Software that is part of FLASH Memory Card
SIO - Software that is part of FLASH Memory Card
Style “F” chillers (all compressors): GPIC - Eprom in MicroGateway
• 160.73-PW1 (Electro-mechanical Starter)
• 160.73-PW2 (Mod “B” Solid State Starter)
• 160.73-PW3 (Variable speed Drive)

152 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN

00335VIP
FIG. 65 – MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN

Each of the Diagnostics is accessed from this screen.

Press the appropriate key to select the desired diag-
nostic. After each diagnostic is performed, return to
this MAIN Screen, from which the next diagnostic can
be selected.

Some of the diagnostics have sub-screens that are

accessed from the selected diagnostic screen. The
sub-screens are shown indented below:

Main screen
- Keypad test
- Display test
- Bit patterns test
- All red
- All green
- All blue
- All white
- All black
- Serial 1/0 test
- Digital 1/0 test
- Analog Inputs

The ADVANCED SECURITY key is used during the

manufacturing process and has no field service use.

24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 153
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

KEYPAD TEST

00336VIP
FIG. 66 – KEYPAD TEST SCREEN

This diagnostic is used to verify Keypad operation and b. Identify row/column coordinate of the key to be
the Microboard’s ability to respond to a pressed key. tested. Refer to Figure 33.
Refer to description of Keypad operation in Section 8 c. In the Keypad connector, locate the pins of the
of this book. row/column coordinate of the key of the key to be
tested.
PROCEDURE d. Insert the leads of an Ohmmeter into the pins
1. Press each keypad key. As the key is pressed, an identified in step “c” above.
illuminated LED is displayed corresponding to the e. Press the key to be tested. If the contact resistance
key location on the keypad. is >100 Ohms, the Keypad is defective.
2. Press the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the f. Release the key. If the contact resistance is < 1
MAIN DIAGNOSTICS Screen. Meg Ohm, the Keypad is defective.
2. Ribbon Cable
TROUBLESHOOTING
Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on
If an LED is not displayed when a key is pressed, the all conductors in the ribbon cable. An open circuit
Keypad, Keypad ribbon cable or Microboard could be would indicate the ribbon Cable is defective.
defective. Use the following procedure to locate the 3. Microboard
defective component.
There are no checks or measurements to be made
on the Microboard. If the Keypad and Ribbon Cable
1. Keypad check OK per the above procedures, the Microboard
a. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the Keypad. is most likely the cause of the problem.

154 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

DISPLAY TEST

00337VIP
FIG. 67 – DISPLAY TEST MAIN SCREEN

Each of the Display Diagnostics is accessed from this that do not turn on will appear as black dots on the
screen. After each diagnostic is performed, return to this display. If any black dots appear, first ascertain it is
screen, from which the next diagnostic can be selected. not caused by dirt that is lodged between the display
Refer to description of Display operation in Sections 5 surface and the protective plastic cover. It is normal
through 7 of this book. for a small number of randomly spaced pixels to not
illuminate. It is not necessary to replace the display
PROCEDURE if a small number of black dots appear. They will not
be visible on the normal screens displayed outside
1. Press the appropriate keypad key to perform the
of this diagnostic mode. However, large black areas
desired test from the list below.
would be indicative of a defective display.
2. Press the CANCEL (X) or ENTER (✔) key to ter-
• All Green - This test verifies the operation of all of
minate test and return to DISPLAY TEST MAIN
the green pixels. All of the green pixels are turned
screen, from which another test can be selected.
on to create a completely green screen. Refer to
3. When all the desired tests have been performed, description of “All Red” test above.
press the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the
• All Blue - This test verifies the operation of all of
MAIN DIAGNOSTICS screen.
the blue pixels. All of the blue pixels are turned on to
• Bit Patterns - This test is used to detect jitter and create a completely blue screen. Refer to description
alignment defects. It verifies proper operation and of “All Red” test above.
compatibility of the Microboard Display Controller • All White - This test verifies the display’s ability
with the display. Four vertical bars of green, dark to turn on all pixels to display a completely white
blue, light blue and yellow, outlined by a red border screen. Any pixel that does not turn on will appear
are displayed. If the vertical bars are not stable or as a black dot. Refer to description of “All Red” test
straight, or the red border is not completely visible, above.
then either the Microboard Program Jumpers are not • All Black - This test verifies the display’s ability
configured correctly for the installed display or the to turn off all pixels to display a completely black
Microboard Display controller is defective. Refer screen. Any pixel that does not turn off will appear as
to Figure 66. a red, green, blue or white dot. Refer to description
• All Red - This test verifies the operation of all of “All Red” test above.
the red pixels. All of the red pixels are turned on
to create a completely red screen. Any red pixels
24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 155
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

00338VIP
FIG. 68 – BIT PATTERNS TEST SCREEN

TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Microboard:
a. With the “All Red” test selected, the voltage at
If any of the above tests do not perform correctly as de- Microboard J5-6 through J5-11 (Red drivers bits
scribed above, perform the applicable procedure below: 0-5), as measured to Gnd, should be > 3.0VDC. If
Test Failed: not, the Microboard is defective.
Bit Patterns - If the vertical bars are not straight or b. With the “All Green” test selected, the voltage
if the red border is not completely visible, either the at Microboard J5-13 through J5-18 (Green drivers
Microboard Program Jumpers are not configured cor- bits 0-5), as measured to Gnd, should be >3.0VDC.
rectly or for the installed Display or the Microboard is If not, the Microboard is defective.
defective. c. With the “All Blue” test selected, the voltage at
Microboard J5-20 through J5-25 (Blue drivers bits
All Red, All Green, All Blue, All White or All 0-5), as measured to Grid, should be >3.0VDC. If
Black: not, the Microboard is defective.
If these tests do not produce appropriate solid color d. With the “All White” test selected, the voltage
screens, the Display Ribbon Cable, Display Interface at Microboard J5-6 through J5-11, J5-13 through
Board, Microboard or Display could be defective. To J5-18 and J5-20 through J5-25 should be >3.0VDC.
locate the defective component perform tests in the If not, the Microboard is defective.
following order:
e. With the “All Black” test selected, the voltage
at Microboard J5-6 through J5-1 1, J5-13 Board.
1. Display Ribbon Cable: An through J5-18 and J5-20 through J25 should be
Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on <1.0VDC. If not, the Microboard is defective.
all conductors in the ribbon cable. An open circuit 4. Display:
would indicate the ribbon cable is defective.
If the Display Ribbon Cable, Display Interface
2. Display Interface Board: Board and Microboard check OK per the above
Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on all procedures, the Display is most likely the cause of
conductors of the Interface Board. An open circuit the problem.
would indicate the Interface Board is defective.

156 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SERIAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS

00339VIP
FIG. 69 – SERIAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TEST SCREEN

This diagnostic is used to verify correct operation of the From To

Serial Data Ports. There is a test for each of the five Serial COM 2 J13-5 (TX) J13-3 (RX)
Data Ports. Each RS-232 port (COM 1, 2 and 4b) is tested J13-7 (DTR) J13-1(DCD) & J13-2 (DSR)
by transmitting serial test data from outputs to inputs of J13-4 (RTS) J13-6 (CTS) & J13-8 (RI)
each port. Both the transmit and receive functions as well
as the control lines are tested. The RS-485 ports (COM RS-485 From To
3 and 4a) are tested by transmitting serial test data from (COM J12-3 (+) J11-3 (+)
one RS-485 port to another. The TX/RX opto-coupled 3 & 4a) J12-2 (-) J11-2 (-)
port (COM 5) is tested by transmitting serial test data
Microboard Program Jumper JP27 must be installed
from the TX output to the RX input. If the received data
in position 1 & 2.
matches the transmitted data, PASS is displayed, indicat-
ing the serial port is OK. Otherwise, FAIL is displayed,
From To
indicating the serial port is defective. Prior to perform-
COM 4b J2-7 (GTX) J2-6 (GRX)
ing each test, the Service Technician must install a wire
loop-back connection as described below. Refer to Sec- Microboard Program Jumper JP27 must be installed
tion 3 and Figure 11 of this book for description of the in position 2 & 3.
Serial data Ports.
From To
PROCEDURE
COM 5 J15-1 (TX) J15-4
1. Using small gauge wire, fabricate loop-back con-
J15-2 (RX) J15-5
nections and install as follows for each port to be
tested. Failure to install the loop-back connection J15-3 (Common) J15-6
or configure the Microboard Program jumper as Make individual wire connections or use YORK loop-
noted will result in a FAIL outcome for the test. around diagnostic connector 025-33778-000 as depicted
in Figure 68 This connector is available from the YORK
From To Parts Distribution Center.
COM 1 J2-4 (TX) J2-3 (RX)
J2-5 (DTR) J2-2 (DSR) 24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 157
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

2. After connecting appropriate loop-back connec- DTR (J13-7) is set to a Logic High and read at DSR
tions above, press the appropriate key to initiate (J13-2) & DCD (J13-1). RTS (J13-4) is set to a
the desired test. An LED will illuminate indicating Logic High and read at CTS (J13-6) & R1 (J13-8).
the test is in progress. If it is desired to terminate If any test fails, COM 2 tests are terminated.
the test, press the CANCEL TEST key. Test data is RS-485 (COM 3 & 4a) – Test data is sent from
sent from an output to an input as described below. COM 3 RS-485 port to COM 4a RS-485 Port at
At the completion of each test, if the data received 19200 Baud. Test data is then sent from COM 4a to
matches the data sent, the Serial Port operates COM 3 at the same rate. If either test fails, RS-485
properly and PASS is displayed. Otherwise, FAIL tests are terminated.
is displayed, indicating the Serial Port is defective.
COM 4b – Test data is sent from GTX (J2-7) to
A FAIL result would be indicative of a defective
GRX (J2-6) at 19200 Baud.
Microboard. The following is a description of each
test. COM 5 – Test data is sent from TX (J15-1) to J15-4
at 1200 Baud. This output turns the Microboard’s
COM 1 – Two tests are performed. Test data is
loop-around test Transistor on and off, applying
sent from TX (J2-4) to RX (J2-3) at 9600 Baud
0/+5VDC pulses from J15-5 to RX (J15-2) input.
and DTR (J2-5) is set to a Logic High level and
read at DSR (J2-2). If any test fails, COM 1 tests 3. After all desired tests have been performed, press
are terminated. the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the MAIN
DIAGNOSTICS Screen.
COM 2 – Three tests are performed. Test data is
sent from TX (J13-5) to RX (J13-3) at 19200 Baud.

TRANSMIT
J15
TX
1 1
RX
2 2
COMMON
3 3
IN
4 4
RECEIVE OUT
5 5
6 6
+5VDC

LOOP-AROUND DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR

YORK PIN 025-33778-000
INSTALL TO PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC
+5VDC

LOOP-AROUND TEST

LD04250

FIG. 70 – MICROBOARD - COM 5 SERIAL DATA PORT

158 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS

00340VIP
FIG. 71 – DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TEST SCREEN

This diagnostic is used to analyze the digital inputs and nected to these terminals. Tables 1 and 2 list the
outputs of the Microboard. Refer to description of I/O functions of the Program Jumpers and Switches.
Board in Section 4 of this book. 2. With 115VAC applied to a particular I/O Board
Digital Input, the applicable LED should be il-
The state of each Microboard Digital Input, Program luminated. If the LED is not illuminated, perform
Jumper and Program DIP Switch, as interpreted by the appropriate Troubleshooting procedure below.
Microboard, is depicted by an LED. If the Microboard
3. With 0VAC applied to a particular I/O Board Digital
interprets its input as being at a Logic Low (<1.0VDC)
Input, the applicable LED should be extinguished.
level, the LED is illuminated. If interpreted as being
If the LED is not extinguished, perform appropriate
at a Logic High (>4.0VDC) level, the LED is extin-
Troubleshooting procedure below.
guished.
4. If a Program Jumper is present, the applicable
The state of the Microboard’s intended drive signals LED should be extinguished. If the LED is not
to each of the Relays on the I/O Board is depicted by extinguished, the Microboard is defective.
an LED. If the intended output is a Logic Low level 5. If a Program Jumper is not present, the applicable
(<1.0VDC), the LED is illuminated. If the intended LED should be illuminated. If the LED is not il-
output is a Logic High level (>10.0VDC), the LED is luminated, the Microboard is defective.
extinguished. Logic Low outputs energize the Relays. 6. If a Program Switch (DIP) is in the ON position, the
Logic High outputs de-energize the Relays. The state of applicable LED should be illuminated. If the LED
any output can be manually set to either the ENABLED is not illuminated, the Microboard is defective.
(Logic Low) or DISABLED (Logic High) state. 7. If the Program Switch (DIP) is in the OFF position,
the applicable LED should be extinguished. If the
PROCEDURE LED is not extinguished, the Microboard is de-
fective.
Digital Inputs: 8. When all desired tests have been performed, press
1. The Digital Inputs are listed on this screen ac- DIAGNOSTICS key to return to MAIN DIAG-
cording to a.) Terminal number on the I/O Board NOSTICS Screen.
and b.) Microboard Program Jumpers and Program
DIP Switches. Figure 14 shows the devices con- 24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 159
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

Digital Outputs: component is found during any of the following steps,

replace the component as instructed and repeat the digital
Inputs Procedure above to determine if the problem has
1. IMPORTANT! - The following steps cannot be
been resolved.
performed until the Motor Controller connection
between TB6-1 and TB6-53 has been removed. 1. Remove 1/0 Board ribbon cable. Using an Ohm-
This connection could be a jumper or it could be meter, perform a continuity check on I/O Board
a connection from external devices in the starter. ribbon cable J1-21 to J19-21, J1-22 to J19-22 and
The Program will prevent manual control of Digital applicable output pin of function that failed in Pro-
Output devices until this connection is removed. cedure above. If an open circuit is detected, replace
ribbon cable. Otherwise, install ribbon cable and
2. The Digital Outputs are listed on this Screen ac-
proceed to next step.
cording to Relay and Triac number (KI, Q3, etc).
Figure 17 shows the external devices that are con- 2. Measure the +5VDC supply voltage to the 1/0
nected to these Relays and Triacs and the functions Board on 1/0 Board between J1-21 and J1-22.
of each one. If >4.5VDC, proceed to next step. If < 4.5VDC,
disconnect ribbon cable at I/O Board J1 and repeat
3. Press SELECT key. An arrow will appear adjacent
the measurement at J1. If <4.5VDC, replace the
to Relay KO.
Microboard. Re-install the ribbon cable.
4. Select a relay or triac for manual control by using
3. With 115VAC (± 10%) applied to the I/O Board
the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the arrow adjacent to
digital input that failed in Procedure above, the ap-
the desired device.
plicable I/O Board output at J1 should be at a Logic
5. Press the ENABLE OUTPUT key to enable the low level (<1.0VDC). If it is >1.0VDC, replace the
selected output. The LED adjacent to the selected I/O Board. If the output is at a Logic Low level, the
output should illuminate. If it does not, perform applicable LED should be illuminated. If the LED
KEYPAD Diagnostics test. If a relay is selected, is not illuminated, replace the Microboard.
it should energize, closing its contacts. If a triac
4. With 0VAC applied to the I/O Board digital input
is selected, it will turn on, energizing the device it
that failed in Procedure above, the applicable I/O
is connected to. If the relay does not energize or
Board output at J1 should be at a Logic High level
triac does not turn on, perform appropriate trouble-
(>4.OVDC). If it is <4.OVDC, replace the 1/0
shooting procedure below.
Board. If the output is at a Logic High level, the
6. Press the DISABLE OUTPUT key to disable the applicable LED should be extinguished. If it is not
selected output. The LED adjacent to the selected extinguished, replace the Microboard.
output should extinguish. If it does not, perform
KEYPAD diagnostic test. If a relay is selected, it Digital Outputs Troubleshooting:
should de-energize, opening its contacts. If a triac
is selected, it will turn off, de-energizing the device If any of the Digital outputs tests fail to perform as de-
it is connected to. If relay does not de-energize or scribed above, perform the following steps in sequence.
triac does not turn off, perform appropriate trou- Refer to Figure 17 and applicable wiring diagram ref-
bleshooting procedure below. erenced at the beginning of Section 23. If a defective
7. When all desired tests have been performed, press component is found during any of the steps, replace the
DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the MAIN DIAG- component as instructed and repeat the Procedure above
NOSTICS Screen. to determine if the problem has been resolved.
8. Install Motor Controller connection from TB6-I to 1. Remove I/O Board ribbon cable. Using an Ohm-
TB6-53 removed in step 1. meter, perform a continuity test on the cable J1-25 to
J19-25, J1-26 to J19-26 and applicable output pin of
Digital Inputs Troubleshooting: function that failed in Procedure above. If an open
circuit is detected, replace ribbon cable. Otherwise,
If any of the Digital Inputs tests fail to perform as de- install ribbon cable and proceed to next step.
scribed above, perform the following steps in sequence. 2. Measure the +12VDC supply voltage to the I/O
Refer to Figure 14 and applicable wiring diagram ref- Board on I/O Board between J1-26 (+12VDC) and
erenced at the beginning of Section 23. If a defective J1-25 (Gnd). If >11.0VDC, proceed to next step. If

160 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

<11.0VDC, disconnect ribbon cable at I/O Board J1 should be open. If they are not open, replace the
and repeat measurement at JI. If <11.0VDC, replace I/O Board. If it is <10.0VDC, remove the ribbon
the Microboard. Re-install the ribbon cable. cable from J1 of the I/O Board. On the I/O Board,
3. Using the Digital Outputs Procedure above, se- measure the resistance from J1-26 to the appro-
lect the output that failed the digital Output test priate pin of J1 on the I/O Board for the selected
above. relay. If the resistance is >100 Ohms, replace the
I/O Board. If the resistance is <100 Ohms, replace
4. Press ENABLE OUTPUT key. The LED adjacent
the Microboard.
to the selected output will illuminate. The appro-
priate Microboard output pin at J19 for the selected b. If a Triac is selected as the output, the appropriate
output should be at a Logic Low level (<1.0VDC). Microboard output pin at J19 for the selected output
If it is >1.0VDC, replace the Microboard. With the should be at a Logic High (>10.0VDC) level. If it
output at a Logic Low, the following should oc- is <10.0VDC, replace the Microboard. With the
cur: output at a Logic High level, the Triac should be
turned off. If the Triac has not turned off, replace
a. If a Relay is selected as the output, the contacts
the I/O Board. See note 1 below for Triac testing.
of the relay should be closed. If they are not closed,
replace the I/O Board.
Notes:
b. If a Triac is selected as the output, the Triac
1. The load (actuator) must be connected across the
should be turned on. If the Triac has not turned on,
Triac to determine the on/off state of the Triac.
replace the I/O Board. See note 1 below for Triac
The on/off state of the Triac can be determined
testing.
by measuring across the device (for example,
5. Press DISABLE OUTPUT key. The LED adjacent TB1-3 to TB1-59 or TB1-58 to TB1-59) with an
to the selected output will extinguish. AC Voltmeter. If the Triac is turned on, the volt-
a. If a Relay is selected as the output, the appropriate age will be <10VAC. If the Triac is turned off, the
Microboard output pin at J19 for the selected output voltage will be >100VAC (Slide Valve actuator)
should be at a Logic High (>10.0VDC) level. With or >20VAC (PRV, Hot Gas or Refrigerant Level
the output at a Logic High level, the relay contacts Control actuator).

24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 161
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

ANALOG INPUTS TEST

00341VIP
FIG. 72 – ANALOG INPUTS TEST SCREEN

This diagnostic is used to analyze the Analog Inputs to 2 - Return Chilled Liquid Temperature
the Microboard. The voltage level of each Analog in- 3 - Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
put, as interpreted by the Microboard, is displayed. The 4 - Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
“Counts” listed for each parameter is the Analog-to-Dig-
5 - Drop Leg Refrigerant Temperature
ital (A/D) converter value and is for manufacturing and
engineering use only. 6 - Discharge Temperature
7 - Oil Temperature
If the chiller is shutting down on an Analog Safety or 8 - Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature
is prevented from starting because of an Analog input,
9 - Condenser Pressure
there is probably an Analog Input problem. This Screen
can be used in the investigation of this problem. 10 - Evaporator Pressure
11 - Sump Oil Pressure
Important! This test does not apply to the Leaving 12 - Pump Oil Pressure
Chilled Liquid Temperature analog input, Proximity 13 - Proximity Probe DC Voltage Reference
Probe DC Voltage reference or a 0-10VDC Remote (Not applicable to “P” compressors and style F
Setpoint input at channels 27 and 28. and later chillers with “G” and “H5-8” compres
sors)
The following is a list of the Analog inputs displayed.
Refer to the appropriate Section of this book for an ex- 14 - Proximity Probe Position (Not applicable to “P”
planation of each: Pressure Transducers - Section 17, compressors and style F and later chillers with
Thermistors - Section 18, Proximity Probe - Section “G” and “H5-8” compressors)
13, Refrigerant Level Control - Section 14, Solid State 15 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 0
Starter (Mod “A” only) - Section 11 and Current Module 16 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 1
(CM-2) - Section 10. 17 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 2
Channel 18 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 3
0 - +2.5VDC Analog supply voltage reference. 19 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 4
Microboard TP6.
20 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 5
1 - Not Used
21 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 6

162 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

22 - Solid State Starter/CM-2 MUX output Channel 7 Select the desired channel by pressing the SELECT
23 - Refrigerant Level Position CHANNEL key and using the ▲ and ▼ keys to
place the arrow head next to the desired channel.
24 - Proximity Probe High Speed DrainTemperature
Then, freeze the address of that channel to the Solid
(except “P” Compressors)
State Starter or CM-2 MUX. Then measure MUX
(Not applicable to chillers equipped with Program version output at Microboard J10-6 (signal) to J10-5 (Gnd).
C.MLM.01.03 or higher) When completed, press CANCEL FREEZE key.
25 - Not Used • Channels 27, 28:
26 - Not Used
IMPORTANT! This procedure only applies to
27 - Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
4-20mA inputs. It does not apply to 0-10VDC in-
Setpoint (0-20mA or 4-20mA)
puts. Using a Voltmeter, measure the Remote Cur-
28 - Remote Current Limit Setpoint (0-20mA or
rent Limit setpoint input at J22-2 (signal) or Remote
4-20mA)
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint input
29 - Condenser Flow Sensor (style F and later chillers) at J22-4 (signal) to J22-5 (Gnd).
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
4. Compare the measured value in the previous step
later).
with the value displayed on the Analog Inputs
30 - Evaporator Flow Sensor (style F and later chillers) Screen for that value.
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and
5. If the measured value is not within +15% of the dis-
later)
played value, replace the Microboard. Otherwise,
proceed to the troubleshooting procedure below to
Procedure:
find the cause of the problem.
1. From the chart above, select the analog input that 6. When all desired tests have been performed, press
is malfunctioning. All inputs except channel 0, 15 DIAGNOSTICS key to return the MAIN DIAG-
through 22, 27 and 28 are sensors that connect di- NOSTICS Screen.
rectly to the Microboard via shielded cable. Channel
0 is a reference voltage for the Analog circuits on Troubleshooting :
the Microboard. Channels 15 through 22 are mul-
tiplexed outputs from the Solid State Starter (Solid • All Channels except 0, 1, 15-22, 27, 28:
Sate Starter applications) or CM-2 Current Module
1. Disconnect both ends of the cable of the Analog
(Electro-Mechanical Starter applications). Channels
input that is malfunctioning. Using an Ohmmeter,
27 and 28 are Remote Setpoint inputs used in Analog
perform a continuity test on all conductors in the
Remote mode.
cable. An open circuit would indicate the cable is
2. Refer to Wiring Diagrams listed in front of this Section defective.
to identify the device that performs this function and
2. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +12VDC supply
the jack and pin connection to the Microboard.
voltage input at the Microboard J1-3 (+12VDC) to
3. • Channel 0: J1-2 (Gnd). If voltage is < 11.5VDC, check wiring
Using a Voltmeter, measure the voltage between to Power Supply. If wiring is OK, the Power supply
Microboard TP6 (+2.5VDC) and TP1 (Gnd). is most likely defective.
Compare this measured value to the displayed 3. Using a Voltmeter, measure the supply voltage
value. If the value is not within +10%, replace the (+5VDC, +1 2VDC or +24VDC) to the sensor. If
Microboard. voltage is not within +10% of specified voltage,
• All channels except 0, 1, 15-22: disconnect J7, J8 and J9 from the Microboard.
This disconnects all analog devices from the
Using a Voltmeter, measure the analog input to the
Microboard. If the voltage increases to the cor-
Microboard. Make the measurement between the
rect level, a Thermistor or Transducer is shorted.
device output and Ground connection to the device.
Locate the shorted device and replace. If, after
For example, measure the output of the Evaporator
disconnecting the connectors the supply voltage
Transducer at Microboard J8-18 (signal) to J8-9
is still not within 10% of the specified value, the
(Gnd).
voltage supply source (Microboard or Power Sup-
• Channels 15-22: ply) is most likely defective.
24
YORK INTERNATIONAL 163
 Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

4. Verify sensor accuracy using appropriate test de- 5. Press CANCEL FREEZE key.
vice. Replace sensor if necessary.
• Channels 27, 28:
1. Refer to Table 1 “Microboard Program Jumpers”
• Channels 15 - 22: and verify Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24 are
1. Disconnect both ends of ribbon cable connected configured correctly for the type of input (0-10VDC
to Microboard J10. Using an Ohmmeter, perform or 4-20mA).
a continuity test on all conductors in the cable. An 2. Disconnect both ends of the cable of the remote
open circuit would indicate the cable is defective. input that is malfunctioning. Using an Ohmmeter,
2. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +12VDC supply perform a continuity check on all conductors in the
voltage input at the Microboard J1-3 (+12VDC) to cable. An open circuit would indicate the cable is
J1-2 (Gnd). If voltage is <11.5VDC, check wiring defective.
to Power Supply. If wiring is OK, the Power Supply 3. If steps are OK, problem most likely is in the remote
is most likely defective. device that supplies the remote signal.
3. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +5VDC supply
voltage to the Solid State Starter Logic Board or
CM-2 Board. Make measurement at Microboard
J10-4(+5VDC) to J10-5 (Gnd). If voltage is
<4.5VDC, replace the Microboard.
4. Using a Voltmeter, verify the correct address is
being sent from the Microboard to the Solid State
Starter Logic Board or CM-2 Board. Freeze ad-
dress as described above. If the address is correct,
the Solid State Starter Logic Board or CM-2 Board
or input devices to these boards is most likely the
cause of the problem. If address is not correct, the
Microboard is most likely the cause of the prob-
lem.

164 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 25
SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
Use the following checklist during commissioning to as- Verify the following Setpoints:
sure all Setpoints have been programmed to the desired ____ Level Setpoint*
value and all calibrations have been performed. The ____ Control Period*
programming of some of the Setpoints require a SER-
____ Proportional Limit Open*
VICE access level. To assure access to all Setpoints,
login at SERVICE access level before beginning. The ____ Proportional Limit Close*
Setpoints are grouped under the Display Screen in which ____ Rate Limit Open*
they appear. The indented screens are subscreens of the ____ Rate Limit Close*
numbered screens and are accessed from the numbered ____ Manual or Auto control (as desired)
screens. An explanation of each setpoint or Calibration ____ Verify Refrigerant Level Sensor calibration
Procedure below is contained in the reference document
listed in parenthesis adjacent to each item. If any of the 4. COMPRESSOR Screen: (160.54-M1)
Setpoints have to be changed, use the standard program- ____ Select Pre-rotation Vanes Manual or Auto
ming procedures in Operation Manual Form 160.54-O1. control.
Thresholds, values and calibrations of items marked with PROXIMITY PROBE CALIBRATION Screen
an asterisk “*” have been determined and entered/set at (except “P” Compressors):
the YORK Factory at the time of manufacture. ____ Verify that a Proximity Probe Reference
1. PROGRAM JUMPERS/SWITCHES: Position* had been entered.
(160.54-M1) PRE-ROTATION VANES CALIBRATE
____ Verify Microboard Program Jumpers and Screen:
Program Switches are configured appropriately. ____ Perform Pre-rotation Vanes calibration
(compressor motor VSD and Hot Gas Bypass ap-
2. EVAPORATOR Screen: (160.54-O1) plications only)
Enter the following Setpoints: VSD TUNING Screen:
____ Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp (except ISN ____ Select Auto or Manual compressor motor
Remote mode) frequency control (compressor motor VSD appli-
____ Remote Leaving Chilled Liq uid Temp cations only)
Setpoint Range (except ISN Remote mode)
____ Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown 5. HOT GAS BYPASS Screen: (160.54-M1)
temperature
If chiller is equipped with optional Hot Gas Bypass,
____ Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown enable operation on the OPERATIONS screen and
Restart temperature enter the following setpoints:
____ Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp control Sensi- ____ Maximum Open (Flash Memory Card ver-
tivity (160.54-M1) sion C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
____ Brine Low Evaporator Pressure Cutout thresh-
____ Surge Sensitivity (moved to Surge Pro-
old* (160.54-M1)
____ Smart Freeze Protection On/Off (160.54-
tection Screen in Flash Memory Card version 25
C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
M1)
____ Hold Period
____ Refrigerant Temp sensor Enable/Disable
____ Close Percentage
(160.54-M1)
____ Minimum Load
3. CONDENSER Screen: (160.54-M1) ____ Manual or Auto Control, as desired
____ Enter the High Pressure Limit/Warning
threshold Setpoint
6. SURGE PROTECTION Screen: (160.54-M1)
____ Drop Leg refrigerant Temp Sensor Enable/
( Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx
Disable
and later)
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL/
TUNING Screen: (160.54-M1)
YORK INTERNATIONAL 165
 System Commissioning Checklist
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

____ Enable/Disable Excess Surge Shutdown feature. Current Module:

____ Enable/Disable Extended Run feature ____ Verify Switch S1 (Ydelta/57% or all others)
____ Count Window setting*
____ Count Limit ____ Verify Pot R16 (LRA/FLA ratio) setting*
____ Surge Sensitivity
____ Verify slide bar resistor “RES” setting*
____ Verify 105% FLA calibration*
7. OIL SUMP Screen: (160.54-M1) ____ Verify 100% FLA display*
____ Standby Lubrication Enable/Disable
Variable Speed Drive applications: (160.54-M1 and
If chiller is equipped with the Oil Pump Variable 160.00-M1)
speed Drive, verify the following Setpoints have
____ KWH Reset
been entered:
____ Oil Pressure Setpoint* VSD DETAILS Screen:
____ Control Period* ____ Set chiller Full Load amps (FLA) value by
____ Manual or Auto control (as desired) adjusting Potentiometer on VSD Logic Board

8. MOTOR Screen: ADAPTIVE CAPACITY CONTROL(ACC)

____ Enter the desired Current Limit Setpoint DETAILS Screen:
(160.54-O1) ____ Surge Map Auto Print Enable/Disable
____ Enter the desired Pulldown Demand Limit The following Setpoints should not be changed
and Time Setpoint (160.54-O1) unless instructed by YORK Factory.
____ Surge Margin adjust*
Solid State Starter Applications: (160.54-M1)
____ Stability Limit*
Mod “B” Solid State Starter:
9 . SETPOINTS Screen: (160.54-O1)
Verify the following Setpoints have been
programmed: With the exception of the “Remote Analog Input
____ Full Load Amps* Range”, the setpoints listed on the SETPOINTS
Screen have already been programmed above on
____ Start Current*
Previous Screens. The values shown reflect the pre-
____ Supply Voltage Range* viously programmed values. However, the setpoints
____ Enable Open SCR Detection listed here can be changed on this screen if desired.
____ Enable Shorted SCR Detection (Flash Mem- This screen is used primarily as a central location
ory Card version C.MLM.01.04.xxx and later) from which most setpoints can be programmed. If it
____ KWH Reset is not desired to change any of the listed setpoints,
proceed to the SETUP Screen below.
Mod “A” Solid State Starter: ____ Remote Analog Input Range
Verify the following Setpoints have been SETUP Screen:
programmed:
____ Enable Clock
____ Full Load Amps*
____ Enter CLOCK Time and Date
____ Supply Voltage Range*
____ Current Unbalance Check - Enable or Dis- ____ Select 12 or 24 hour display mode
able* ____ The state of Program Jumpers/Switches that
affect Chiller operation are shown on the setup
Logic Board: Screen. These were configured in step 1 above.
____ Verify location of 300V/600V Jumper* Refer to Table 1 and 2 of Service Manual 160.54-
____ Verify Start Current calibration* M1 if it is desired to change them.
____ Verify 105% FLA calibration* SCHEDULE Screen:
Electro-Mechanical Starter applications: ____ Enable or Disable Daily start/stop schedule
(160.54-M1) as required.

166 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

____ Enter chiller START/STOP schedule if ____ Automatic print logging Enable/disable
required. ____ Automatic printer logging start time
USER Screen: ____ Automatic print logging interval
____ Select desired Display language ____ Printer type
____ Select desired Display units; ENGLISH or ____ Report type; STATUS, SETPOINTS,
METRIC SCHEDULE or SALES ORDER
____ If desired, establish custom USER ID’s and
PASSWORDS (160.54-M1) SALES ORDER Screen:
____ Enter system commissioning date
COMMS Screen:
If Modem and or Printer is connected to the Microboard OPERATIONS Screen: (160.54-M1)
Serial data ports, enter the following parameters as re- ____ Select desired Control Source (operating
quired for each device connected: mode); LOCAL, ISN Remote, DIGITAL Remote
____ Baud rate or ANALOG Remote
____ Number of data bits ____ Refrigerant Level Control operation Enable/
____ Number of stop bits Disable
____ Parity ____ Hot Gas Bypass Control (optional) Enable/
Enter appropriate number for Modem, Printer or ISN Disable
Remote application: ____ Edit Regional phone number if necessary
____ Chiller ID (identification) (Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx
and later)
PRINTER Screen:
If Printer is connected to Microboard serial ports, enter ____ Enter Local phone number (Flash Memory
the following: Card version C.MLM.01.05.xxx and later)
____ Enter Chiller Style/Compressor (Flash Mem-
ory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later)
____ Enter Flow Sensor type (Flash Memory Card
version C.MLM.01.08.xxx and later).

25

YORK INTERNATIONAL 167

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SECTION 26
SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS / BULLETINS

SI0006 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MAY 2001

General
Beginning May 2001, an enhanced Flash Memory Card will be supplied with new production Nema 1-4 and CE
chillers. New features are outlined below and are also included in YORK Operation Manual 160.54-O1 and Ser-
vice Manual 160.54-M1.
Flash Memory Card versions and part numbers are applied as follows:
• Nema 1-4 Chillers C.MLM.01.05A.102 (031-01797-001)
• CE Chillers C.MLM.01.05A.203 (031-01797-002)

The enhanced flash cards are also available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center for retrofit to existing
chillers.

Surge Protection
The Surge protection feature detects surge events and provides a running count of the events that occur over the
lifetime of the chiller. An excess surge threshold can be programmed to detect excessive surging. If excess surg-
ing is detected, it can be configured to shutdown the chiller or initiate a special surge correction/avoidance mode
or simply display a warning message. A Surge Protection display Screen displays all parameters relevant to this
feature.

Trend Screen – Triggered Chart

A “TRIGGERED” chart can now be created. This is in addition to the ONE SCREEN and CONTINUOUS chart
types that can be created in previous Flash Memory Card versions. With the TRIGGERED chart type, data col-
lection can be set to START or STOP based upon the status of up to two Operator selected conditions (TRIG-
GERS) and a selected TRIGGER DELAY. If START is selected, data collection will not begin until all triggers
have been satisfied and any selected TRIGGER DELAY has elapsed. Data collection will stop at the completion
of one screen of data. If STOP is selected, data collection will begin when manually initiated, and will stop when
all triggers have been satisfied and any selected TRIGGER DELAY has elapsed.

This feature is a valuable troubleshooting tool for Service technicians. It allows an event that occurs during unat-
tended hours to be captured for viewing at a later time. The trigger event results in a screen of frozen trend data
that will remain on the screen until manually cleared.

Display of Service Phone Numbers

Two service phone numbers (Regional and Local), with labels, can be displayed on the OPERATIONS Screen.
The Default value for the Regional number is the North American Toll Free number. However, the label and num-
ber can be changed to any desired value. The Local label and number can also be entered.

Hot Gas Bypass Enhancement

In previous Flash Memory Card versions, when the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature decreased to the “Min-
imum Load” setpoint, the Hot Gas Valve was opened to the 100% position. In this version, the valve will be
opened to the position programmed as the “Maximum Open” setpoint (25% to 100%). This allows for better
control of the minimum load conditions. After the Minimum Load operation is activated, the valve will be closed
proportionately as the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature increases to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
Setpoint.

168 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0006 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MAY 2001 (CONT'D)

“Evaporator-Transducer or Temperature Sensor” Safety Shutdown

In Previous Flash Memory Card versions, the conditions for this safety shutdown were checked after the first 10
minutes of chiller run. Under certain operating conditions this would result in unnecessary shutdowns. In this ver-
sion, in addition to the previous criteria, the shutdown conditions are not checked unless Smart Freeze is enabled
and the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature RT7 (if enabled) or Evaporator Saturation Temperature (derived from
the evaporator pressure transducer) is < 32º F.

Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive

1. The compressor motor VSD phase A, B and C output current to the motor is now displayed on the VSD Tun-
ing Screen.
2. The new 351HP VSD is supported. In this model, the three Inverter Assemblies are mounted on a single Base-
plate instead of three individual Heatsink Assemblies, as in other models. Therefore, the VSD Details Screen
and the Harmonic Filter Details Screen display a single Baseplate Temperature instead of the Phase A, B and
C Temperatures displayed on other models.

Oil Pump Variable Speed Drive

In previous Flash Memory Card versions, the oil pump VSD starts at 25Hz when turned on during “System
Prelube”. In this version, it starts at 45Hz. This provides greater reliability in achieving the required 45 PSID
Target Oil Pressure at chiller start.

26

YORK INTERNATIONAL 169

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0019 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2002

General
Beginning March 2002, an enhanced Flash Memory Card will be supplied in new production YK Nema 1-4 and
CE chillers. The new features are outlined below.

The Flash Memory Card versions and part numbers are as follows:
• Nema 1-4 chillers (except “P” compressors).............C.MLM.01.06.100 (031-01797-001)
• CE chillers (except “P” compressors)........................C.MLM.01.06.200 (031-01797-002)
• Nema 1-4 chillers (“P” compressors) ........................C.MLM.04.02.100 (031-02073-001)
• CE chillers (“P” compressors) ...................................C.MLM.04.02.200 (031-02073-002)

These versions are also available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center for retrofit to existing chillers.

Operator Soft Shutdown

This feature allows an Operator (logged in at Operator Access Level, or higher) to manually initiate a soft shutdown
by closing the Pre-rotation Vanes prior to shutting down the chiller. This reduces compressor bearing wear by elimi-
nating compressor backspin at shutdown.

While the chiller is running, a SOFT SHUTDOWN key is available on the Home Screen (when Access Level is
Operator or higher). Pressing this key causes the Pre-rotation Vanes to be driven fully closed. While they are clos-
ing, “Vanes Closing Before Shutdown” is displayed on the System Status line. “Local Stop” is displayed on the
System Details line. When the Vane Motor Switch (VMS) closes, indicating the Vanes have fully closed (or 3.5
minutes have elapsed, whichever occurs first), the Start Signal is removed from the Starter and a normal Coastdown
is performed.

While the Vanes are closing during the Soft Shutdown, if a standard Local Stop is initiated with the front panel Rocker
Switch, or if any faults other than the following occur, the Soft Shutdown is terminated and it will immediately enter
a normal Coastdown period:
• “Leaving Chilled Liquid – Low Temperature”
• “Remote Stop”
• “Multi-unit Cycling – Contacts Open”
• “System Cycling – Contacts Open”
• “Control Panel – Schedule”

Following an Operator initiated Soft Shutdown, the front panel Rocker Switch must be placed in the Stop/Reset
position and then to the Start position in order to start the chiller after a Soft Shutdown has been performed.

Record Setpoint Changes

This feature provides a record of the last 75 Setpoint changes. The date and time the Setpoint was changed, the new
Setpoint value and the Access Level and User ID used to make the change are stored in the BRAM. The Security
Log Screen and the Security Log Details Screen display levels of this information. Both screens are available in
Service Access level or higher.

On the Security Log Screen, accessible from the History Screen, the Setpoint, Setpoint Category and new Setpoint
value are listed and numbered in reverse order in which they were changed. The most recent is listed as number
1; the next most recent as number 2, etc. A PRINT key allows printing this entire list. Since 15 changes can be
displayed at one time, multiple pages could be necessary to display all the changes. PAGE-UP and PAGE-DOWN
keys are provided to view the entire list. If it is desired to view the details of a particular Setpoint change, select the
Setpoint change number with the LOG ENTRY key and then press the VIEW DETAILS key. This moves to the
SECURITY LOG DETAILS Screen.
170 YORK INTERNATIONAL
 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0019 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2002 (CONT'D)

The SECURITY LOG DETAILS Screen, accessible from the SECURITY LOG Screen, displays the following
Setpoint change details. The Setpoint is selected from the list on the Security Log Screen as explained in the previ-
ous paragraph. A PRINT key is provided to print this information.
• Setpoint Category
• Setpoint
• Date and time of change
• Access Level and User ID used to make the change
• Old Value
• New Value

The following Setpoint changes are not logged:

• Clock Mode
• Custom Screen slot numbers
• Advanced Diagnostics communication port tests
• Advanced Diagnostics secondary multiplexer freeze
• Soft shutdown initiated by operator
• System language
• Display units
• Any Print report
• Cancel any print report
• Schedule clear
• Schedule repeat exception days
• Schedule start and stop times
• Log in/log out
• User attributes for ID, Password and Level
• Trend start/stop
• Trend slot numbers, minimums and maximums
• Trend trigger data
• Trend print mode
• Trend view mode

Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Control Sensitivity Setpoint

In addition to the NORMAL and 50% selections provided in previous software versions, a 30% selection has been
added to this version. This provides less overall Pre-rotation Vane (PRV) movement than the 50% selection by lim-
iting the longest allowed pulse to 3.5 seconds. This selection can used when the 50% selection does not reduce the
PRV instability to the desired level.

Refrigerant Level Control 26

The following features provide improved Level Control stability.
• Level Control Period Setpoint – Now programmable over the range of 3.5 to 30.0 seconds. Previously, it
was 1.0 to 5.0 seconds.
• The message “Warning – Refrigerant Level Out of Range” and the associated Lower signal that opens
the valve until the level is within range has been eliminated.
• The Ramp-up feature is now only executed immediately after chiller start. Subsequent Ramp functions
during chiller run have been eliminated.
• Rate Limit Open Setpoint – Now programmable over the range of 5% to 50%. Previously, it was 10% to
50%.

YORK INTERNATIONAL 171

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0019 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2002 (CONT'D)

• Rate Limit Close Setpoint – Now programmable over the range of 5% to 50%. Previously, it was 10% to
50%.
• The duration of the open or close pulse applied to the Valve Actuator is now independent of the selected
Period Setpoint. It is now a fixed percentage of 3.5 seconds. Previously, it was a percentage of the Pe-
riod Setpoint. Therefore, longer Periods would produce longer output pulses for the same error, result-
ing in unstable operation under certain conditions.

Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive

• The conditions to produce the “Harmonic Filter – Logic Board or Communications” Cycling shutdown
must now be present for 10 communication cycles before a shutdown is performed.
• If either the 50% or 30% Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature SENSITIVITY Setpoint is selected,
Pre-rotation Vane movement is further reduced when the chiller is operating at low load. When the Vane
position is less than 25% and Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature is within + 2.5 ºF of Setpoint, the
maximum Vane pulse is limited to 3.5 seconds at 25% position and 0.9 seconds at 0% position. Vane
positions in between have linearly scaled maximums.
• In previous Flash Memory Card versions, the SET FREQUENCY Setpoint feature on the VSD TUN-
ING Screen did not correctly set the desired frequency in 50Hz applications. This is corrected in this
version.
• Harmonic Filter Currents are now correctly displayed at maximum values.

History
Chiller Run Time is now included on History Details display and print.

Hot Gas Bypass

The Hot Gas Valve position is now animated on the HOT GAS BYPASS Screen.

172 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

This page intentionally left blank

26

YORK INTERNATIONAL 173

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0034 (203) - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE AUGUST 2002

Flash Memory Card

Beginning August 2002, an enhanced Flash Memory Card will be supplied in new production YK chillers. These
Cards will accommodate the YK Style “F” chiller, scheduled for future release. The Cards are also available from
the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center as replacement parts. They supersede all previous versions of the same
part number. The enhancements that affect the OptiView Control Center are listed below.

The new versions are:

• Nema 1-4 chillers (all compressors)……..C.MLM.01.07.104 (031-01797-001)
• CE chillers (all compressors)…………….C.MLM.01.07.205 (031-01797-002)

In addition to being used on all YK Style "F" chiller/compressor combinations, they are backward compatible to
all previous style YK chiller/compressor combinations. The new card supersedes and will be supplied in place of
031-02073-001 and 031-02073-002 Flash Memory Cards that were previously used for “P” compressor applica-
tions. Part number 031-01797-001 will be supplied in place of 031-02073-001 and 031-01797-002 will be supplied
in place of 031-02073-002
.
The various YK chiller modification level (style)/compressor combinations are equipped differently and have dif-
ferent control requirements. Variables include the following:
• High Speed Thrust bearing proximity sensing – Proximity Probe or Limit Switch
• Flow Sensor – Paddle type (115Vac digital input) or factory mounted thermal type sensor (+5Vdc analog
input)
• Oil Heater Outputs – Either TB1-34 or TB1-64 on I/O Board
• Refrigerant Level Control Default Period – Either 3.5 seconds or 10.0 seconds
• “Oil – Variable Speed Pump-Pressure Setpoint Not Achieved” safety shutdown threshold – Either 25
PSID or 35 PSID

Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.01.07.xxx and later are applicable and backward compatible to all YK chiller/
compressor combinations. They contain all control variables for all combinations. For correct control, the chiller
mod level/compressor size combination must be entered (using Service Access level) using the CHILLER MOD
Setpoint key on the OPERATIONS Screen. The selections are as follows: (Default is “Mod F – GH Compr”)
a. “Mod F – GH Compr”
b. “Mod F – J Compr”
c. “Mod F – P Compr”
d. “Mod CDE – GHJ Compr”
e. “Mod E – P Compr”

Once the appropriate chiller/compressor combination is entered, the program automatically bundles the functionality
and control per the following table:

174 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0034 (203) - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE AUGUST 2002 (CONT'D)

Level
Oil “Oil-Variable Speed
Chiller Mod – Proxmity Control Flow
Heater Pump Pressure Setpoint
Compressor Sense Period Switch
Output* Not Achieved” Threshold*
Default
“Mod C, D, E –
Probe TB1-34 3.5 sec Paddle Type 35 PSID
G, H, J Compr”

“Mod E – P Compr” Limit Switch TB1-64 10.0 sec Paddle Type 25 PSID

“Mod F – Factory Mounted

Limit Switch TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
G, H Compr” Thermal Type
Factory Mounted
“Mod F – J Compr” Probe TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
Thermal Type
Factory mounted
“Mod F – P Compr” Limit Switch TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
Thermal Type
* Not applicable to Mod C and earlier chillers.

Factory Mounted Flow Sensors

Style "F" (and later) chillers are supplied with factory-mounted Flow Sensors on the evaporator and condenser.
These are electronic thermal-type sensors. The operating principle of the sensor is thermal conductivity. It uses the
cooling effect of a flowing liquid to sense flow. The temperature of the heated sensor tip is sensed by a thermistor
located in the tip.

A second thermistor, located higher in the tip in a non-heated area, is only affected by changes in liquid temperature.
The temperatures sensed by the thermistors are compared. Flowing liquid carries heat away from the heated sensor
tip, lowering its temperature. The lower temperature differential between the two thermistors indicates the liquid is
flowing. A higher differential indicates no flow. Each device operates from a 24Vac power source and has a solid
state relay output. On each sensor, one side of the solid state relay output (pin 2) is connected to the microboard
+5Vdc and the other side (pin 4) is connected to a microboard analog input.

When flow is sensed, the solid state relay output is turned on causing it to conduct current through the 7.5K ohm
microboard load resistor to the +5vdc. This applies >+4Vdc to the microboard input (evaporator J7-14; condenser
J7-16). When no flow is sensed, the solid state relay output is turned off, resulting in no conduction through the load
resistor. This applies <1Vdc to the microboard input. To determine the state of the solid state relay, first confirm that
+5vdc is present at pin 2 of the flow sensor. Then connect a voltmeter from Microboard J7-14 (evaporator) or J7-16
(condenser) to microboard TP1 (ground).

The power source is connected to the sensor as follows:

From To
Sensor pin 1 TB1-162 (24Vac)
pin 3 TB6-5 (Gnd)
26
The sensor outputs are connected to the Microboard as follows:
Evaporator:
From To
Sensor pin 2 Microboard J7-1 (+5Vdc)
pin 4 J7-14 (input to Microboard )
Condenser:
Sensor pin 2 Microboard J7-15 (+5Vdc)
pin 4 J7-16 (input to Microboard)

Microboard Program Jumpers JP21 and JP22 must be placed in the positions 2 & 3.
YORK INTERNATIONAL 175
 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0034 (203) - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE AUGUST 2002 (CONT'D)

Proximity Probe/Limit Switch

Previously, YK chillers equipped with “P” compressors used the High Speed Thrust Bearing Limit Switch and all
other compressors used the Proximity Probe. With Style “F” chillers, only the “J” compressor will use the Prox-
imity Probe. Compressors “G”, “H” and “P” will use the Limit Switch.

In previous Flash memory card versions, the Thrust Bearing Limit Switch indication shows a lit LED for a normal
condition and unlit for a faulted condition. In this version, an unlit LED indicates a normal condition and a lit
LED indicates a faulted condition.

Refrigerant Level Control

In previous Flash Memory Card versions, this control operates as follows:
When the chiller enters “System Run”, if the Refrigerant Level Position is less than the CONTROL
SETPOINT, a linearly increasing ramp limit, called the REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET, is applied to the
CONTROL SETPOINT. This ramp limit allows the level to go from the present programmed level to the pro-
grammed CONTROL SETPOINT over a period of 15 minutes. During these 15 minutes, the REFRIGERANT
LEVEL TARGET is used to control the condenser refrigerant level. The Control SETPOINT is then used to
control the refrigerant level for the remainder of chiller run.

In this version, the control will operate as follows:

• While the chiller is stopped, or if the Level Control is disabled, the Refrigerant level “Lower” output is
energized.
• Upon entering chiller Prelube, the Refrigerant Level “Raise” output is energized for the length of the pro-
grammable VALVE PRESET TIME setpoint (0 to 100 seconds; default 50; Service access level). After
pre-positioning, the valve is held in this position until the first 3 minutes of chiller run time have elapsed.
Setting the VALVE PRESET TIME to 0 seconds disables this pre-positioning feature. Setting the Valve
Preset Time to a value greater than 50 seconds has no effect on the Prelube time.
• After 3 minutes of run time, if the Refrigerant Level is less than the CONTROL Setpoint, a linearly in-
creasing ramp limit, called the REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET, is applied to the programmed Con-
trol Setpoint. This ramp limit allows the level to go from the present level to the CONTROL SETPOINT
over a period of time programmed as the RAMP-UP TIME Setpoint (3 to 15 minutes; default 8; Service
access level). During this ramp-up period, the REFRIGERANT LEVEL TARGET is used to control
the refrigerant level in the condenser. The CONTROL SETPOINT is used to control the level during the
remainder of chiller run.
• If the VALVE PRESET TIME SETPOINT is set to 0 seconds and the RAMP-UP TIME Setpoint is set
to 15 minutes, Refrigerant Level Control will operate exactly the same as previous Flash Memory Card
versions.

Microboards
Since the new version Flash Memory Card (as described above) is applicable to all YK chillers with any compres-
sor, the Microboard replacement kit 331-01730-604 previously supplied for YK chillers equipped with “P” com-
pressors is no longer required. The standard 331-01730-601 Microboard replacement kit will be supplied when
the 331-01730-604 is ordered.

176 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

This page intentionally left blank

26

YORK INTERNATIONAL 177

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins
FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0058 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE FEBRUARY 2003

General
Beginning February 2003, an enhanced Flash memory Card will be supplied in all new production YK chillers. These
cards are backward compatible to all previous YK chillers and are available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution
Center as replacement parts. The enhancements are outlined below.

The versions and part numbers are applied as follows:

• NEMA 1-4 chillers C.MLM.01.08.105 (p/n 031-01797-001)
• CE chillers C.MLM.01.08.206 (p/n 031-01797-002)

Flow Sensors
Mod (Style) F chillers are provided with factory mounted thermal-type flow sensors for the evaporator and condenser.
However, this Flash Memory Card version allows Style F chillers to use either the thermal-type or field installed
paddle-type flow sensor. The thermal-type sensors interface to Microboard +5Vdc analog inputs at J7-14 (evaporator)
and J7-16 (condenser). The paddle-type sensors interface to the I/O board 115Vac digital inputs at TB4-12 (evapo-
rator) and TB4-11 (condenser). For the program to read the appropriate inputs for the flow sensor status, the actual
sensor type used must be entered at the keypad OPERATIONS Screen using the Service Access Level.

If the chiller Mod (style) level setpoint on the OPERATIONS Screen is set to “F” (any compressor), the “FLOW
SWITCH” key appears on the OPERATIONS Screen allowing the flow sensor type to be entered. The selections
are “Analog” (thermal-type) or “Digital” (paddle-type). If Analog is selected, the program reads the thermal-type
flow sensor inputs at Microboard analog inputs J7-14 (evaporator) and J7-16 (condenser) and ignores the Digital
inputs. If Digital is selected, the program reads the paddle-type sensor inputs at the I/O Board digital inputs TB4-12
(evaporator) and TB4-11 (condenser) and ignores the Analog inputs.

Enter the applicable flow sensor type as follows:

1. Select SETPOINTS/SETUP/OPERATIONS Screen.
2. Press FLOW SWITCH key.
3. Use Wor X keys to select flow sensor type. Each time the key is pressed, Analog or Digital is alternately
displayed.
4. Press ENTER (✔) key.

Variable Speed Drive Oil Pump

When the oil pump is started during System Prelube, the pump speed command is held at 45Hz for the first 8 sec-
onds before releasing to normal control.

Oil Pressure Threshold

The threshold for “Oil – High Differential Pressure” safety shutdown is changed from 90 PSID to 120 PSID.

Compressor Motor Variable Speed Drive (VSD)

This Flash Memory Card version supports VSD part number 371-03789-xxx (503HP; 60Hz) (419HP; 50Hz). Dis-
play messages unique to this drive are displayed appropriately on the screens as follows: Phase A, B and C Base-
plate Temperatures are displayed on the VSD DETAILS Screen and Filter Baseplate Temperature is displayed on
the FILTER DETAILS Screen.

178 YORK INTERNATIONAL

 FORM 160.54-M1(503)

SI0058 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE FEBRUARY 2003 (CONT'D)

In addition to standard VSD Cycling messages, the following Cycling shutdown messages apply to this VSD:

“VSD – Low Phase A Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

The chiller has shutdown because the Baseplate temperature has decreased to <37 ºF.

“VSD – Low Phase B Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

Same as phase A above.

“VSD – Low Phase C Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

Same as phase A above.

In addition to standard VSD Safety shutdown messages, the following Safety shutdown messages apply to this
VSD:

“VSD – High Phase A Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

The chiller has shutdown because the Baseplate temperature has increased to >158 ºF.

“VSD – High Phase B Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

Same as phase A above.

“VSD – High Phase C Inverter Baseplate Temperature”

Same as phase A above.

“Harmonic Filter – High Baseplate Temperature”

The chiller has shutdown because the Baseplate temperature has increased to >194 ºF.

Microgateway
In previous Flash Card versions, “Start Inhibit” and “Modified Run” codes were transmitted into “Cycling” and
“Safety” shutdown slots in the Microgateway. This alarmed external devices that a Cycling or Safety shutdown
has occurred, when in reality, a Start Inhibit such as Anti-recycle or a Modified Run event such as Current Limit is
in effect. This was incorrect operation. In this version, the codes are transmitted into the proper slots in the Micro-
gateway.

Security Log Screen

In previous Flash Card versions, some setpoint changes were not logged in metric mode. All setpoint changes are
now logged.

26

YORK INTERNATIONAL 179

 Service Information Letters / Bulletins

SI0062 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2003

General
Beginning March 2003, an enhanced Flash Memory Card will be supplied in all new production YK chillers. These
cards are backward compatible to all previous YK chillers and are available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution
Center as replacement parts. The enhancements are outlined below.

The versions and part numbers are applied as follows:

• NEMA 1-4 chillers C.MLM.01.08.105A (p/n 031-01797-001)
• CE chillers C.MLM.01.08.206A (p/n 031-01797-002)

Chiller Style/Compressor Setpoint

In previous Flash Memory Card version, this setpoint key (located on OPERATIONS Screen), was labeled “CHILL-
ER MOD”. For clarity, this setpoint key is now labeled “CHILLER STYLE/COMPRESSOR” (English only).
The functionality of this setpoint has changed slightly as follows:

The previous choice of “Style F chiller/G, H compr” is now “Style F chiller/G, H5-8 compr”. The previous choice
of “Style F chiller/J compr” is now “Style F chiller/J, H3 compr”.

The Chiller Style/Compressor selections are shown below.

Level
Oil “Oil-Variable Speed
Chiller Style/ Proxmity Control
Heater Flow Switch Pump-Pressure Setpoint
Compressor Sense Period
Output* Not Achieved” Threshold*
Default
“Style C, D & E/ Digital
Probe TB1-34 3.5 sec 35 PSID
G, H & J Compr” (Paddle Type)
“Style E/ Digital
Limit Switch TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
P Compr” (Paddle Type)
“Style F/ Programmable
Limit Switch TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
G & H5-8 Compr” (Analog or Digital)
“Style F/ Programmable
Probe TB1-64 3.5 sec 35 PSID
J & H3 Compr” (Analog or Digital)
“Style F/ Programmable
Limit Switch TB1-64 10.0 sec 25 PSID
P Compr” (Analog or Digital)
* Not applicable to Style C and earlier chillers

26

P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 Tele. 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by York International Corporation 2002 www.york.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 160.54-M1 (503)
Supersedes: 160.54-M1 (402)